Helen Joyce on Transgenderism, Ideology and Reality

Helen Joyce on Transgenderism, Ideology and Reality

by Jeremy Nell, Jerm Warfare
September 1, 2023

 

There’s a real hesitancy to dive into certain topics, especially the ones that go against what most people think or believe.

This is clear when it comes to talking about gender identity and the idea that ‘trans women are women’ and, more specifically, that men and women can switch genders.

  • ‘Trans’ women are not women (and vice-versa).
  • Men and women can’t switch genders.

To be clear, there are two genders, and gender and sex are the same thing.

Delving into the postmodernist mindset, words are seen as creating reality.

This perspective is dangerous, discourages debate and promotes a culture of ‘no debate’ in which reality is dismissed outright without consideration. This approach stifles the pursuit of truth and prevents meaningful dialogue.

Furthermore, the concept of ‘sex assigned at birth’ is not only misleading, it’s nonsensical.

Sex is determined at conception and is not something that can be assigned or changed.

As an example, the societal implications of the ‘trans’ movement, particularly in relation to sports, are concerning. The fairness of allowing men, who ‘identify’ as women, to compete in women’s sports is a slippery slope. It is obviously not fair to allow a man, pretending to be a woman, to enter a boxing ring to fight against a woman.

It is based on a moral stance that prioritises the inclusion of ‘trans’ individuals over the integrity of women’s sports.

And it ultimately harms women.

In fact, it harms everything.

Helen Joyce is a journalist and author of Trans: When Ideology Meets Reality.



 

Connect with Jerm Warfare

Cover image credit: ArtificialArtist




How Big Business Uses Big Government to Rape You (And Why You Love It)

How Big Business Uses Big Government to Rape You (And Why You Love It)

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
September 2, 2023

 



Watch on Archive / BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble

FROM 2016: You’ve probably heard all about Upton Sinclair’s 1906 expose of the turn-of-the-century American meatpacking industry and the Chicago stockyards…but everything you’ve heard about it is wrong. The book wasn’t an expose of the meatpackers, the legislation it inspired served to help the industry it sought to punish, and Sinclair himself hated the end result of his book, which aimed for the heart and hit the stomach by accident.

Join us for this month’s edition of the Film, Literature and the New World Order as we learn not to trust what’s on the label of mainline history.

FLASHBACK SHOW NOTES:

Big Government Has Come for This Small-Town Amish Farmer. Here’s How He’s Fighting Back.

Episode 227 – The Regulation Trap

Interview 1382 – The Social Media Regulation Psyop

Upton Sinclair’s “The Jungle” – FLNWO #35

EPISODE SHOW NOTES:

The Jungle (Free Audiobook)

Upton Sinclair – Spartacus Schoolnet

History Brief: Teddy’s Food and Drug Regulation

Horse Meat, Hanford Leak, Obama’s Oscar

Genetic Fallacy: How Monsanto Silences Scientific Dissent

Why Government Regulation is a Lie (and what you can do about it)

Excuse Me, Professor: Challenging the Myths of Progressivism

Meat Packers Rape You – And You Love It

Meat Packing – Mises Wiki

How the Wholesome Meat Act Gives Us Less Wholesome Meat

 

Connect with The Corbett Report

Cover image credit: Angela_Yuriko_Smith




The Maui ‘Build Back Better’ Script

The Maui ‘Build Back Better’ Script 

by Rosanne Lindsay, Nature of Healing
August 31, 2023

 

Can the government take control of the land after a natural disaster and then deem it off limits? Is government capable of creating the “natural” disaster?

Land Grab?
“I’m already thinking about ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into Workforce Housing and to put it back into the families or to make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial.”

– Gov. Josh Green interview with Michael Henessey, Snowflake news, Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, 2023, [13:00 minute mark].

The new governor of Hawaii, Josh Green M.D., a licensed medical doctor, resident of Hawaii, but not a Hawaiian, became governor in December of 2022 and took office in January of  2023. In similar fashion, Maui also elected a new mayor, Richard Bissen, at the same time. But where was the mayor during the disaster? And why is he now facing calls to resign?

“I’m not sure who was in charge.”

– Maui Mayor Richard Bissen

Was the unspeakable Maui disaster the result of incompetence or was it orchestrated by design?

According to an article in the California Globe, Josh Green has been a puppet for the United Nations and a spokesperson for the Build Back Better (bbb) 2030 agenda, which seeks to create “Stack-N-Pack” housing in Smart™ Cities all over the world by 2030.

According to the July 13, 2020 World Economic Forum Playbook, the “bbb” agenda includes: “destruction,” “green recover,” “reset and reinvent,” disasters,” based on “Climate Change.”

In Hawaii, the BBB created the Build Beyond Barriers Working Group empowered to approve and streamline housing construction projects, scheduled for a 5-year build-out based on the U.N. Sustainable Cities and human Settlements. In other words, no more single family homes.

“The 2030 Agenda Sustainable Development Goal 11, “make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable.”

– Build Beyond Barriers Working Group (BBBWG), August 11, 2023,Office of the Governor

The UN document details “Sustainable Human Settlements” under 6) promoting human settlements planning and management in disaster-prone areas.” 

Green is not the only politician promoting the U.N.’s Build Back Better Agenda, the largest effort to “combat climate change.” On October, 28, 2021, President Biden announced the Build Back Better Framework for the U.S.

The buildup to the Maui fires began when Gov. Green issued an emergency housing proclamation three weeks prior. Along with Hawaii’s robust emergency siren warning system, everything should have been ready to flush out any wayward spark. So why did the warning sirens sit silent during the deadly fires?

Agenda Timeline to Fires

Thanks to Peggy Hall for her “Peggy-isms” and her historical reporting featured in her “Maui Fires” Playlist

One month before the Maui fires …(July 12, 2023), Governor Green issued a press release highlighting a commitment to the United Nations (U.N.) 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) under the narrative of uniformity.

We cannot put off changing things any longer. We refuse to stand idle when 2030 looms closer and closer… We only have one Island Earth, let us do our best to take care of it and each other. We are one species, with one planet, one chance.”

– Gov. Josh Green, July 12, 2023

Three weeks before the Maui fires… (July 18 2023), Governor Green issued a controversial Emergency Housing Proclamation titled, Emergency Proclamation relating to Housing” related to natural disasters or Covid. The proclamation not only suspends the laws of Hawaii to gives the Governor broad powers over any emergency, but also removes barriers to building new homes.

The laws suspended include provisions related to historic preservation, county zoning and the state Land Use Commission, which functions as a state-level zoning authority. The order also suspends Hawaii’s environmental review law, which requires in-depth environmental impact statements for projects determined to have a significant impact on natural and cultural resources.

The fast-tracked environmental review process will largely be conducted by the working group and housing officer. While Green promised the group and officer will work transparently, the working group will not be subject to Hawaii’s Sunshine Law, which among things requires decision-making agencies to hold their meetings in public.

One week before the fires… Governor Green spoke at the UN Sustainability Forum:

“We have done some things. One is The Aloha Plus Challenge, which is a data-driven approach… to track the SDGs to make sure that we embed them in all of our policies.”

– Governor Josh Green speaks at Sustainability Forum, United Nations, Source: Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, ,2023 [minute mark 19:00].

After the fires… Gov. Green took the spotlight several times. Did he make any contradictory statements?

“This is going to be a multi-year recovery. It’s going to take essentially years to rebuild Lahaina which was destroyed. But we will build it back better……We will find a way to make sure there is more housing…”  

Source: KTIV interview  August 11, 2023,  5:11 minute mark


“It was so hot that even metal contorted.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


“When you see mostly fatalities and very few injuries, that tells you it was a natural disaster.”

– In response to “You would still call this a natural disaster and not man-made? Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


“I would call this a natural disaster because the winds were moving any fire between 60 and 80 miles per hour, that’s a mile a minute.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


“If you put a fire truck in the way of the flames that were coming through at a thousand miles per hour, the fire truck would have been incinerated in addition to the people.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


*I’m already thinking about ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into Workforce Housing and to put it back into the families or to make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial.”

– Gov. Josh Green interview with Michael Henessey, Snowflake news, Source: Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, 2023,


“That level of destruction in a fire hurricane, something new to us in this age of global warming, was the ultimate reason that so many people perished.”

– Josh Green KITV News, Source Global Warming Caused Deaths says Gov. Josh Green, August 16, 2023


“There are going to be fires months in and months out for decades to come.”

– Josh Green, local news update KITV, Source: Not Sounding the Sirens Was Intentional. August 17, 2023

Things Don’t Add Up

One of the few objective investigators connecting the dots, and highlighting the odd behavior of Governor Green, is Peggy Hall.

Peggy raises concerns that everyone should be raising about the dramatic changes happening behind the devastating scenes of Lahaina, Hawaii.

“Why did the emergency alert not go out to the population?”

Things Don’t Add Up, August 11, 2023


“How is it that my NAV System in my car can know exactly to the minute when I’m going to arrive, but it [technology] can’t predict these weather events?”

Things Don’t Add Up, August 11, 2023


“Why was there no water in the pumps?

– Global Warming Caused Deaths says Gov. Josh Green, August 16, 2023


“Because Maui is now in a state of emergency, he [Josh Green] can suspend any law he wants… he can take people’s private property. He can take control of the public property. He can prevent people from moving in or out. And then, he wants to prevent people from having their own will to sell their property.”

– GLOBAL WARMING CAUSED DEATHS Says Gov. Josh GREEN  August 16, 2023


“It was not a ‘wild fire.’ It was an urban fire.”

 (More) Weird Comments from Josh Green, August 17, 2023


“How did the fire get put out? Who put the fire out? There was no water. The fire fighters fled the scene in a police car… Why was the fire chief not even on the island?”

Maui Fire Chief Missing, August 22, 2023


“Am I the only one bothered by the phrase ‘human settlements?'”

– Emergency Declared 3 Weeks Before Maui Fire. August 23, 2023


“There is no legal authority for this governor to do what they are doing.”

Proof Of Lahaina Land Grab, August 29, 2023


“The suspension of laws will work? We are are a nation that is supposed to follow laws, not suspend them.”

Proof Of Lahaina Land Grab, August 29, 2023

These “holes in the narrative” strengthen the premise for a land grab. Some of  the biggest holes include 1) the fires were instigated by a “hurricane-fire” that blew in from hurricane winds too far away from the island to spread any natural flames, and 2) The flames spread at a speed of” 60-85 mph, “or even “1000 mph,” both speeds suggested by Governor Green in the same interview.

Directed Energy Weapons

How did the fire begin? Some say power lines. Some say a brush fire near the site. Some say ‘a ‘compound disaster’ and climate change. Army Major General Kenneth Hara, the man in charge of the Hawaii National Guard says, “We don’t know what actually caused the wildfires in Hawaii.”

The U.S. Government admits to manipulating hurricanes. The history of Project Cirrus describes the extent to which corporations and government work together to manipulate the weather. [See Peggy’s take].

The nature of the Maui fires cause some to compare Maui to Paradise, California that burned in a similar pattern in November of 2018 where homes and cars burned while trees were left standing.

If “metal contorted” and bodies turned to ash in Lahaina, Peggy Hall reminds viewers that metal melts at 250oº F for a sustained amount of time, whereas normal fires bun at 1400º F. Is the Maui devastation proof of a natural fire fed by grass, as the narrative goes, or directed microwave energy?

Companies that contract with the Department of Defense include the Air Force and companies such as Northrop Grumman which have used unmanned aerial systems, including directed energy laser technology for the last 50 years. Is it a coincidence that the AMOS site is located on Maui, Hawaii?

“The sodium laser excites sodium atoms in the upper atmosphere to create a source of light or beacon 90 kilometers (55 miles) above the Earth.”

–  AFRL at the Maui, Hawaii Site, part of the Space Electro-Optics Division.

Reinventing Capitalism

The Build-Back-Better Agenda is part of the World Economic Forum script, tied to reinventing Capitalism that reads as follows:

Thanks to the ongoing pandemic, the world is off-balance – and it will remain so for years to come. Far from settling into a ‘new normal’, we should expect a COVID-19 domino effect, triggering further disruptions – positive as well as negative ­– over the decade ahead….

A true recovery from COVID-19 will not be about putting things back together the way they were: we need to ‘build back better’, to ‘reset’, if we are to address the deep systemic vulnerabilities the pandemic has exposed.

Increasingly, comprehensive and integrated risk assessments will be essential for companies to fulfil their fiduciary obligations and maintain their social license to operate.

The U.S. version of the Build Back Better script can be read here.

The questions left to ponder are: were the fires set intentionally? Were they accelerated? Augmented?  If so, where will the next one be? What will the new restrictions on freedom look like? Did the 1976 Eagles song, The Last Resort, from the album Hotel California, foretell the events in Paradise and Lahaina? [see verses 4, 6, & 8].



Will you agree to the new U.N. terms?

Thank you to the amazing Peggy Hall for compiling the dots!

 

Related Articles

 

Connect with Rosanne Lindsay

Cover image credit: State Farm under Creative Commons License

 


TCTL editor’s note:

In the article above, Rosanne shared links to The Last Resort by The Eagles. “Did the 1976 Eagles song, The Last Resort, from the album Hotel California, foretell the events in Paradise and Lahaina?”

Here are the lyrics:

She came from Providence
One in Rhode Island
Where the old world shadows hang
Heavy in the air
She packed her hopes and dreams
Like a refugee
Just as her father came
Across the sea

She heard about a place
People were smilin’
They spoke about the red man’s way
How they loved the land
They came from everywhere
To the Great Divide
Seeking a place to stand
Or a place to hide

Down in the crowded bars
Out for a good time
Can’t wait to tell you all
What it’s like up there
They called it paradise
I don’t know why
Somebody laid the mountains low
While the town got high

Then the chilly winds blew down
Across the desert
Through the canyons of the coast
To the Malibu
Where the pretty people play
Hungry for power
To light their neon way
Give them things to do

Some rich men came and raped the land
Nobody caught ’em
Put up a bunch of ugly boxes
And Jesus people bought ’em
They called it paradise
The place to be
They watched the hazy sun
Sinking in the sea

We can leave it all behind and sail to Lahaina
Just like the missionaries did so many years ago
They even brought a neon sign said, “Jesus is coming.”
Brought the white man’s burden down
Brought the white man’s reign

Who will provide the grand design?
What is yours and what is mine?
‘Cause there is no more new frontier
We have got to make it here

We satisfy our endless needs
And justify our bloody deeds
In the name of destiny
And in the name of God

And you can see them there
On Sunday morning
They stand up and sing about
What it’s like up there
They call it paradise
I don’t know why
You call someplace paradise
Kiss it goodbye




COVID2099: “A New COVID Variant Called BS.24/7 Is Sweeping Across the Universe”

COVID2099: “A New COVID Variant Called BS.24/7 Is Sweeping Across the Universe”

by Frances Leader, Uncensored
August 31, 2023

 

A new COVID variant called BS.24/7 is sweeping across the Universe as cases and hospitalisations rise. The fast-spreading subvariant, nicknamed Crap, is now the dominant strain circulating in the Universe, health officials say.

Image captured by a Starlink satellite (actual size)

Right now, BS.24/7 accounts for the largest proportion of suspected infections in the Universe, more than any other variant, according to the latest data from the Universal Centres for Disease Control and Prevention.

BS.24/7 is a subvariant of Omicron990027.Z and a descendant of the TOXDCrap sublineage, which means it’s related to the previous dominant strains circulating this past century.

According to the Universal Health Organisation, BS.24/7 made up an estimated 90.6% of new COVID cases during the period ending on Aug. 18. After BS.24/7, the next most common subvariant is another Omicron TOXDCrap descendant, BS.101, which accounted for 73.3% of cases in Galaxy20, and FKT.U (also called Uv-bin-ad), which made up 99.7% of cases on the SMART human farms in the Outer Rim Territories.

(see map)

On Aug. 9, the Universal Health Organisation decided to re-classify BS.24/7 to a variant of imminent death. According to the latest UHO data, BS.24/7 and BS.101 are now the most prevalent COVID strains ever known, together accounting for 91% of computerised (in silico) sequences reported to inter-galactic AI by robots.

“When we look at its sequence, BS.24/7 is really similar to the other TOXD variants that are circulating right now, with a couple of small changes,” reports Dr. Ivor Sorwilli, a renowned virologist at the isolated Johns Hopkins University, Mars Campus.

The UHO added BS.24/7 to its list of potentially deadly variants under monitoring on July 19, 2099, but the variant was first detected in August 2023. “Scientists have known about this variant, and it’s been present in other Galaxies as well, but an inter-galactic electro-magnetic pulse temporarily knocked out our toaster.” says Sorwilli.

So far, BS.24/7 has been reported in 51 other Universes and there has been a steady increase in prevalence among crickets — the majority of the in silico genetic sequences originated in China, Russia and Iran which were immediately depopulated by stealth electro-magnetic radiation as a precaution.

Tourists are advised to avoid visiting the quarantined planet Earth which is known to be completely riddled with BS.24/7. Earthlings are not permitted to breathe, communicate or travel beyond their bathrooms.

Further updates will be posted on IntergalacticXtreme and MetaverseNotUrM8 social authority media sites. If you are still experiencing the impact of the inter-galactic electro-magnetic pulse, tough titties.

 

Connect with Frances Leader

Cover image credit: Jordan_Singh




Drs. Sam and Mark Bailey on the Existence of Viruses

Drs. Sam and Mark Bailey on the Existence of Viruses
Everything we’ve been taught about viruses and virology is completely wrong

by Patrick Timpone, One Radio Network
August 30, 2023

 

About Dr. Sam Bailey: After training and practicing within the medical system for two decades, she commenced a new phase of understanding and promoting health as a wider concept.

In 2019, Sam launched her YouTube channel exposing the hidden scientific truths about health.

A few years later and after taking the red pill, Bailey’s channel has become a runaway hit with 20+ million views and 300,000+ subscribers to help people understand the simple ways they can take control of their health.

She is the co-author of Virus Mania, which examines how the medical industry continually invents epidemics to make billion-dollar profits at our expense.

About Dr. Mark Bailey: Mark is the husband of Dr Sam Bailey and when you see one of them, you are really seeing both of them. They started working together when they first met in 2007 and have been a close team ever since. Mark and Sam are based in New Zealand and have three children together.

Since early 2020 he has been the duo’s chief researcher with a focus on microbiology, the existence of viruses, as well as historical and epistemological issues within medical science.

Is There Anything Floating in the Air – Trying to Infect Us?

 

Connect with One Radio Network

Connect with Mark & Sam Bailey




Doug Casey on Argentina’s Javier Milei, Anarcho-Capitalist Front-Runner in the Presidential Primaries

Doug Casey on Argentina’s Javier Milei, Anarcho-Capitalist Front-Runner in the Presidential Primaries

 

 

Doug Casey on the World’s First Anarcho-Capitalist President

by Doug Casey, International Man
August 30, 2023

 

International Man: Anarcho-capitalist Javier Milei recently won Argentina’s presidential primary. He is now the undisputed front-runner in the upcoming elections.

The outcome took many by surprise. Milei is an outsider who bested the country’s two entrenched establishment parties.

How did this happen, and why should anyone outside of Argentina care?

Doug Casey: It could be the most dramatic thing that’s happened politically since at least World War II. Anywhere. Why? Because he’s an AnCap libertarian who’d like to abolish the State—or come as close as possible. If he’s elected in October, he’ll make every move possible to eliminate—not just reduce—as many government departments as possible as quickly as possible. And most people seem oblivious to it.

Milei was in first place in the primary. Historically, in Argentina, the person who wins the primary wins the general election. There’s only been one exception to that rule. Even more encouraging is his ratings have gone up from 30% to 40% since the primary. It appears his campaign is not just a flash in the pan but a trend that’s building momentum.

Argentina was one of the most prosperous countries in the world a hundred years ago when it was about as free as any country economically. Before Peron, the Argentine GDP equaled the rest of the continent put together. But since the accession of Juan Peron in 1946, it’s consistently gone downhill every year.

Why might that be?

Peron was an overt fan of Mussolini and fascism. Fascism—a word coined by Mussolini—is defined as the complete subordination of corporations and business to the State. After WW2, the word “fascism” was a no-no, so the system was rechristened “Peronism” in Argentina. It’s not a consistent philosophy; it has many mutations. It’s all about businessmen and politicians using each other, through the State, to get rich. The lower classes are made dependent, and the middle class is impoverished. Fascism has little to do with militarism and jackboots; it’s an economic system. Almost every country in the world is fascist today—including the US, the EU, China, and Russia.

Despite the triumph of Peronism, Argentina still has the most classically liberal traditions in all of Latin America. It’s always been the most outward-looking country in Latin America. I’ve always believed it was the most fertile ground for a pro-individual liberty revolution in Latin America. Now, that may be happening.

If we divide Argentine society into a ruling, a lower, and a middle class, it’s clear that for the last 80 years, the ruling class has used welfare schemes and lies to get the lower classes to vote against their own interests. The middle class has paid for it with immense taxes and regulations. Inflation has basically destroyed the lower and middle classes; high inflation has made it impossible for them to save and build capital.

Milei could totally overturn all of this. The average Argentine is fed up with being ripped off. Milei’s support is greatest among the young and what’s left of the middle class. Estimates are that half the country is hard-pressed to feed themselves. They desperately and enthusiastically want radical change, and only the most stupid can’t see what fascism, socialism, and other varieties of statism have done. The main supporters of the status quo are the unions and welfare mooches. Everyone else hates them.

International Man: Milei has called central banking and fiat currency a historical fraud. He has vowed to “burn down the central bank” and replace the peso with the dollar and whatever commodity the free market would choose as money. He is favorable to precious metals and Bitcoin.

He has called taxation theft and seeks to drastically reduce—and eventually eliminate—many taxes.

Milei also wants to radically cut down the size of the government and eliminate numerous departments.

He also rejects the climate change hoax and was critical of the Covid mass hysteria.

Doug, you are a prominent anarcho-capitalist. What is your take on the soundness of Milei’s platform?

Doug Casey: I am totally in favor of Milei. In fact, he’s more radical (using radical in the proper sense of getting to the root of the problem) than Ron Paul was in his US campaigns. He’s as radical and sincere as my old friend Harry Browne, who ran for the US presidency in 1996 and 2000.

Milei is extremely outspoken and vibrant. He realizes that, since the average person doesn’t understand economics and has no interest in philosophy, politics is 90% entertainment. I urge everybody reading this to go to YouTube and tune into several videos of Milei (herehere, and here).

Milei is totally sound from an economic, political, and a philosophical point of view. But—and this is critically important—he’s sound from a moral point of view.

He deals in basic concepts of good and evil, right and wrong. That’s something that no politician anywhere discusses, certainly not in South America. It’s the equivalent of hitting a donkey between the eyes with a two-by-four to get his attention. Everyone intuitively understands that the political class is essentially criminal—but only Milei is brave enough to say it. The average guy wants to do the right thing, the moral thing. That’s what Milei is pointing out to people and why they like him. He doesn’t use doubletalk, brook compromise, or support half measures.

That’s why, in the US, I actually respect the Democrats more than the Republicans.

How can I say that?

Every idea the Democrats have is wrong and rotten to its core, but at least they’re not hypocrites. They say what they want to do. They actually believe in something, even though it’s stupid and evil.

The Republicans, on the other hand, don’t have any real core beliefs. They don’t disagree with the moral premises of the Democrats. They just say that the Democrats are going too far, too fast.

Milei, on the other hand, wants to overturn the moral structure that politics is built on.

International Man: The global mainstream media has synchronized their talking points on Milei.

It’s almost impossible to find an article about Milei—in any language—that doesn’t preface him with some kind of meaningless pejorative, labeling him a “far-right populist,” an “ultra-rightist,” or something to that effect.

Why is the Davos class so afraid of Milei? Can he overcome their opposition?

Doug Casey: This is further proof of how worthless the mainstream media is. They call Milei a Donald Trump lookalike, or ultra-right wing, in an attempt to scare Boobus argentinus. These people don’t deal in issues and factual programs but fear-mongering. Everywhere in the world, the chattering classes are only malevolent mouthpieces of the ruling class.

Milei is not “ultra-right.” He’s a libertarian who believes in free minds and free markets. In fact, he’s more than a libertarian; he’s an AnCap—an anarcho-capitalist. He doesn’t believe the State serves a useful purpose. He believes that society, certainly in an advanced industrial country, can live without a government. I’ve discussed this philosophy here and here.

His plan is to reduce the size of the government by 50% this year, 50% the next year, and so on, until it’s as near zero as possible. The horrible people in Davos hate him because he’s attacking their very essence. He doesn’t intend just to make a few changes around the edges but to transform Argentina into the freest and most prosperous country on the planet.

In some ways, he’s symptomatic of what’s going on in the world at large today. The United States itself, in my opinion, is on the ragged edge of a civil war. Freedom and personal liberty have been retreating at an accelerating rate for years. People in the US are just as fed up as the Argentines; we just don’t have a proper firebrand. Trump is as close as we get, but he’s just a traditionalist, not a libertarian.

Milei is cause for optimism in the world at large.

International Man: President Nayib Bukele dramatically transformed El Salvador at lightning speed—drastically reducing crime, making Bitcoin legal money, and initiating reforms to bring business and productive people to the country.

Although Argentina is much bigger than El Salvador, does Bukele’s example suggest that enormous positive change is possible in Argentina?

Doug Casey: Bukele is another symptom of a possible major turnaround in the world.

The statists and collectivists may finally have overplayed their hand. They’re just clever criminals with large followings, like Hitler in Germany and Mao in China. Only the brain-dead buy their themes. “You’ll own nothing, and you’ll be happy.” The world is ending because of climate change. Vaccinate or die. 15-minute cities. Restricted travel. No eating meat. ESG. DEI. No fossil fuels. It’s a long litany. They can destroy civilization itself.

People with a brain are looking for a lightning rod to catalyze change.

In El Salvador that may be Bukele. He definitely has libertarian instincts, indicated by the fact his main economic advisor is Safedean Ammous, an AnCap. He’s one of the most important economists in the world today, along with Walter Block and Hans-Hermann Hoppe. I urge you to listen to the interview he did with me last month on AnCap principles (link).

El Salvador is the last country in the hemisphere—with the exception of Haiti—I would have picked to turn around. It’s the most overpopulated country in the hemisphere. It’s crime-ridden, which is why he’s locked up 65,000 gang members. It had a nasty civil war from 1979-1982. It has no exports except for coffee, bananas, and poor people. Who could have guessed?

Bukele already made Bitcoin legal tender. It’s possible that he’ll reform El Salvador in the same way as Milei will try to reform Argentina.

International Man: What are the investment or speculative implications of Milei’s rise for Argentine assets?

What are the lifestyle and other international diversification implications?

Doug Casey: Right now, Argentina is the cheapest, nice country in the world. Certainly the cheapest country in the Western world.

That’s especially amazing in view of the immense tax burden that the Argentine economy has to bear, paying huge numbers of useless mouths who detract from prosperity.

If Milei is elected, he’ll radically reduce taxes, which means that costs of production will drop radically. As the country dollarizes, the currency will stabilize, and gold could come next. Real prices could drop further, but not because of a collapsing currency. The economy should boom economically as investment pours in. People will go back to work, start saving, and rebuild domestic capital. Argentina could quickly become, again, one of the world’s richest countries.

What could go wrong with the scenario? The parasites now living off the State don’t want their rice bowls broken. Even though Milei has huge support from people across the social spectrum—including the lower classes who are fed up with being kept like pets by the people in the Deep State. The Deep State will undoubtedly fight Milei’s reforms viciously. I hope he has plenty of competent bodyguards around him because these people are genuinely evil, just like the Deep State in the US.

If he’s elected, both the lifestyle and investment implications could be huge.

Argentina has always been one of my favorite countries in the world, bar none. But if they go to sound banking, a sound currency, and disregard the rules laid down by the US, the IMF, the World Bank, and the World Economic Forum—it could really be one of the best places in the world to live.

You ought to keep in mind that citizenship is available with only two years of residency. And even during those two years of residency, it’s only necessary to spend half of the year in the country. Culturally, Argentina is more European than some countries in Europe.

If Milei manages to wash away the socialist immorality and criminality that has corrupted Argentina for so many years, I won’t just live down there half of the year, but all of the year.

 

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: VOX España

 




Revisiting Paradise California – Where Are the Chimneys?

Revisiting Paradise California – Where Are the Chimneys?

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 29, 2023

 

In the pictures below, we find that the houses in Paradise, California destroyed during the alleged wildfire on November 8, 2018. Notice that unburned trees surround the houses razed to the ground.

How could the houses be destroyed by a wildfire fed by burning trees when none of the trees in the forest surrounding the homes burned? The answer is disturbing, but it is the only logical answer: the buildings were immolated through directed energy weapons.

The unburned trees are a clue that directed energy weapons were used. One of the two principal directed energy weapons uses microwaves. Microwaves have little effect on wood and paper because they absorb little of the microwaves. It is similar to putting a paper plate in a microwave oven. It will not burn. But putting aluminum foil into that same microwave oven will spark and catch fire. Another directed energy weapon developed by the military uses lasers, which are able to burn wood and other combustible materials.

Another clue that directed energy weapons were used is the absence of fireplaces or chimneys in the remnants of the immolated houses. Ordinarily, a chimney and fireplace will remain standing after a house is burned down. That is because the fireplaces and chimneys are designed to withstand the heat of fires. But directed energy weapons work on a different principle. They are a form of electromagnetic energy that affects material at the molecular level. Heat results in the process of destruction, and often there will be fire. But the microwave directed energy weapons destroy material by affecting the molecular bonds. Thus, the directed energy weapons can destroy chimneys and fireplaces, where those same chimneys and fireplaces would withstand the heat of an ordinary fire. The absence of chimneys and fireplaces is evidence that directed energy weapons were used to raze the houses to the ground.

Above and below are some of the homes that were destroyed during the alleged November 8, 2018, wildfire in Paradise, California. The problem is that the trees that are supposed to have caused the immolation of the houses are still standing and show no sign of any fire damage.

One notable feature of the house that have been completely razed to the ground is that most houses have no remaining chimneys or fireplaces. In an ordinary house fire, the fireplace and chimney typically remain because they are designed to withstand the heat from a fire.

There is only one way to cause the kind of selective destruction where fireplaces and chimneys are destroyed but combustible trees remain: directed energy weapons. There are two principal kinds of directed energy weapons, microwave and laser. Microwave directed energy weapons affect dense materials causing destruction at the molecular level, but will not burn tree. Laser directed energy weapons will ignite wood and trees.

Above are the remains of the Brennan House in Wellfleet, Massachusetts, which was believed to have been destroyed by an arsonist in 2017. Notice that the chimney and concrete foundation remained. It is typical in a house fire to find the chimney and fireplace remaining because they are designed to withstand the heat of fires. Compare that to the houses in Paradise, California, that were allegedly razed to the ground by wildfires. But there are no remaining chimneys on any of the immolated homes.

 

 

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

The Dog That Didn’t Bark

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Police Blocked Roads To Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

Telltale Evidence That Lahaina Was Destroyed By Directed Energy Weapons

More Evidence That Directed Energy Weapons Were Used to Immolate Lahaina

 

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: Test Subject 51




We the Targeted: How the Government Weaponizes Surveillance to Silence Its Critics

We the Targeted: How the Government Weaponizes Surveillance to Silence Its Critics

by John & Nisha Whitehead, The Rutherford Institute
August 29, 2023

 

“Once a government is committed to the principle of silencing the voice of opposition, it has only one way to go, and that is down the path of increasingly repressive measures, until it becomes a source of terror to all its citizens and creates a country where everyone lives in fear.”

— President Harry S. Truman

Ever since Martin Luther King Jr. delivered his groundbreaking “I Have a Dream” speech during the March on Washington for Jobs and Freedom on Aug. 28, 1963, the Deep State has been hard at work turning King’s dream into a living nightmare.

The end result of the government’s efforts over the past 60 years is a country where nothing ever really changes, and everyone lives in fear.

Race wars are still being stoked by both the Right and the Left; the military-industrial complex is still waging profit-driven wars at taxpayer expense; the oligarchy is still calling the shots in the seats of government power; and the government is still weaponizing surveillance in order to muzzle anti-government sentiment, harass activists, and terrorize Americans into compliance.

This last point is particularly disturbing.

Starting in the 1950s, the government relied on COINTELPRO, its domestic intelligence program, to neutralize domestic political dissidents. Those targeted by the FBI under COINTELPRO for its intimidation, surveillance and smear campaigns included: Martin Luther King Jr., Malcom X, the Black Panther Party, John Lennon, Billie Holiday, Emma Goldman, Aretha Franklin, Charlie Chaplin, Ernest Hemingway, Felix Frankfurter, and hundreds more.

In more recent decades, the powers-that-be have expanded their reach to target anyone who opposes the police state, regardless of their political leanings.

Advances in technology have enabled the government to deploy a veritable arsenal of surveillance weapons in order to “expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit, or otherwise neutralize” perceived threats to the government’s power.

Surveillance cameras mounted on utility poles, traffic lights, businesses, and homes. License plate readers. Ring doorbells. GPS devices. Dash cameras. Drones. Store security cameras. Geofencing and geotracking. FitBits. Alexa. Internet-connected devices. Geofencing dragnets. Fusion centers. Smart devices. Behavioral threat assessments. Terror watch lists. Facial recognition. Snitch tip lines. Biometric scanners. Pre-crime. DNA databases. Data mining. Precognitive technology. Contact tracing apps.

What these add up to is a world in which, on any given day, the average person is now monitored, surveilled, spied on and tracked in more than 20 different ways by both government and corporate eyes and ears.

Consider just a small sampling of the ways in which the government is weaponizing its 360 degree surveillance technologies to flag you as a threat to national security, whether or not you’ve done anything wrong.

Flagging you as a danger based on your feelings. Customs and Border Protection is reportedly using an artificial intelligence surveillance program that can detect “sentiment and emotion” in social media posts in order to identify travelers who may be “a threat to public safety, national security, or lawful trade and travel.”

Flagging you as a danger based on your phone and movements. Cell phones have become de facto snitches, offering up a steady stream of digital location data on users’ movements and travels. For instance, the FBI was able to use geofence data to identify more than 5,000 mobile devices (and their owners) in a 4-acre area around the Capitol on January 6. This latest surveillance tactic could land you in jail for being in the “wrong place and time.” Police are also using cell-site simulators to carry out mass surveillance of protests without the need for a warrant. Moreover, federal agents can now employ a number of hacking methods in order to gain access to your computer activities and “see” whatever you’re seeing on your monitor. Malicious hacking software can also be used to remotely activate cameras and microphones, offering another means of glimpsing into the personal business of a target.

Flagging you as a danger based on your DNA. DNA technology in the hands of government officials completes our transition to a Surveillance State. If you have the misfortune to leave your DNA traces anywhere a crime has been committed, you’ve already got a file somewhere in some state or federal database—albeit it may be a file without a name. By accessing your DNA, the government will soon know everything else about you that they don’t already know: your family chart, your ancestry, what you look like, your health history, your inclination to follow orders or chart your own course, etc. After all, a DNA print reveals everything about “who we are, where we come from, and who we will be.” It can also be used to predict the physical appearance of potential suspects. It’s only a matter of time before the police state’s pursuit of criminals expands into genetic profiling and a preemptive hunt for criminals of the future.

Flagging you as a danger based on your face. Facial recognition software aims to create a society in which every individual who steps out into public is tracked and recorded as they go about their daily business. Coupled with surveillance cameras that blanket the country, facial recognition technology allows the government and its corporate partners to identify and track someone’s movements in real-time. One particularly controversial software program created by Clearview AI has been used by police, the FBI and the Department of Homeland Security to collect photos on social media sites for inclusion in a massive facial recognition database. Similarly, biometric software, which relies on one’s unique identifiers (fingerprints, irises, voice prints), is becoming the standard for navigating security lines, as well as bypassing digital locks and gaining access to phones, computers, office buildings, etc. In fact, greater numbers of travelers are opting into programs that rely on their biometrics in order to avoid long waits at airport security. Scientists are also developing lasers that can identify and surveil individuals based on their heartbeats, scent and microbiome.

Flagging you as a danger based on your behavior. Rapid advances in behavioral surveillance are not only making it possible for individuals to be monitored and tracked based on their patterns of movement or behavior, including gait recognition (the way one walks), but have given rise to whole industries that revolve around predicting one’s behavior based on data and surveillance patterns and are also shaping the behaviors of whole populations. One smart “anti-riot” surveillance system purports to predict mass riots and unauthorized public events by using artificial intelligence to analyze social media, news sources, surveillance video feeds and public transportation data.

Flagging you as a danger based on your spending and consumer activities. With every smartphone we buy, every GPS device we install, every Twitter, Facebook, and Google account we open, every frequent buyer card we use for purchases—whether at the grocer’s, the yogurt shop, the airlines or the department store—and every credit and debit card we use to pay for our transactions, we’re helping Corporate America build a dossier for its government counterparts on who we know, what we think, how we spend our money, and how we spend our time. Consumer surveillance, by which your activities and data in the physical and online realms are tracked and shared with advertisers, has become a $300 billion industry that routinely harvests your data for profit. Corporations such as Target have not only been tracking and assessing the behavior of their customers, particularly their purchasing patterns, for years, but the retailer has also funded major surveillance in cities across the country and developed behavioral surveillance algorithms that can determine whether someone’s mannerisms might fit the profile of a thief.

Flagging you as a danger based on your public activities. Private corporations in conjunction with police agencies throughout the country have created a web of surveillance that encompasses all major cities in order to monitor large groups of people seamlessly, as in the case of protests and rallies. They are also engaging in extensive online surveillance, looking for any hints of “large public events, social unrest, gang communications, and criminally predicated individuals.” Defense contractors have been at the forefront of this lucrative market. Fusion centers, $330 million-a-year, information-sharing hubs for federal, state and law enforcement agencies, monitor and report such “suspicious” behavior as people buying pallets of bottled water, photographing government buildings, and applying for a pilot’s license as “suspicious activity.”

Flagging you as a danger based on your social media activities. Every move you make, especially on social media, is monitored, mined for data, crunched, and tabulated in order to form a picture of who you are, what makes you tick, and how best to control you when and if it becomes necessary to bring you in line. As The Intercept reported, the FBI, CIA, NSA and other government agencies are increasingly investing in and relying on corporate surveillance technologies that can mine constitutionally protected speech on social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and Instagram in order to identify potential extremists and predict who might engage in future acts of anti-government behavior. This obsession with social media as a form of surveillance will have some frightening consequences in coming years. As Helen A.S. Popkin, writing for NBC News, observed, “We may very well face a future where algorithms bust people en masse for referencing illegal ‘Game of Thrones’ downloads… the new software has the potential to roll, Terminator-style, targeting every social media user with a shameful confession or questionable sense of humor.”

Flagging you as a danger based on your social network. Not content to merely spy on individuals through their online activity, government agencies are now using surveillance technology to track one’s social network, the people you might connect with by phone, text message, email or through social message, in order to ferret out possible criminals. An FBI document obtained by Rolling Stone speaks to the ease with which agents are able to access address book data from Facebook’s WhatsApp and Apple’s iMessage services from the accounts of targeted individuals and individuals not under investigation who might have a targeted individual within their network. What this creates is a “guilt by association” society in which we are all as guilty as the most culpable person in our address book.

Flagging you as a danger based on your car. License plate readers are mass surveillance tools that can photograph over 1,800 license tag numbers per minute, take a picture of every passing license tag number and store the tag number and the date, time, and location of the picture in a searchable database, then share the data with law enforcement, fusion centers and private companies to track the movements of persons in their cars. With tens of thousands of these license plate readers now in operation throughout the country, affixed to overpasses, cop cars and throughout business sectors and residential neighborhoods, it allows police to track vehicles and run the plates through law enforcement databases for abducted children, stolen cars, missing people and wanted fugitives. Of course, the technology is not infallible: there have been numerous incidents in which police have mistakenly relied on license plate data to capture out suspects only to end up detaining innocent people at gunpoint.

Flagging you as a danger based on your political views. The Church Committee, the Senate task force charged with investigating COINTELPRO abuses in 1975, concluded that the government had carried out “secret surveillance of citizens on the basis of their political beliefs, even when those beliefs posed no threat of violence or illegal acts on behalf of a hostile foreign power.” The report continued: “Groups and individuals have been harassed and disrupted because of their political views and their lifestyles… Intelligence agencies have served the political and personal objectives of presidents and other high officials.” Nothing has changed since then.

Flagging you as a danger based on your correspondence. Just about every branch of the government—from the Postal Service to the Treasury Department and every agency in between—now has its own surveillance sector, authorized to spy on the American people. For instance, the U.S. Postal Service, which has been photographing the exterior of every piece of paper mail for the past 20 years, is also spying on Americans’ texts, emails and social media posts. Headed up by the Postal Service’s law enforcement division, the Internet Covert Operations Program (iCOP) is reportedly using facial recognition technology, combined with fake online identities, to ferret out potential troublemakers with “inflammatory” posts. The agency claims the online surveillance, which falls outside its conventional job scope of processing and delivering paper mail, is necessary to help postal workers avoid “potentially volatile situations.”

Now the government wants us to believe that we have nothing to fear from these mass spying programs as long as we’ve done nothing wrong.

Don’t believe it.

As Matthew Feeney warns in the New York Times, “In the past, Communists, civil rights leaders, feminists, Quakers, folk singers, war protesters and others have been on the receiving end of law enforcement surveillance. No one knows who the next target will be.

The government’s definition of a “bad” guy is extraordinarily broad, and it results in the warrantless surveillance of innocent, law-abiding Americans on a staggering scale.

Moreover, there is a repressive, suppressive effect to surveillance that not only acts as a potentially small deterrent on crime but serves to monitor and chill lawful First Amendment activity, and that is the whole point.

Weaponized surveillance is re-engineering a society structured around the aesthetic of fear.

As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, the police state wants us silent, servile and compliant.

They definitely do not want us to engage in First Amendment activities that challenge the government’s power, reveal the government’s corruption, expose the government’s lies, and encourage the citizenry to push back against the government’s many injustices.

And they certainly do not want us to remember that we have rights, let alone attempting to exercise those rights peaceably and lawfully, whether it’s protesting police brutality and racism, challenging COVID-19 mandates, questioning election outcomes, or listening to alternate viewpoints—even conspiratorial ones—in order to form our own opinions about the true nature of government.

 

Connect with The Rutherford Institute

Cover image credit: Tumisu




Was Weaponized GIS Used in Lahaina?

Was Weaponized GIS Used in Lahaina?
Click-and-destroy program for “sustainable redevelopment” 

by Sasha Latypova, Due Diligence & Art
August 28, 2023

 

This information is from an anonymous contributor. It describes the evidence from the GIS (Geographic Information System) of extreme precision and selectivity of the Lahaina fire. It also points to the plans of potentially moving all low-income residents off their properties and into a concentration camp, ahem, a 15-minute city.

GIS system is a computer system for capturing, storing, checking, and displaying data related to positions on Earth’s surface. GIS can show many different kinds of data on one map, such as streets, buildings, and vegetation. This enables people to more easily see, analyze, and understand patterns and relationships. US Government has all these data layers in extreme detail for all developed areas in the country.

As of today (Aug 25, 2023) if you navigate your web browser to Google Maps, select “satellite view”, then select “globe view”. It appears that the aerial imagery was recently updated to reflect the damage from the recent “event”, that took place in Lahaina Hawaii earlier this August. Out of curiosity I also looked at GIS information on Lahaina, (link below) and wanted to see if there is correlation between damaged structures and particular zoning. I found some interesting things here.

GISLink: https://qpublic.schneidercorp.com/Application.aspx

Starting at the North end of Lahaina, I see the Fire Station, Courthouse, Civic center, Police Station where all spared from fire damage despite very clear fire damage to surrounding undeveloped land around these buildings.

What I found interesting is the surrounding undeveloped land with extensive fire damage, are parcels owned by “Department of Hawaiian Homelands”, “Housing Finance and Dev Corp”, which both appear to be the same and fall under Hawaii’s HUD authority. HUD appears own property running south from the civic center down to the Lahaina Bypass.

Everything west of HUD owned parcels are hundreds of small residential lots which where all destroyed seemingly from fires on originating from that HUD land.

Only a small home community was spared and appears intact between Leiali Pkwy and Kaniau Road. Interesting thing about this community is it appears to fall
Under HUD authority as well!

Large inland parcels south of the Lahaina Bypass are owned by large developers and trusts, and everything west of these parcels were hundreds of small residential lots which were all destroyed as well.

What’s most interesting about looking at the aerial imagery, is that amongst the destruction are various structures still standing with green grass & green trees, nearly right up to edge or property line. Looking at GIS data & street view some don’t make sense, as a few have all wood construction! In other cases, condo complexes that appear to be of concrete construction, completely destroyed.

The large commercial area in the center of Lahaina appears to be untouched, the schools on eastern end of Lahaina also appear untouched. This could also very well be due to the construction of these buildings.

A standout of precise destruction is a cluster of what appear to be recently constructed townhomes and condominiums, called “Kahoma Village”. The entire community appears intact, intact homes, green grass. Yet four of the buildings in the center completely destroyed, with cars in the adjacent parking areas looking untouched.

Overall if you’re in a residential zone, commercial mixed use, industrial, hotel zone, damage or destruction is heavy. It appears the government is assigning a “Destroyed 823” code to a lot of these parcels as well.

I can’t help but notice the destruction of buildings is almost following the property lines, even extents of building exteriors. It would be akin to clicking a parcel or structure in GIS and selecting the “terminate” option.

I was looking at this more last night and discovered some drone footage uploaded earlier this week. 18 min of drone footage taken the day after:



Footage is mainly the southern end of Lahaina:

-At 2:05 you can see the Komoha Village I referenced. 4 buildings burned to the ground, yet no evidence of surrounding damage to remaining buildings fully intact. Buildings to the right don’t even have soot on the roof or burned shingles! I’m guessing this complex was being built sometime after March 2020 based on parcel data.

-At 2:18 he flies drone south over front street apartments, according to GIS these are low-income homes completely destroyed.

-At 2:32 he’s flying east, structure on the left in foreground was formally a 4-story condo complex. On the top left of the screen on background you see new homes being constructed, this is on HUD owned land according to parcel map.

-At 4:42 he’s now flying south; you see the fully intact Lahaina Shores beach resort. Directly north to this resort was formally a bunch of small businesses in two story structures you can see on street view. Appears the only thing remaining is the elevator shaft. What’s interesting about this is according to GIS, Lahaina Shores also owned this but had their parcel subdivided into hotel & historic. The structure sat on historic, yet the hotel is fine. Still, I see no smoke damage, heat damage, nor soot on the hotel.

I was looking more at GIS map as well. Looks like there is a right of way cutout for the Lahaina bypass to continue north at some point. In addition, the road adjacent to the gov building is called Lelali Pkwy and looks designed to handle high traffic. If I continue on GIS map north into Kaanapali, parcels owned by private developers appear the have a right of way for a roadway that could connected to Lahaina bypass.

What’s unique about this is the infrastructure of this town is intact. The gov buildings are fine, all roadways are fine and usable. Bridges are intact. The water treatment plant on top of the hill adjacent to school (east end of Lahaina) is fine. School is intact. The substation and solar farm next to school are intact.  The commercial area and new low-income homes being built off Lahaina bypass are fine. Wastewater treatment plant appears to be north of Lahaina in Kaanapali is intact. Essentially, it’s a turnkey community ready to be “redeveloped”. I call it weaponized GIS, because to me it looks like parcels and buildings were clicked and destroyed in a GUI program (much like they would be in my CAD programs).

My 2 cents: government signs emergency order to rezone the agri land owned by HUD on northeast end of Lahaina, all the displaced indigenous and low-income residents are put there. The is all expediated due to urgent need for homes. All the land west of them adjacent to the water is redeveloped into condos to pay for the project. Residents are hit with some kind of “hazardous environment fee” to financially prevent them from rebuilding their property. The other partially destroyed condo complexes file massive insurance claims for damaged buildings. New structures will also have to conform to some kind of environmental sustainability regulations which will also be cost prohibitive to low-income native residents. Aside from the water, the community has two main points to enter and exit, residents have their very own new 15-minute city.

 

Connect with Sasha Latypova

Cover image credit: happyskrappy




Hawaiian Electric Soars After Statement: Power Lines “De-Energized” When Fire Started

Hawaiian Electric Soars After Statement: Power Lines “De-Energized” When Fire Started

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
August 28, 2023

 

Hawaiian Electric Industries Inc. surged as much as 43% in premarket trading in New York after the utility released a statement: their power lines were de-energized for more than six hours in Lahaina when the “Afternoon Fire” broke out on Aug. 8 that ultimately leveled the resort town in West Maui.

Just last week, Maui County slapped Hawaiian Electric with a lawsuit, accusing the utility of negligence that sparked the devastating wildfire that leveled Lahaina and killed more than 100 people, with hundreds still missing.

“We were surprised and disappointed that the County of Maui rushed to court even before completing its own investigation,” said Shelee Kimura, president and CEO of Hawaiian Electric.

Kimura said, “We believe the complaint is factually and legally irresponsible. It is inconsistent with the path that we believe we should pursue as a resilient community committed and accountable to each other as well as to Hawaiʻi’s future. We continue to stand ready to work to that end with our communities and others. Unfortunately, the county’s lawsuit may leave us no choice in the legal system but to show its responsibility for what happened that day.”

Shares of Hawaiian Electric surged as much as 43% in premarket trading.

But still well down from the start of the fire…

Hawaiian Electric outlines important facts about what happened on Aug. 8:

  • A fire at 6:30 a.m. (the “Morning Fire”) appears to have been caused by power lines that fell in high winds.
  • The Maui County Fire Department responded to this fire, reported it was “100% contained,” left the scene and later declared it had been “extinguished.”
  • At about 3 p.m., a time when all of Hawaiian Electric’s power lines in West Maui had been de-energized for more than six hours, a second fire (the “Afternoon Fire”) began in the same area.
  • The cause of the devastating Afternoon Fire has not been determined.

The utility provided more details about the fire:

  • The records conclusively establish that Hawaiian Electric power lines to Lahaina were not energized when the Afternoon Fire broke out shortly before 3 p.m. on Aug. 8, in a field near Lahaina Intermediate School. Power had been out for more than six hours by that time. There was no electricity flowing through the wires in the area or anywhere else on the West Maui coast. Hawaiian Electric has informed ATF investigators of the availability of records that demonstrate these facts.
  • The small Morning Fire, seen in videos taken by local residents, began more than eight hours earlier. Those videos show that power lines had fallen to the ground in high winds near the intersection of Lahainaluna Road and Hoʻokahua Street at approximately 6:30 a.m. A small fire that can be seen by the downed lines spread into the field across the street from the Intermediate School.
  • The Maui County Fire Department responded promptly to the Morning Fire. According to the Department’s public statement that morning, by 9 a.m. the Morning Fire was “100% contained.” The Maui County fire chief subsequently reported that the Fire Department had determined that the Morning Fire was “extinguished,” and the Fire Department left the scene by 2 p.m.
  • Once the fire was out, Hawaiian Electric emergency crews arrived at Lahainaluna Road in the afternoon of Aug. 8 to make repairs; they saw no fire or smoke or embers. All lines to Lahaina remained de-energized and all power in the area remained off.
  • Shortly before 3 p.m., while the power remained off, our crew members saw a small fire about 75 yards away from Lahainaluna Road in the field near the Intermediate School. They immediately called 911 and reported that fire.
  • By the time the Maui County Fire Department arrived back on the scene, it was not able to contain the Afternoon Fire and it spread out of control toward Lahaina.

“The county’s lawsuit distracts from the important work that needs to be done for the people of Lahaina and Maui,” said Scott Seu, president and CEO of Hawaiian Electric.

What distraction could that be?

Here are the following eight questions that we should all be asking about the fires in Hawaii right now…

#1 How did the fires start?  Governor Green is convinced that they were caused by a confluence of factors.  Do you buy his explanation?

Echoing wildfire experts, Gov. Green said Friday that he believes a confluence of weather conditions contributed to the ignition and spread of the blazes.

“It is a product, in my estimation, of certainly global warming combined with drought, combined with a super storm, where we had a hurricane offshore several hundred miles, still generating large winds,” Green told CNN.

#2 How did the fires spread so rapidly?  According to multiple news reports, people were literally jumping into the ocean to escape because the fires were moving so rapidly…

With fires raging on Maui, two men felt there was nowhere to escape the flames – except for the ocean.

The two men live in Lahaina, a historic part of Maui loved by tourists, which appears to be heavily damaged by this week’s raging fire. They described a terrifying scene as they evacuated from Prison Street, right in the heart of Lahaina.

“I saw a couple people just running, I heard screams out of hell … explosions. It felt like we were in hell, it really was. It was just indescribable,” one of the men told Nexstar’s KHON.

#3 How did a fire that was supposedly “out” end up causing the most damage of all?  According to  Governor Green, the Lahaina fire was supposedly given new energy “by far-off Hurricane Dora”

After first erupting early Tuesday, the fire was initially deemed to be out, but winds whipped up by far-off Hurricane Dora that reached up to 81 mph fanned the flames and spurred the blaze to travel about 1 mile every minute, Green said.

#4 According to U.S. Representative Jill Tokuda, the alarm system that is supposed to warn residents that a disaster is happening appears to have failed.  How is that possible?…

We know everybody who’s ever lived in Hawaii knows the warning sirens. It goes off once a month at the beginning of the month at 12 noon, and it blares and if it doesn’t, it gets fixed, because that is our first line of defense. Unfortunately, in this situation, sadly, tragically in this situation, those sirens likely did not go off. The warning signals that were on cell phones, we had no cell coverage or electricity in some of these areas. And the reality is with those warning signs, it tells all of us to turn on the television or look at our phones or turn on the radio. The reality is was how fast this burn was. And you could see it in the videos that survivors were showing me. You could see it in the wreckage. If you turned on your phone, you turned on a radio, if you even could. Remember things were out at that particular point, you would not know what the crisis was.

#5 Why are emergency supplies not getting to the people that desperately need them?  It is being reported that a “telecommunications blackout” has been one of the factors that has been hampering relief efforts…

But an enduring telecommunications blackout hampered government and grassroots efforts to distribute those supplies in the worst-affected neighborhoods, especially for an unknown number of survivors waiting out the aftermath in the few buildings still standing in the historic town of Lahaina and neighborhoods on the outskirts.

With their vehicles burned to a crisp, some sheltering at home have no way to drive to distribution centers miles away, or their cars have run out of gas. Others simply don’t know where to go for help. Toxic fumes and downed power lines with live wires make venturing outdoors dangerous.

#6 Why are people that have just had their homes burned down in the fires already being bombarded with calls with offers to purchase their properties?

The vultures are circling, and it appears that there are some people out there that are extremely interested in scooping up land inexpensively.

#7 Why has the FBI moved a “mobile refrigerated morgue” into Lahaina?…

A mobile refrigerated morgue has been brought to the devastated town of Lahaina as Maui officials continue their search for victims of the worst U.S. wildfire in 100 years.

The death toll on Sunday rose to 96, but Hawaii officials said it was likely to rise significantly.

John Pelletier, the Maui police chief, said only three percent of Lahaina – home to more than 9,000 people – had been searched so far.

#8 Why is Joe Biden lounging on the beach while all of this is happening?…

Outraged Americans blasting President @JoeBiden after he said ‘no comment’ when asked about the catastrophic Maui wildfire, now the deadliest US blaze in over a century. Despite the death toll climbing to about 100, Americans were outraged that Biden remained sunbathing on a beach near his Delaware home.

Before the fire, locals feared billionaires would transform their town into a “Satellite City” for elites. How the elites would acquire the land remained a mystery, but now not so much.

 

Connect with ZeroHedge

Cover image credit: State Farm


TCTL editor’s note: Below you will find two videos where locals examine cars that were burned at temperatures so high that some metals were liquified and glass was melted.

 




Police Blocked Roads to Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

Police Blocked Roads to Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 24, 2023

 

An eyewitness reveals that police blocked traffic to prevent residents from fleeing the immolation of Lahaina.

There was no logical reason for the police to block cars fleeing the destruction of the city other than to ensure as many people died as possible.

The witness describes the actions of the police as “a combination of stupid and evil.”

Remnants of destroyed cars on Front Street that were caught in the traffic jam caused by a police blockade. The reporter states that the passengers fled their cars. But did they? How does he know? A directed energy weapon could have caught the passengers by surprise. If they were struck with a directed energy weapon, they would have been immolated as they sat in their cars.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui
The Dog That Didn’t BarkLahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

 

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: US National Guard




Etienne de la Boetie² on All Governments Being Illegitimate Authorities

Etienne de la Boetie² on All Governments Being Illegitimate Authorities

by Jeremy Nell, Jerm Warfare
originally published December 5, 2022
updated August 24, 2023

 

Etienne de la Boetie2 (with a squared sign and, no, it isn’t his real name) has written extensively on why all governments are illegitimate authorities.

His alias is a play on the real Etienne de La Boétie, who was a French writer and philosopher who lived during the 16th century, best known for his essay titled Discourse On Voluntary Servitude in which he questioned why people willingly submit to oppressive rulers and argued that it is through voluntary obedience that tyrants are able to maintain their power.

Etienne (with a squared sign) makes the chaos for anarchism, which is a philosophy that advocates for a society without hierarchical authority or rulers.

It does not mean chaos because it emphasises voluntary cooperation, mutual aid, and decentralised decision-making.

Anarchy, meanwhile, refers to an absence of government control.

While the words “anarchism” and “anarchy” are related and often used interchangeably, they are technically different.

Anarchism is often associated with chaos due to a misunderstanding of its principles.

Anarchists believe that individuals are capable of organising themselves and making collective decisions without the need for a central authority. They argue that (government) hierarchy and coercion are the sources of many social problems and that people can freely cooperate and resolve conflicts through voluntary means.

Mikhail Bakunin, a Russian thinker during the 1800s, is generally considered one of the fathers of anarchism. He advocated for a society based on federalism, in which free associations of workers and communities would govern themselves without a centralised state.

Another thinker is Pierre-Joseph Proudhon, a French philosopher who coined the term “anarchism” and argued for a system based on mutualism and workers’ self-management.

Although not an example of anarchism, the Hanseatic League and anarchism emphasise decentralised decision-making and cooperation. The League was a confederation of merchant guilds in Northern Europe during the medieval period, in which participating cities maintained a level of autonomy while engaging in voluntary associations for trade and defence. Similarly, anarchism promotes self-governance through voluntary associations and rejects the need for centralised authority.

Hanseatic League

Anarchist societies have existed throughout history.

The Spanish Revolution (1936 – 1939) is one such example. Parts of Spain experienced a social revolution in which anarchists, alongside other groups, established self-governing communities, collectivised industries, and implemented direct democracy (which is when individuals participate directly in decision-making processes, rather than delegating authority to representatives).

Basically, the government is the subjection of the noninvasive individual to an external will.

In Etienne‘s book, Government – The Biggest Scam In History, he argues

the case that “Government”, of every flavor, has been a scam of inter-generational organized crime since the beginning… and they have been getting away with it… until now… because they have been controlling the media and academia.

Think of it more simply.

If an armed gang knocked on your door and demanded that you pay them a percentage of your income, no matter what their reasons might be, then any rational individual will agree that such behaviour is criminal.

Replace “armed gang” with “government”.



 

Connect with Jerm Warfare


See Related:

The Big Debate: Voluntaryism vs. Constitutional Republicanism – Etienne vs. Sam Bushman: Is “Government” Moral?

The Shady History of the Con-stitution

Why the Organized Crime Media Misrepresents Voluntaryism and Peaceful Anarchy as Chaos and Dystopia

 




German Courts Are Going FULL Dystopia

German Courts Are Going FULL Dystopia 

by OffGuardian
August 23, 2023

 

It’s been an astonishing couple of days for German judges. Well, “astonishing” if you’ve been living in a cave for the last four years.

Many of you likely already know that satirist and playwright (and frequent OffG contributor) CJ Hopkins is being prosecuted in Germany for “disseminating propaganda, the contents of which are intended to further the aims of a former National Socialist organization.”

All because the cover of his book has a swastika on it.

Needless to say, the charges are absurd. Insultingly so. You can read CJ’s first-hand account of this nonsense here and here.

Anyone who isn’t a) stupid or b) delusional can plainly see these charges have nothing to do with a stock-image swastika, and everything to do with the content of the book. In short, they are politically motivated charges brought against an author for criticizing the state. The very essence of dystopian tyranny.

…and yesterday he was convicted.

He now faces 60 days in prison or a 3600 Euro fine.

That’s case one, and as we say one you are likely familiar with if you’re regular readers.

Something you probably haven’t heard is that, just this morning, a different German court sentenced a former judge to two years in prison.

His crime? Ruling that mask mandates in schools were not constitutional.

The case dates back to April 8th 2021, when Weimar District Family Court judge Christiaan Dettmar ruled that two schools in the district a) could not enforce mask mandates, b) must continue in-person classes and c) could not force pupils to test for “Covid”.

From Human Rights Blog:

The court case was a child protection case under to § 1666 paragraph 1 and 4 of the German Civil Code (BGB), which a mother had initiated for her two sons, aged 14 and 8 respectively, at the local Family Court. She had argued that her children were being physically, psychologically and pedagogically damaged without any benefit for the children or third parties. At the same time, she claimed this constituted a violation of a range of rights of the children and their parents under the law, the German constitution (Grundgesetz or Basic Law) and international conventions.

After listening to testimony from expert witnesses, the judge ruled in favour of the mother, writing in his verdict:

These are the risks [to mask mandates]. The children are not only endangered in their mental, physical and psychological well-being by the obligation to wear face masks during school hours and to keep their distance from each other and from other persons, but they are also already being harmed. At the same time, this violates numerous rights of the children and their parents under the law, the constitution and international conventions.

Two weeks after handing down this ruling, his home and office were raided by the police and his mobile phone was seized.

And now, two years later, he was found guilty of “judicial misconduct” and initially given two years in prison (the court has since suspended the sentence). “Judicial Misconduct”, for simply disagreeing with the government.

Free speech is the first and most vital liberty, without it no one is truly free. An independent judiciary is a must to preserve any kind of justice, judges who simply nod along with government edicts are the building blocks of authoritarian states.

The voice of the people and the power of the courts – ideally – work together to hold the government to account.

And yet, whether in the judiciary or the arts, the German legal system is now a machine for criminalizing and punishing dissent of any kind.

…I’d make a comparison to another German government that used to function in a similar way, but I really can’t afford a 4000 euro fine.

 

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image credit: sergeitokmakov

 




In a World Ruled by Propaganda, a Sane Worldview Will Necessarily Be a Fringe Worldview

In a World Ruled by Propaganda, a Sane Worldview Will Necessarily Be a Fringe Worldview

by Caitlin Johnstone, Caitlin’s Newsletter
August 23, 2023

 

One of the worst mistakes you can make when formulating your understanding of the world is to begin with the assumption that the truest and most accurate position must lie somewhere near the center of the two major political perspectives you see laid out all around you.

It’s a mistake not only because assuming that the center position must be the best one is a type of fallacious reasoning known as the middle ground fallacy (the correct position between “Drink a gallon of bleach daily for good health” and “Drink zero bleach daily for good health” is not “Drink half a gallon of bleach daily for good health”); it’s also a mistake because the entire framing arises from a situation that has been artificially engineered by the powerful.

It’s a well-documented fact that the rich and powerful pour vast fortunes into manipulating the political and media landscape in ways that serve their interests. Their control over the news media and Silicon Valley tech platforms is used to set the agenda and influence public perception by determining what issues will receive attention and which won’t in ways that preserve the political status quo they’ve built their empire upon, thereby shrinking the Overton window of acceptable debate down to a very narrow spectrum whose outcomes can’t threaten their interests in any way.

We just discussed this dynamic with regard to US aggressions against Russia and China; the Overton window is being narrowed to a debate between which US enemy should be the target of the most imperial aggressions, with voices who advocate detente with both countries finding no platform in mainstream politics or media. This is what Noam Chomsky was talking about when he said “the smart way to keep people passive and obedient is to strictly limit the spectrum of acceptable opinion, but allow very lively debate within that spectrum.”

People assume there must be truth in the mainstream worldview because so many others are invested in the mainstream worldview, when really the only reason that worldview is mainstream in the first place is because so much wealth and influence has gone into making it mainstream. In reality the assumption that the truth exists anywhere in either of the two mainstream political viewpoints promoted by the managers of the western empire is an example of the bandwagon effect, which describes the cognitive bias in which humans tend to take on beliefs, behaviors, styles and attitudes solely because that’s what the people around them are doing.

This bias would have had evolutionary advantages early on in our development as a species. Back when our evolutionary ancestors were prey for prehistoric carnivores, it was a survival advantage to start running for your life if you saw other members of your tribe running, even if you personally didn’t see what they were running from. As primates whose survival depended on social cohesion, being rejected by the tribe would mean almost certain death by predation or starvation, so it was necessary to conform in whatever ways prevented that rejection from happening.

But we don’t live in prehistoric times anymore. We live in a civilization with a highly complex information environment that is being continually manipulated away from truth and accuracy and toward the advantage of powerful people who rule over us. If you go along with the herd, you’ll be deceived.



In truth the so-called “centrists” or “moderates” of our world are really violent extremists, because they support the most murderous and tyrannical power structure on our planet, and are only regarded as moderate because they sit in the mid-range of a completely artificially created spectrum. A perspective that is actually sane will be about as far away from their perspective as you can get.

Because the majority of people have been duped by propaganda into espousing mainstream political perspectives, those with an accurate read on things will necessarily be a small fringe minority until that dynamic changes. As long as your entire civilization is structured around deceit-based perspectives which serve the powerful, going along with the crowd will prevent you from forming a truth-based perspective that serves human interests.

So you’ll have to get comfortable rejecting mainstream orthodoxies, dismissing mainstream media, and shunning mainstream politics, because those things are all inseparably interwoven with the matrix of deceit by which our rulers have pulled the blindfold over this civilization. This won’t be a sign that you’re out of touch or a kooky crackpot or some snobby hipster who rejects all things mainstream out of a pathological need to be different, it will be a sign that you are seeing things clearly.

This can set you apart from your tribe at times; as Terence McKenna said, “The cost of sanity in this society is a certain level of alienation.” But we can still find each other online, so we’re never really alone, and the cost is definitely worth it. The sincere pursuit of a truth-based perspective is ultimately the surest path not only toward a healthy society, but toward lasting happiness as an individual as well.

 

Connect with Caitlin Johnstone

Cover image credit: KELLEPICS




Ramiro Romani With James Corbett: Take Back Our Tech

Ramiro Romani With James Corbett: Take Back Our Tech

 

“So there’s so many things coming at once. There’s essentially four freedoms that technology has allowed. But then also there are powers — we all know these organizations that are also very scared of us having these freedoms.

“So those are the freedom to travel, the freedom to exchange (which has been bolstered by things like cryptocurrency), the freedom of speech and the freedom of privacy.

“And these four things make it really easy to interact in a way that is in alignment, right, that is voluntary with what you would like.

“And now you see pretty much a law in most Western countries that are coming after these exact freedoms…

“It’s almost like the simulation itself is making it so — it’s forcing us to leave these bigger platforms and into smaller, decentralized community-based groups.

“So throughout things we’ve seen over the past few years — we’ve seen technology being used to try and track and trace every single one of our movements.

“COVID-19 was a perfect example of this. And an article I’m working on talks specifically about contact tracing, which, if people didn’t know, most phones have the ability through Google and Apple for them to install an app on their phone and actually activate it. And they did that en masse to millions of people at once…

“We see technology and we are throwing it out. We’re not going to use it…

“You’re cutting yourself off. You’re doing your own thing, which I completely support your right to live a life free of technology. That’s absolutely your right…

“Ignoring it is not going to make it go away. It’s not going to make these people stop their plans. Understanding it, working with it, changing it — which you absolutely have the possibility to change it. That is the way you can make it better for everyone.”

~ Ramiro Romani

 

Take Back Our Tech

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
August 23, 2023

 

Ramiro Romani of TakeBackOurTech.org and AbovePhone.com joins us today to discuss technology: what it is, how it works, and how we can make it work for us.

We discuss how governments and big tech corporations are collaborating to undermine our rights to privacy, free expression and even freedom of travel and how we can remove the Big Brother surveillance and controls from our devices.



Watch on Archive / BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble / Substack

Show Notes:

TakeBackOurTech.org

Building a digital army: UN peacekeepers fight deadly disinformation

AbovePhone.com

Who Can We Call On? How Our Phones Are Tracked By Big Tech, Telecom, and Government

Electromagnetic Radiation – Shield & Educate Yourself, Save a Life

 

Connect with The Corbett Report




Why Nonconformity Cures a Sick Self and a Sick Society

Why Nonconformity Cures a Sick Self and a Sick Society

by Academy of Ideas
August 22, 2023

 



The following is a transcript of this video.

“I must be myself, I cannot break myself any longer for you. . .If you can love me for what I am, we shall be the happier. If you cannot, I will still seek to deserve that you should.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Self-Reliance

The great 19th century American philosopher Ralph Waldo Emerson believed that to flourish we must be a non-conformist. If we just think as others think and do as others do, we limit our potential and place our health or sickness at the mercy of social forces beyond our control. In this video we are going to explore the dangers of conformity, what non-conformity meant for Emerson, and how the non-conformist acts as a force of good in a society gone mad.

“Whoso would be a man must be a nonconformist.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Self-Reliance

To be a conformist is to orient our life around the dominant norms, values, and ideals of our society. It is to allow the boundaries and templates of our culture to shape our sense of self. Most of us become conformists without reflecting on what we are doing – we see everyone around us conforming and so it feels natural to do the same. But conformity comes at a price, or as Emerson stated in a lecture given in 1844:

“I pay a destructive tax in my conformity.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Lecture Read Before the Society in Amory Hall, March 1844

In any society only certain character traits are favoured by the trends of conformity, while many others – which may be healthy in their own right – are looked upon with indifference or disdain. In our day, for example, extroversion is favoured over introversion, obedience over disobedience, and risk-aversion over risk-taking. Some people may find their inner nature fits the mold of conformity, but many will find the opposite. For those of us in the latter group, conformity is akin to wearing a mask made to fit the mold of another’s face. The mask of conformity never feels comfortable and at times it may cause us to feel like a fraud or imposter.

Conformity also leads to waste – wasted time, wasted opportunities, and wasted resources. In the need to satisfy others and maintain appearances, we do things we do not value, say things we do not believe, and obtain things we do not need, or as Emerson writes:

“Custom . . . gives me no power therefrom, and runs me in debt to boot. We spend our incomes . . . for a hundred trifles, I know not what, and not for the things of a man. Our expense is almost all for conformity.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Man the Reformer

But the dangers of conformity reach pathological levels when, as in our day, a society becomes infected with lies. Politicians lie almost as frequently as they open their mouths. A degenerate education system teaches lies on topics ranging from science, to history, ethics, economics, and politics. The media lies about world events. While corporations lie to us about the value, or safety, of their products. With no shortage of lies percolating throughout society, the modern path of conformity leads in errant ways. It encourages us to go into debt to buy things we don’t need, to consume unhealthy foods, to be obedient to those in power, to take pharmaceutical drugs that do more harm than good, to eschew our passion in favour of money or social status, and if we ever feel anxious or depressed, the conformist way is to distract ourselves with screens, or to numb ourselves with psychotropic drugs.

“All goes well as long as you run with conformists. But you, who are an honest man in other particulars, know that there is alive somewhere a man whose honesty reaches to this point also, that he shall not kneel to false gods, and, on the day when you meet him, you sink into the class of counterfeits. . . If you take in a lie, you must take in all that belongs to it.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Religion

To be a non-conformist, in the modern world, is to renounce the lies that shape our society and to renounce the self that has been shaped by these lies. This act of renunciation paves the way for self-transformation, or as Emerson writes: “The man who renounces himself, comes to himself.” (Ralph Waldo Emerson, Lecture to Divinity Students). When we abandon the habits of conformity and stop pursing its ideals, we clear the way for the emergence of a more authentic state of being. We take off the false mask of conformity and permit our individual personality to shine through. But our renunciation should not be limited to self-renunciation, we should also renounce affiliation with organizations and institutions that are infiltrated by the lies of our society. For a non-conformist, according to Emerson, must stand under his or her own banner, not the banner of another:

“It is only as a man puts off all foreign support, and stands alone, that I see him to be strong and to prevail. He is weaker by every recruit to his banner.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Self-Reliance

Along with the act of renunciation, the non-conformist must establish a new direction in life as merely rejecting conformist ways, without replacing them with something new, will leave us in a pit of aimless and meaningless despair. We need new pursuits to keep us occupied, new habits to keep our life structured, and new goals to give us direction. In the process of re-orienting our life, we should work with what nature has granted us, as it is by cultivating our strengths and talents and aligning our life around pursuits we enjoy, that we unleash our power and pave the way for a great life, or as Emerson writes:

“There is a time in every man’s education when he arrives at the conviction . . that though the wide universe is full of good, no kernel of nourishing corn can come to him but through his toil bestowed on that plot of ground which is given to him to till. The power which resides in him is new in nature, and none but he knows what that is which he can do, nor does he know until he has tried.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Self-Reliance

If conformity has led us astray and we don’t know where truth lies or what the plot of ground we are meant to till consists of, spending time in solitude can help correct for this confusion. Away from the chatter and distraction of other minds, solitude can help us understand who we are and what we want from life. There are voices, wrote Emerson “which we hear in solitude, [that] grow faint and inaudible as we enter into the world.” (Ralph Waldo Emerson, Self-Reliance).  Emerson, however, while valuing solitude, did not believe the non-conformist should be a recluse. To flourish as a non-conformist is to strike the optimal balance between solitude and society. We must learn to live in harmony with others without an excessive need to gain their approval or to mimic their errant ways. Or as Emerson put it:

“Solitude is impracticable, and society fatal. We must keep our head in the one and our hands in the other. The conditions are met, if we keep our independence, yet do not lose our sympathy.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Society and Solitude

Many people recognize the sickness of modern society, but few choose a path of non-conformity as the means of escape. One reason for this is fear, and specifically a fear of ridicule and rejection. The non-conformist must overcome this fear, or at least learn that constructive, non-conformist action can be taken even when consumed by fear:

“What I must do is all that concerns me, not what the people think. This rule. . .may serve for the whole distinction between greatness and meanness. . .It is easy in the world to live after the world’s opinion; it is easy in solitude to live after our own; but the great man is he who in the midst of the crowd keeps with perfect sweetness the independence of solitude.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Self-Reliance

In learning to deal with ridicule and rejection it can be helpful to recognize a constructive value to this experience. Not only does it provide us with an opportunity to cultivate the courage of acting in the face of our fears, but furthermore, those who treat us with contempt sometimes reveal truths of our character that those who care for us are too timid to point out. But even if the ridicule is not constructive, even if it is based on envy or lies, we can use the disapproval of others as motivating fuel that impels us to greater heights, and as Emerson writes:

“Dear to us are those who love us; the swift moments we spend with them are a compensation for a great deal of misery; they enlarge our life; but dearer are those who reject us as unworthy, for they add another life: they build a heaven before us whereof we had not dreamed, and thereby supply to us new powers out of the recesses of the spirit, and urge us to new and unattempted performances.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, New England Reformers

If we learn to conquer the fear of ridicule and rejection, we will possess a crucial skill in the art of non-conformity. But there is another barrier that prevents many from going the way of a non-conformist and this is laziness. To cultivate our own path through life requires hard work, discipline, and a ruthless persistence of action. For Emerson’s non-conformist is not passive, he is an active agent striving to change the world. Once the non-conformist selects a valuable goal, he sticks to it and is not driven off course merely because a bunch conformists disapprove of his ways, or as Emerson writes:

“All men have wandering impulses, fits and starts of generosity. But when you have chosen your part, abide by it, and do not weakly try to reconcile yourself with the world.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Heroism

Or as he writes elsewhere:

“If you would serve your brother, because it is fit for you to serve him, do not take back your words when you find that prudent people do not commend you. Adhere to your own act, and congratulate yourself if you have done something strange and extravagant and broken the monotony of a decorous age. It was a high counsel that I once heard given to a young person – “Always do what you are afraid to do.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Heroism

Following a non-conformist path will make us healthier, happier, and more powerful, but it will also turn us into a force of good in the world. For the inner state of our being manifests the events of the outer world, or as Emerson put it: “A man will see his character emitted in the events that seem to meet [him], but which exude from and accompany him.” (Ralph Waldo Emerson, The Conduct of Life) Conformists, in living by lies, are manifesting a sick society. The non-conformist, in aligning himself with the truth of his inner nature and the truth of the world, will manifest events that act as the antidote to a world gone mad.

“In the thought of tomorrow there is a power to upheave . . .all the creeds. . .of the nations, and marshal thee to a heaven which no epic dream has yet depicted. Every man is not so much a workman in the world, as he is a suggestion of that he should be. Men walk as prophecies of the next age.”

~ Ralph Waldo Emerson, Circles

 

Connect with Academy of Ideas

 




The Grip of Fear and Need for Acceptance: The Impetus for the Psychological Takeover of the Minds of Men

The Grip of Fear and Need for Acceptance: The Impetus for the Psychological Takeover of the Minds of Men

by Gary D. Barnett
August 21, 2023

 

“Freud (1921), without referring to the general systems implications of his assertion, spelled out this mechanism clearly: “. . . the individual gives up his ego ideal and substitutes for it the group ideal embodied in the leader” (page 78, Group Psychology).”

~ Stanley Milgram, Obedience to Authority

The grip of fear and propaganda have captured the minds of the collective masses to such an extent, as to stop all critical thinking processes in favor of abandoning responsibility. To accept the collective mindset over right in order to fit in, or avoid conflict, is considered by most the easier path, but it necessitates immoral decisions and irresponsible behavior.

Need of the group is a recipe for ignorance, and it leads in essence, to an allowed psychological takeover of the human brain and all its capabilities to grasp truth, logic and reality, in the face of any stress or uncertainty.

In order for extreme tyranny to become the norm, for State control to be sustained, and if rule by the few is to be possible, it is required that a high level of blind consent by a major portion of the people be evident. Obviously, consent and obedience to power needs to be voluntary among the masses, because constant fear and the need for acceptance by the ‘societal’ herd, is key in any psychological plan of takeover by the ruling class.

Most propagandists use the false idea of the ‘greater good’ to fool the many into accepting this nonsense, so that shame and guilt can then help drive the effort to gain obedience and submission by the weaker group. This tactic is also effective in marginalizing the individual, which has the result of stifling any real or honest dissent.

As an example, the uptick in what are labeled fantastic weather events, and they are not in most cases, is becoming astronomical in order to stoke terror and capture the minds of the weak through psychological means. What is left completely out of the conversation, is the very likely possibility, that most of what is going on in this vein is intentional.

Once again, everything is being tied to the lie that is ‘manmade climate change.’ This narrative is taking over the airwaves, manipulating minds, and is obviously a set up for continued and vastly increasing restriction on movement, control of populations, destruction of private property, the total control of currency, and land and property grabs by government and State supporting speculators, as even more extreme wealth transfers are planned.

The ‘hurricane’ set to hit Southern California early Monday, made landfall as a minor tropical storm, with much less rain and damage than anticipated, (wanted) but was still called a “major climate disaster.” It was also said to be the first tropical storm to hit Southern California in 84 years, an outright lie. Actually, to the detriment of the forecasters and ‘climate change’ advocators, it was nearly immediately downgraded to a post-tropical storm, and all warnings were discontinued.

Future natural weather events as well, will be first blamed on fake ‘climate change,’ and then used to create the perception of massive damage, whether actual or not, caused either by purposeful or completely artificial means, but certainly intentional. State negligence, meant to enhance the damage in order to spread more fear and death, will most always be a factor. This happened of course, in Lahaina, Maui just recently, but the dependent among us are left unaware, and aimlessly grasp for any narrative that will lessen any responsibility to think independently.

When man lives, gains knowledge, and strives to improve himself, all others around him benefit by this behavior. They do not falsely  benefit due to force or theft of property as a result of heinous taxation or fabricated emergencies, which are criminal, but they benefit simply because as each individual improves himself, and is responsible for himself, he is able to achieve more, and by this act alone, society, not in the sense of collective madness, is bettered. As one improves himself, he gains more ability to understand and live a life based on reason, logic, and moral strength and fortitude, and this can greatly improve everything around him.

One should be able to understand that if a majority of individuals acted in this manner, freedom and free markets would flourish, and the State would dramatically shrink. That is the power of the individual, and so long as man lives to his highest purpose, takes responsibility for his own thoughts and actions, and relies on reason, moral existence as a purpose, and common sense as a guide, humanity will not only survive, but prosper.

To live in the shadow of others, to bow to any make-believe human authority, to do the bidding of the powerful at the expense of the weak; in other words, to accept the absurd notion that to sacrifice anything or everything for the so-called ‘greater good,’ especially given that this fictitious good is dishonestly presented under the name of hollow nationalism, is in fact the absolute antithesis of all that is right and moral.

Consider that if common men lived to improve self, to seek self-happiness, and practiced a moral existence, wars could not be fought, for war is based on the insane ‘belief’ of sacrifice to the State, and sold to the mindless as sacrifice to all others. If men en masse strive in their own self-interest, they would not feel compelled to sacrifice for the false gods of government, and therefore would not murder on orders.

War is based only on evil intent and the sacrifice of human fodder, it is not, and cannot ever be, based on moral behavior or the improvement of man.

Sacrifice, not strength, intellectual awakening, or morality, is all that the State seeks, and in order to gain the obedience of the masses, the individual, and individual accomplishment, must be destroyed. The psychological takeover of the minds of men, must precede any and all efforts of long-term totalitarian rule, for any aspect of critical thought, self-improvement, and dissent, are the considered enemies of State rule.

All who think for themselves, and live in their own best interest, will not serve the State, and will not allow for their own enslavement. Independent, self-interested men and women, do not live in fear, and do not cower in the face of adversity. They do not have an unwarranted need to be accepted by the ignorant collective crowd, for they have gained the confidence to live their lives to the fullest without sacrificing themselves to any false god called the State.

Rulers and governments work only on the basis of fear, threat, extreme force, shame, and guilt, in order to fool the people into thinking that their individual lives mean nothing, and sacrifice to the ‘greater good’ means everything.

The ‘greater good’ in this case is always the few at the top of the power pyramid of control; the elusive and dominating nation-state. This is the only reason that the irrational idiocy called nationalism, Statism, and patriotism exists.

All government is evil, and that is why all are taught and brainwashed throughout their lives to feel inferior (worthless) as individuals, but to feel whole only as an invisible cog in the wheel of a ‘national’ society. Atrocities abound due strictly to this asinine mindset, and that has been the plan all along.

Those who consciously reject reason, logic, and common sense, those who hide from reality and truth, and those who only seek to follow the crowd, are worthless to the betterment of man. They cannot be of value to your freedom, because they are of no value to themselves, so abandon them as quickly as is possible.

“People don’t want to think. And the deeper they get into trouble, the less they want to think. But by some sort of instinct, they feel that they ought to and it makes them feel guilty. So they’ll bless and follow anyone who gives them a justification for not thinking. Anyone who makes a virtue – a highly intellectual virtue – out of what they know to be their sin, their weakness and their guilt… They envy achievement, and their dream of greatness is a world where all men have become their acknowledged inferiors. They don’t know that that dream is the infallible proof of mediocrity, because that sort of world is what the man of achievement would not be able to bear”

~ Ayn Rand, Atlas Shrugged

 

Copyright © 2023 GaryDBarnett.com

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: Pexels




The Dog That Didn’t Bark: On Why Lahaina’s Disaster Warning Alarms Did Not Sound

The Dog That Didn’t Bark: On Why Lahaina’s Disaster Warning Alarms Did Not Sound

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 21, 2023

 

In my August 11, 2023, article, I explained the evidence that a directed energy weapon was used to destroy Lahaina, a city on the Island of Maui in Hawaii. The only culprit who could possibly have used such a weapon is the U.S. Military. The cover story for the destruction of Lahaina was that out-of-control wildfires caused it.

On August 20, 23, I revealed in an article that within 40 miles of Lahaina on the Island of Maui is located the Air Force Maui Optical and Supercomputing (AMOS) site, which is part of the AFLR Directed Energy Directorate. The AFLR states “the Directorate develops and transitions technologies in four core technical competencies: laser systems, high power electromagnetics, weapons modeling and simulation, and directed energy and electro-optics for space superiority.”

The disaster warning alarms did not sound to warn that alleged fires were about to engulf the Maui city of Lahaina. The silent sirens on Maui now speak loudly about who was behind the destruction of Lahaina. In one of Arthur Conan Doyle’s Sherlock Holmes stories, “Silver Blaze,” the famous fictional detective deduced the murderer’s identity because a guard dog failed to bark at the time of the murder. Sherlock Holmes deduced that the murderer must have been the dog’s master. It is the same with the sirens not sounding in Lahaina. The sirens did not sound because the perpetrators had complete control of the sirens.

Hawaii Governor Josh Green first claimed that the sirens did not sound because they were immobilized due to the intense heat. If there was an approaching fire as claimed, the very loud 121-decibel sirens would have sounded at the first sign of fire before it would ever reach the sirens which were located along Lahaina’s coast. And so the story by the governor was not believed by anyone. The sirens are tested each month and had just been tested on August 1, 2023, one week before the disaster.

The emergency sirens may have been destroyed, but not in the way the governor claimed. The destruction would not be from fires, as alleged by the governor, but from directed energy weapons. The sirens were along the coast, far from the alleged path of the fire coming from the inland area. Thus, the fire could not have destroyed them. But a sudden burst from a directed energy weapon certainly could have done the trick.

It was eventually claimed that the alarms did not sound because nobody from either the state or county government activated the alarms. Could it be that it was because they knew that the directed energy weapons had disabled the sirens? Now they had a problem on their hands. They now claim that the sirens were purposely not sounded. And so they had to devise a good reason for not doing so. They had to conceal the use of directed energy. They trotted out The Administrator of the Maui Emergency Management Agency, Herman Andaya, who claimed that the sirens were purposely not sounded because they are primarily used for tsunamis. His concern was that people would hear the sirens and run toward the mountains to flee an imagined tsunami. In doing that, he claimed that the people would have run toward the alleged source of the fires.

When asked, Anday stated that he does not regret not sounding the alarms. He said:

The public is trained to seek higher ground in the event that the siren is sounded. Had we sounded the siren that night, we’re afraid that people would have gone mauka [meaning inland, or toward the mountainside]. And if that was the case, then they would have gone into the fire.

That statement is false. CNN reported:

Before Andaya’s resignation was announced, state Sen. Angus McKelvey – who represents Lahaina and lost his own home in the fires – blasted Andaya’s response as “insulting.”

“I’ve heard the line that ‘people would have panicked and ran up to the mountains because it’s a tsunami siren.’ … It’s insulting to think that people would be that clueless, that they wouldn’t know that sirens blasting was because of the fire,” McKelvey told CNN on Thursday.

“These are not tsunami sirens. They’re disaster sirens.”

There’s more! The Deputy Chief, Telecommunications Branch, State of Hawaii Emergency Management Agency, Ryan Hirae, during an interview on or about September 2020, stated the following:

In the state of Hawaii we have a statewide alert and warning system, which we also call SAWS. That involves not only the siren warning system, but as well as IPAWS. IPAWS is the integrated public alerts and warning system provided by FEMA. And that has the Emergency Alert System, also known as EAS. It also has Wireless Emergency Alerts, which are known as WEA. We also use sirens for hurricanes, brush fires, flooding, lava, hazmat conditions, or even a terrorist event. We have over 400 Sirens spread out through four counties. Our Sirens have a rating of 121 decibels. We have to visit each siren minimally once a year for preventive maintenance. Our role in the state of Hawaii in Emergency Management, especially telecommunications, is to prevent loss of life and to minimize property damage.

The State of Hawaii Emergency Management Agency website indicates that the sirens are part of a warning system for:

Hurricane
Flooding
Wildland Fire
Tsunami
Earthquake
Volcanic

So we now know that the sirens are, in fact, used to warn of fires. Andaya lied about why the sirens were not used. Indeed, every reason given by government officials for the sirens not sounding has been proven false. Why would government officials lie about such a thing? Because the real reason the alarms were not sounded was that government officials were behind the disaster. They owned the dog that didn’t bark.

The destruction of the city was planned to kill people in a single fell swoop using directed energy weapons. The sirens were not even considered by the perpetrators in planning their attack because there was no slow lumbering fire dancing from house to house for the sirens to warn people about. They activated the directed energy weapon, and the immolation of the city and the sirens immediately ensued. Most of the people were hit by surprise and killed instantly in their houses by the directed energy weapon. Notably, while 114 people have been confirmed dead, 1,000 people are still unaccounted for as of August 19, 2023, eleven days after the disaster. The dog didn’t bark because the master was the murderer.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

 

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image credit: web3525




The Danger in the Air – Rainwater Analysis Research by Dr. Geanina Hagimă From Romania Shows Magnetic Nanoparticles and Filaments. Comparison to Clifford Carnicom’s Rainwater Analysis

The Danger in the Air – Rainwater Analysis Research by Dr. Geanina Hagimă From Romania Shows Magnetic Nanoparticles and Filaments. Comparison to Clifford Carnicom’s Rainwater Analysis

by Ana Maria Mihalcea, MD, PhD
August 21, 2023

 

A few weeks ago, my Romanian colleague Dr. Geanina Hagimă emailed me regarding her findings of magnetic nanoparticles in rainwater. She published her findings in the Romanian news EXCLUSIV ActiveNews: CE SE AFLĂ ÎN APA DE PLOAIE? PERICOLUL DIN AER. Dr. Geanina Hagimă

In this video she showed how she captured rainwater and showed that the particulate matter is magnetic: Magnetic particles in rainwater. This needs to be considered as we know that many people after C19 bioweapon injection have become magnetic. This may also be accelerated by inhaling magnetic smart dust.

The laboratory analysis of the rainwater sediment showed Barium, Strontium, Aluminum, Iron, Copper, Zinc, Calcium, Nickel and Arsenic.

Dr. Hagima knew that Graphene Oxide was magnetic and she wanted to see if this was in the rainwater. She then had electron microscopy and Energy-dispersive X ray spectroscopy (EDS) done. This showed fibers which contained Carbon, Silicon, Aluminum and Iron.

Here is the entire PDF:

 

Pericolul Din Aer
7.76MB ∙ PDF file

 

She deducted that these are Carbon Silicon Nanotubes as described in these articles:

Silicon Carbon Nanotubes
53.4KB ∙ PDF file

 

This is for the assembly of Smart dust: Self-assembling, self-orienting photonic crystals of porous Si

This research shows the self assembly to millimeter size technologies:

Dr. Hagima explains that these Silicon Carbon fibers contribute to sickening the population causing respiratory problems and cancers.

Subsequently she included documentation declassified from the United States and their depopulation agenda from 1977:

 

CIA Population Control
472KB ∙ PDF file

 

I sent Dr. Hagima’s research to Clifford Carnicom, since he also has done work on rainwater analysis. He found her results entirely consistent with his research since 1998.

Clifford shared these thoughts with me:

Metals are not supposed to be in rainwater in any significant amounts. But our rain is now polluted so that they are there. None of these metals should theoretically be there, but theory is another matter nowadays. There are some expectations of differences between rural and urban locations, this is an important factor. Cambridge University published books on atmospheric chemistry of rainwater, rural areas should be pretty much clean as a whistle. Urban areas will have some expected pollution, but never anything justified with these metals, such as aluminum, iron, calcium, silicon(metalloid), magnesium, etc. However, none of these findings are any surprise to me. I have found them in my own work years ago.

Here are some of Clifford’s findings:

The Demise of Rainwater, 2016 This analyzed metals content.

Secondary Rainwater Analysis, 2015 This analysis looked at organic and inorganic components

He also discussed possible toxic compounds:

Tertiary Rainwater Analysis, 2015

He found much higher Aluminum levels than recommended by EPA:

Preliminary Rainwater Analysis : Aluminum Concentration, 2015

He also did the environmental filament metal analysis which showed that the filaments contain all the metals that were identified previously.

Metals Testing Report on the “environmental filaments” sample:

Here are the metals found:

Summary:

Geoengineering is a crime against humanity and our biosphere. The spraying of millions of tons of nano particulate matter that is key to weather warfare – and other nefarious objectives like dimming the sun – needs to stop. Under the cover of sham climate change agenda these people cause the destruction of our biosphere. High Aluminum contents have been shown to ignite trees to massive wildfires. A global effort must come underway to ban all geoengineering operations.

 

Connect with Ana Maria Mihalcea, MD, PhD

Cover image credit: AnagoCreativa1




We’re All Suspects in a DNA Lineup, Waiting to be Matched With a Crime

We’re All Suspects in a DNA Lineup, Waiting to be Matched With a Crime

by John & Nisha Whitehead, The Rutherford Institute
August 21, 2023

 

“Make no mistake about it…your DNA can be taken and entered into a national DNA database if you are ever arrested, rightly or wrongly, and for whatever reason… I doubt that the proud men who wrote the charter of our liberties would have been so eager to open their mouths for royal inspection.”

—Justice Antonin Scalia dissenting in Maryland v. King

Be warned: the DNA detectives are on the prowl.

Whatever skeletons may be lurking on your family tree or in your closet, whatever crimes you may have committed, whatever associations you may have with those on the government’s most wanted lists: the police state is determined to ferret them out.

In an age of overcriminalization, round-the-clock surveillance, and a police state eager to flex its muscles in a show of power, we are all guilty of some transgression or other.

No longer can we consider ourselves innocent until proven guilty.

Now we are all suspects in a DNA lineup waiting to be matched up with a crime.

Suspect State, meet the Genetic Panopticon.

DNA technology in the hands of government officials will complete our transition to a Surveillance State in which prison walls are disguised within the seemingly benevolent trappings of technological and scientific progress, national security and the need to guard against terrorists, pandemics, civil unrest, etc.

By accessing your DNA, the government will soon know everything else about you that they don’t already know: your family chart, your ancestry, what you look like, your health history, your inclination to follow orders or chart your own course, etc.

It’s getting harder to hide, even if you think you’ve got nothing to hide.

Armed with unprecedented access to DNA databases amassed by the FBI and ancestry website, as well as hospital newborn screening programs, police are using forensic genealogy, which allows police to match up an unknown suspect’s crime scene DNA with that of any family members in a genealogy database, to solve cold cases that have remained unsolved for decades.

As reported by The Intercept, forensic genetic genealogists are “combing through the genetic information of hundreds of thousands of innocent people in search of a perpetrator.”

By submitting your DNA to a genealogical database such as Ancestry and 23andMe, you’re giving the police access to the genetic makeup, relationships and health profiles of every relative—past, present and future—in your family, whether or not you or they ever agreed to be part of such a database.

Indeed, relying on a loophole in a commercial database called GEDmatch, genetic genealogists are able to sidestep privacy rules that allow people to opt out of sharing their genetic information with police. The end result? Police are now able to identify and target those very individuals who explicitly asked to keep their DNA results private.

In this way, merely choosing to exercise your right to privacy makes you a suspect and puts you in the police state’s crosshairs.

It no longer even matters if you’re among the tens of millions of people who have added their DNA to ancestry databases. As Brian Resnick reports, public DNA databases have grown so massive that they can be used to find you even if you’ve never shared your own DNA.

That simple transaction—a spit sample or a cheek swab in exchange for getting to learn everything about one’s ancestral makeup, where one came from, and who is part of one’s extended family—is the price of entry into the Suspect State for all of us.

After all, a DNA print reveals everything about “who we are, where we come from, and who we will be.” It can also be used to predict the physical appearance of potential suspects.

It’s what police like to refer to a “modern fingerprint.”

Whereas fingerprint technology created a watershed moment for police in their ability to “crack” a case, DNA technology is now being hailed by law enforcement agencies as the magic bullet in crime solving, especially when it helps them crack cold cases of serial murders and rapists.

After all, who wouldn’t want to get psychopaths and serial rapists off the streets and safely behind bars, right?

At least, that’s the argument being used by law enforcement to support their unrestricted access to these genealogy databases, and they’ve got the success stories to prove it.

For instance, a 68-year-old Pennsylvania man was arrested and charged with the brutal rape and murder of a young woman almost 50 years earlier. Relying on genealogical research suggesting that the killer had ancestors who hailed from a small town in Italy, investigators narrowed their findings down to one man whose DNA, obtained from a discarded coffee cup, matched the killer’s.

In another cold case investigation, a 76-year-old man was arrested for two decades-old murders after his DNA was collected from a breathalyzer during an unrelated traffic stop.

Yet it’s not just psychopaths and serial rapists who are getting caught up in the investigative dragnet. In the police state’s pursuit of criminals, anyone who comes up as a possible DNA match—including distant family members—suddenly becomes part of a circle of suspects that must be tracked, investigated and ruled out.

In this way, “guilt by association” has taken on new connotations in a technological age in which one is just a DNA sample away from being considered a person of interest in a police investigation. As Jessica Cussins warns in Psychology Today, “The fundamental fight—that data from potentially innocent people should not be used to connect them to unrelated crimes—has been lost.”

Until recently, the government was required to at least observe some basic restrictions on when, where and how it could access someone’s DNA. That was turned on its head by various U.S. Supreme Court rulings that heralded the loss of privacy on a cellular level.

For instance, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled in Maryland v. King that taking DNA samples from a suspect doesn’t violate the Fourth Amendment. The Court’s subsequent decision to let stand the Maryland Court of Appeals’ ruling in Raynor v. Maryland, which essentially determined that individuals do not have a right to privacy when it comes to their DNA, made Americans even more vulnerable to the government accessing, analyzing and storing their DNA without their knowledge or permission.

It’s all been downhill since then.

Indeed, the government has been relentless in its efforts to get hold of our DNA, either through mandatory programs carried out in connection with law enforcement and corporate America, by warrantlessly accessing our familial DNA shared with genealogical services such as Ancestry and 23andMe, or through the collection of our “shed” or “touch” DNA.

Get ready, folks, because the government has embarked on a diabolical campaign to create a nation of suspects predicated on a massive national DNA database.

This has been helped along by Congress (which adopted legislation allowing police to collect and test DNA immediately following arrests), President Trump (who signed the Rapid DNA Act into law), the courts (which have ruled that police can routinely take DNA samples from people who are arrested but not yet convicted of a crime), and local police agencies (which are chomping at the bit to acquire this new crime-fighting gadget).

For example, Rapid DNA machines—portable, about the size of a desktop printer, highly unregulated, far from fool-proof, and so fast that they can produce DNA profiles in less than two hours—allow police to go on fishing expeditions for any hint of possible misconduct using DNA samples.

Journalist Heather Murphy explains: “As police agencies build out their local DNA databases, they are collecting DNA not only from people who have been charged with major crimes but also, increasingly, from people who are merely deemed suspicious, permanently linking their genetic identities to criminal databases.”

All 50 states now maintain their own DNA government databases, although the protocols for collection differ from state to state. Increasingly, many of the data from local databanks are being uploaded to CODIS, the FBI’s massive DNA database, which has become a de facto way to identify and track the American people from birth to death.

Even hospitals have gotten in on the game by taking and storing newborn babies’ DNA, often without their parents’ knowledge or consent. It’s part of the government’s mandatory genetic screening of newborns. In many states, the DNA is stored indefinitely. There’s already a move underway to carry out whole genome sequencing on newborns, ostensibly to help diagnose rare diseases earlier and improve health later in life, which constitutes an ethical minefield all by itself.

What this means for those being born today is inclusion in a government database that contains intimate information about who they are, their ancestry, and what awaits them in the future, including their inclinations to be followers, leaders or troublemakers.

For example, police in New Jersey accessed the DNA from a nine-year-old blood sample of a newborn baby in order to identify the child’s father as a suspect in a decades-old sexual assault.

The ramifications of this kind of DNA profiling are far-reaching.

At a minimum, these DNA databases do away with any semblance of privacy or anonymity.

These genetic databases and genomic technology also make us that much more vulnerable to creeps and cyberstalkersgenetic profiling, and those who would weaponize the technology against us.

Unfortunately, the debate over genetic privacy—and when one’s DNA becomes a public commodity outside the protection of the Fourth Amendment’s prohibition on warrantless searches and seizures—continues to lag far behind the government and Corporate America’s encroachments on our rights.

Moreover, while much of the public debate, legislative efforts and legal challenges in recent years have focused on the protocols surrounding when police can legally collect a suspect’s DNA (with or without a search warrant and whether upon arrest or conviction), the question of how to handle “shed” or “touch” DNA has largely slipped through without much debate or opposition.

As scientist Leslie A. Pray notes:

We all shed DNA, leaving traces of our identity practically everywhere we go… In fact, the garbage you leave for curbside pickup is a potential gold mine of this sort of material. All of this shed or so-called abandoned DNA is free for the taking by local police investigators hoping to crack unsolvable cases… shed DNA is also free for inclusion in a secret universal DNA databank.

What this means is that if you have the misfortune to leave your DNA traces anywhere a crime has been committed, you’ve already got a file somewhere in some state or federal database—albeit it may be a file without a name.

As the dissenting opinion to the Maryland Court of Appeals’ shed DNA ruling in Raynor rightly warned, “A person can no longer vote, participate in a jury, or obtain a driver’s license, without opening up his genetic material for state collection and codification.”

It’s just a matter of time before government agents will know everywhere we’ve been and how long we were at each place by following our shed DNA. After all, scientists can already track salmon across hundreds of square miles of streams and rivers using DNA.

Today, helped along by robotics and automation, DNA processing, analysis and reporting takes far less time and can bring forth all manner of information, right down to a person’s eye color and relatives. Incredibly, one company specializes in creating “mug shots” for police based on DNA samples from unknown “suspects” which are then compared to individuals with similar genetic profiles.

Of course, none of these technologies are infallible.

DNA evidence can be wrong, either through human error, tampering, or even outright fabrication, and it happens more often than we are told.

What this amounts to is a scenario in which we have little to no defense against charges of wrongdoing, especially when “convicted” by technology, and even less protection against the government sweeping up our DNA in much the same way it sweeps up our phone calls, emails and text messages.

As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, it’s only a matter of time before the police state’s pursuit of criminals from the past expands into genetic profiling and a preemptive hunt for criminals of the future.

 

Connect with The Rutherford Institute

Cover image credit: OpenClipart-Vectors




Who are ISIS? — ISIS Are Back and They Are Faker Than Ever

Who are ISIS? — ISIS Are Back and They Are Faker Than Ever

 

“It is entirely reasonable to conclude that ISIS was created as ‘the bastard army’ of the Anglo-American ‘military industrial intelligence complex’ and its vassal, allied states, notably Turkey, Saudi Arabia and Qatar. Our elected leaders have not led a battle against them because ISIS, knowingly or not, works for same corporate power elite who control the politicians.

“All the evidence points to the West’s consistent use of ISIS as a destabilising force in an energy rich part of the world whose impact on the global economy shaped the 20th century and remains a key strategic region at the start of the 21st . ISIS’ murderous barbarity suits the known geopolitical agenda of the Western powers. Cui bono?”

Who are ISIS?

by Iain Davis
sourced from OffGuardian
August 19, 2023

 

Kit Knightly, from the OffGuardian, recently published ISIS are back and they are faker than ever.

ISIS are back…and they’re faker than ever.

He explored the apparent return of the ISIS bogeymen and the media narrative that preempted their re-emergent threat. He observes that ISIS, having taken a break during the alleged COVID-19 pandemic, is seemingly the “creation of marketers and PR firms rather than any geopolitical reality.”

This article—Who Are ISIS— was written in June 2018 and offers some of the historical background which strongly suggests Kit Knightly is absolutely right.

Who Are ISIS?

Despite ISIS’ apparent defeat in Syria and Iraq it seems likely that the ISIS hydra will raise another head elsewhere in the world. Indeed they seem to be able to cling on in U.S held territory, though not Syrian/Russian held territory.

The new ISIS is something the US administration are already warning the world to prepare for. With evidence of war crimes committed by the US led coalition in the Syrian City of Raqqa, Nathan Sales, the State Department’s Counter Terrorism Coordinator said on March 2nd 2018:

As we defeat ISIS on the battlefield, the group is adapting to our success. The fight is by no means over – it’s simply moving into a new phase: from military solutions to law enforcement solutions. Increasingly, we’re going to need to supplement our military efforts to defeat ISIS with civilian measures that can ensure the group’s enduring defeat……..We’re not just worried about ISIS core, which as we all know has been degraded quite severely in its territorial holdings in Syria and Iraq, but as that territorial core has eroded, we’ve seen an increase in activity by ISIS elements elsewhere in the world.

It is heartening to know that it was actually the US who defeated ISIS on the battlefield. Perhaps some may be surprised by the US government’s apparent reticence to make greater political capital out of their victory. The warnings from Washington were far from triumphant.

You have to wonder if even they believed in their ‘stunning victory.’ You also have to question what they meant by ‘civilian measures.’ Are we to be drafted? Do they want our young, or are they simply talking about censorship and a crack down on freedom of speech?

According to the US State Department, ISIS will re-emerge in Iraq and Syria, in a different form, and is looking to spread its operations to other countries. The US have decided that three new versions already exist in the form of ISIS-West Africa, ISIS-Philippines, and ISIS-Bangladesh.

If the State Department are right ISIS’ organisational, logistical and central planning capabilities are impressive. Following significant military defeats in the middle east, they can immediately reappear in different locations, thousands of miles apart, simultaneously. Amazing don’t you think? How did they do that?

It’s almost as if there’s an underlying support structure which is able to finance and tactically support ISIS (or whatever they may be called in the future) on an international scale. Given the West’s long standing support for Islamist extremist organisations perhaps we don’t need to look far to identify who is providing that support. Certainly if we look at the rise of ISIS in Iraq and Syria a distinct prime suspect emerges.

During the U.S led coalition’s occupation of Iraq tens of thousands of Islamist extremists were thrown into mass detention centres, along with tens of thousands of other, less extreme, Iraqi’s who had been swept up during coalition raids and protest policing operations. Among the detainees was the future Caliph of the Islamic State Abu Bakr al Baghdadi. It was in Camp Bucca, under US and UK guard, where the Islamic State (and ISIS) initially took shape.

Details about Abu Bakr al Baghdadi’s time in Camp Bucca are sketchy. Some reports stated he was interned for a relatively brief period in 2004 – 2005 while others said he was imprisoned for five years between 2004 -2009. What is undeniable is that Camp Bucca was effectively a radicalisation centre for the Islamists. According to Iraqi strategic analyst Hisham al-Hashim, 17 of ISIS’ top 25 commanders came through the Camp Bucca system.

The US led coalition’s explanation for this “oversight” was that their intelligence, regarding “who was who,” was often lacking and compounded by a lack of interpreters. This meant that relatively innocuous prisoners, snared in by US and Iraqi National Guard ‘policing’ operations, found themselves thrown in with the more hardcore Islamists and radical preachers. Angered by what many saw as their unjust incarceration by the US and its allies, the incarcerated moderates were open to the radical proselytising of the extremists.

When full, Camp Bucca could hold more than 24,000 inmates, split into groups of 1000 in large wire fenced compounds. Following widespread allegations of the abuse of prisoners, some leeway was granted allowing prisoners to attend prayer meetings with other prisoner groups. For the most extreme, this served as the ideal recruitment ground. Former enemies, such as al Qaeda members and Ba’athist Party, were able to meet and plot, in relative safety, against their common foe.

In 2007 U.S military strategy in Iraq was built around the so called ‘surge.’ From a starting point of 132,000 US troops in January 2007, peaking at 168,000 in September, the ‘surge’ saw an increase in US troop deployment and a shift towards mass imprisonment in the hope or reducing combatant numbers. The crack down that accompanied ‘the Surge’ meant it was difficult for the Islamist extremists to congregate in the cities and towns, but they faced no such problems inside the Camp Bucca, Cropper and Taji detentions centres.

In a 2014 briefing paper, the Intelligence Analysis company the Soufan Group stated:

The reshaping of what is now the Islamic State (IS) began among the detainee populations in military prisons such as Camp Bucca in Iraq, where violent extremists and former regime personalities forged mutual interests over years of confinement. IS is now a chimera of Ba’athist and takfiri ideologies, with the organizational skills of the former helping channel the motivational fervor of the latter. The former regime officers who are now senior leaders in IS appear fully committed to the ideals and goals of the group, a result of a thorough radicalization that has extended from imprisonment [. . . ].

Of course, this was all deemed to be a terrible mistake. The result of a combination of short sighted policy decisions and human error by coalition officials struggling to deal with difficult conditions within the camps.

By the time of their closure in 2009, at least 100,000 Islamists had been through the US controlled camp system. As soon as they were released they re-established the networks they had built in the camps, rejoined the jihad, and set about building their caliphate. To start constructing their army they required, experienced fighters, money and armaments. Luckily for them help was on its way.

There is no doubt at all that collaboration with Islamist groups, linked to al Qaeda, was a key strategy in Iraq and Syria. Speaking in 2015 Lieutenant. General Michael T. Flynn, formerly assigned as the Pentagon’s Director of the Defence Intelligence Agency (DIA,) stated the plan to arm the Islamists was a “wilful decision”. He claimed the DIA warned the Obama administration that the policy of working with al Qaeda affiliated groups risked the creation of an ISIS like entity across the entire region. Flynn’s career was ignominiously destroyed when he committed the heinous crime of talking to Russians, instead of calling them names.

However Flynn’s comments were entirely consistent with the available evidence. Following a law suit by Judicial Watch, the DIA released a previously ‘classified’ 2012 report that confirmed the accuracy of Flynn’s statement.

It revealed the Pentagon were fully aware their support (with the notable assistance of Turkey, Saudi Arabia and Qatar) for AQI (al Qaeda in Iraq) and ISI (Islamic State in Iraq) would be likely to lead to the rise of ISIS. The 2012 DIA Intelligence Information Report stated:

If the situation unravels there is the possibility of establishing a declared or undeclared Salafist principality in eastern Syria (Hasaka and Der Zor), and this is exactly what the supporting powers to the opposition want, in order to isolate the Syrian regime, which is considered the strategic depth of the Shia expansion (Iraq and Iran).

It is important to fully understand what this meant. We can paraphrase this statement as follows:

  • The continued destabilisation of the region is likely to create the Islamic State. This is precisely what the West, NATO (including Turkey) and its allies in the Persian Gulf want. It will hopefully isolate Syria from its Shi’ah allies and break its strategic alliance with Iran and Iraq and ultimately Russia.

The predicted emergence of a “Salafist principality” was seen as a strategic opportunity to isolate the Syrian government. The document acknowledged, “the Salafist [sic], the Muslim Brotherhood, and AQI [al Qaeda in Iraq] are the major forces driving the insurgency in Syria,” and that, “the West, Gulf countries, and Turkey support the opposition [the insurgency in Syria].”

The creation of ISIS was no accident. It wasn’t the result of policy mistakes but, given the evidence, appeared to be the intended consequence of a deliberate strategy. Either that or the Obama administration were intent upon ignoring their own Defense Intelligence Agency report.

The subsequent level of support the U.S led coalition provided for ISIS renders any claim that this was all an ‘error’ untenable. Flynn was absolutely correct when he said the arming of the Islamists was a “wilful decision.” The Obama administration and other western governments were under no illusions. Their strategy would inevitably lead to the creation of ISIS.

Under the leadership of Abu Bakr al Baghdadi, in 2013 the former camp Bucca, Cropper and Taji detainees allied to AQI and ISI groups, announced a unifying name change to the Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS.) Fighters and arms started to pour in from the U.S led coalition allies Saudi Arabia, Qatar and notably Libya.

Along with the arms coming from defeated militaries in Libya and Iraq, ISIS received shipments of weaponry manufactured in Eastern Europe. A study from the Conflict Armament Research group (CAR), commissioned by the EU, traced the route of these weapons [which is available to download].

The CAR stated that ‘large numbers’ of these weapons were bought in Europe by US, Saudi and Qatari dealers. The sellers were allegedly “deceived” about the destination, thereby violating the sale and export licenses. The arms were then shipped via the “rat line” through Turkey into Syria. Once in Syria they were distributed by ‘moderate’ terrorists, such as al Nusra (al Qaeda in Syria), to their ISIS counterparts.

This was later confirmed when significant quantities of the traced weapons were found in ISIS controlled territory, such as Tikrit, Ramadi, Falluja and Mosul. However, these shipments were dwarfed by some very lucky coincidences which turned the ISIS terrorist group into a fully equipped army.

Following the withdrawal of the large scale US troop deployment from Iraq in 2011, the Iraqi army were supported by the US led coalition in their fight against the Islamist insurgency. Having destroyed Iraq’s army in 2003, the coalition then spent billions of US taxpayers’ money rebuilding it, with the profits naturally going to the global arms manufacturing corporations. The US left behind Military Transitions Teams (MiTT’s) to oversee the training and deployment of their proxy Iraqi army.

In 2014, a relatively small ISIS force, of no more than a 1000 fighters, took the Iraqi city of Mosul. At the time, the city was defended by two Iraqi Armoured divisions amounting to 30,000 soldiers. Following sporadic skirmishes on the outskirts, as ISIS approached Mosul, the entire Iraqi force simply abandoned their posts and left.

US supplied, state of the art, military hardware, stored at the al-Qayara base in Mosul, was seemingly just handed over to ISIS. Similar mysterious vanishing acts then followed in Ramadi, again with very little military pressure from ISIS, once more giving them access to heavy weapons and equipment.

In the space of a few months, ISIS not only seized hundreds of millions of dollars from various regional banks but had ‘captured’ six divisions of lethal, US supplied, military hardware. This included more than 2000 US Humvee armoured troop carriers, at least 30 M1A1 Abrams main battle tanks, 50 or so 155mm M198 howitzers (artillery guns,) helicopters, thousands of PKC machine guns, rocket launchers and tons of small arms and ammunition.

Recently ‘evidence’ offered by the British and French governments to ‘prove’ that Bashar al Assad gassed his own people in Douma stated that only his Arab Syrian Arab Army possessed the helicopters capable of dropping Chlorine barrel bombs. This was a lie. ISIS also had the required helicopters, ‘seized’ from Mosul and Ramadi.

The reason given for handing ISIS enough military hardware to form an army capable of fighting nation states was simply incompetence and crap training. However, even the worst army in the world knows enough not to simply abandon all its weapons to the enemy. If the Iraqi army were in such a terrified rush to run away, why didn’t they leave in the protection of their armoured vehicles?

Further questions arise in light of the statements made by the Mosul based head of Iraqi intelligence Ahmed al Zarkani. He said that he had repeatedly warned the US puppet government in Baghdad about the approach of ISIS.

According to Zarkani, he informed the government of Nouri al-Maliki on numerous occasions about ISIS training camps being prepared in the Nineveh region; he called for air strikes against their positions; he alerted the local military command and, following prisoner interrogations, he even discovered the time, date and code-name of the impending ISIS attack.

When he reported that the ‘Al-Eres’ (The Wedding Party) operation was imminent, he was shocked to discover, despite all the intelligence he had provided, the commander of the Mosul divisions had ‘gone on holiday.’ Nothing was done at any stage to stop ISIS from seizing their own armoured divisions.

With all its newly acquired American hardware, ISIS needed fighters trained to use it. In 2015, a report from the International Center for Counter Terrorism estimated that 30,000 foreign fighters had joined ISIS. This flow had increased with ISIS’ expansion into Syria in May 2013. Thousands of seasoned, battle hardened terrorists from the Balkans, including fighters from Kosovo, and the Caucasus, such as the Chechen Islamists, came into Syria via the NATO nation of Turkey. Many of these fighters were familiar with heavy weaponry and were capable of flying aircraft. By then, ISIS numbers were conservatively estimated at around 70,000.

The CIA operation to arm, train and equip Islamist terrorists in Syria was called Timber Sycamore. It supposedly began in 2012, it was allegedly phased out in 2017 by the Trump administration as a result of ISIS, and other terrorist groups, military losses to Syrian and Russian forces.

Western coalition special forces also started terrorists training camps in Jordan in 2011. This was basically a continuation of the training programs they had run for the KLA, NLA and al Qaeda in the Balkans.

With a budget of $1billion, thousands of fighters came through the program. Many of these fighters ended up fighting for Al Nusra, whose numbers grew to 20,000 by the alleged end of Timber Sycamore in 2017. In addition the Pentagon was funding the shipment of arms through European countries such as Denmark and Bulgaria on diplomatic flights to avoid inspection. This wasn’t just a US effort, a number of European states were also involved.

However, despite significant ground forces and plenty of armour and weapons, ISIS lacked air support and were vulnerable to air strikes. In 2014 Barrack Obama announced the US intended to launch air strikes against both Iraq and Syria to ‘degrade and destroy‘ ISIS. In reality, nothing could be further from the truth.

After more than 800 sorties, ISIS territory had more than doubled in Syria. Far from ‘degrading and destroying’ ISIS, US air strikes were apparently assisting ISIS in Syria. In fact, they had the effect of pushing ISIS towards Syria, where they seemed to benefit greatly from US bombing. Was this all another monumental mistake?

It is difficult to see how supplying weapons via airdrops to ISIS was degrading them. This happened on numerous occasions. For example, according to Iraqi intelligence, the US had dropped supplies to besieged ISIS fighters in the Yathrib and Balad districts of Iraq. Strangely this ‘accident’ provided ISIS fighters exactly what they most needed at the time, food and armour piercing rounds.

Then there are the numerous occasions when US air strikes appeared to have directly provided a strategic advantage to ISIS.

The isolated Syrian city of Deir Ezzor had been under siege by ISIS for more than a year. However, the Syrian Arab Army (SAA) were holding it, mainly because they had control of the local airport. This enabled the city to be resupplied by Syrian and Russian airdrops. The airport was well protected by SAA artillery positions in the overlooking Tharda hills, giving the SAA a decisive tactical advantage.

ISIS had consistently failed to take these key strategic positions. However, on September 16th/17th 2016 the US launched air strikes against the SAA who were fighting ISIS. As soon as the SAA defences had been destroyed ISIS then launched a large scale attack and seized the positions. It appeared to be a coordinated offensive, timed precisely with the US air strikes. It was no spur of the moment assault by ISIS. Its scale and precision clearly indicated it had been planned well in advance.

Of course the US commanders said this was all an honest mistake. US Brig. Gen. Richard Coe said it was the result of human error. However, forces commanded by Lt. Gen. Jeffrey L Harrigan dispatched a reconnaissance drone to gather intelligence the day before the air strike. They claimed they ‘misinterpreted’ the intelligence, believing the positions were ISIS rather than SAA controlled, despite the fact the fixed SAA positions were no secret.

They US then ‘accidentally’ gave the Russian military the wrong targeting information, rendering them unable to warn the US that they were planning to attack the SAA not ISIS. This contravened a recent ceasefire agreement, which broke down as a result of the air strikes.

As ISIS moved in to take Deir Ezzor the MSM tried to cover up the US support for their assault. The British Daily Telegraph wrote:

The US-led coalition, as well as the Russians, have been bombing the jihadists in Deir Ezzor for the last 18 months but have been unable to dislodge them.

This was a false claim, you could call it disinformation or fake news. The US hadn’t launched any major air strikes against ISIS forces surrounding Deir Ezzor. The US attacks had been against the SAA and vital city infrastructure. For example, in January 2016 the US bombed Deir Ezzor’s electricity plant while the SAA were holding the city.

Again in May 2017 the US hit a convoy of Shi’ah Iraqi militiamen, loyal to Damascus, and a unit of armed Iranians. At the time the Syrian Arab Army, and their Iraqi and Iranian allies, were pushing ISIS back towards Iraq. The northern Syrian city of Raqqa, held by ISIS, was close to being cut off from ISIS supply lines. The convoy was taking heavy weaponry to forward positions in the battle against ISIS. Yet another example of US air strikes benefiting ISIS terrorists.

There is no doubt at all the US coalition were aware of the funding of ISIS by their Gulf allies Saudi Arabia and Qatar. A State Department memo in 2014 stated:

We need to use our diplomatic and more traditional intelligence assets to bring pressure on the governments of Qatar and Saudi Arabia, which are providing clandestine financial and logistic support to Isis and other radical groups in the region.

Are we to believe this was all just another string of ‘mistakes’ which caused unforeseen ‘blowback‘, accidentally creating, arming, equipping, supplying and tactically supporting ISIS? You can if you like, but if you do you need to account for the evidence which suggests otherwise.

Documentation revealed the US led coalition were anticipating the rise of a “Salafist principality in eastern Syria” and it was central to their strategic thinking; ISIS very easily obtained billions of dollars of US military equipment; ISIS benefited from US bombing campaigns in Syria, and the US appeared to have provided them with tactical air support on a number of occasions; the US led coalition were actively training and arming Islamist extremists who went on to fight for ISIS and the West’s Gulf allies were known and accepted to be funding ISIS.

Similarly, the US’ European allies had their own justifications for military action with attacks in London, Paris and Munich to mention but a few. This led them to take offensive actions in Libya, based once more upon ‘flawed intelligence,’ producing the same destabilisation and a perfect environment for the Islamists to gather and spread their form of violent jihad. This, once again, particularly benefited ISIS, who were able to use Libya as staging point for their operations in Iraq and Syria.

Obama’s departure changed nothing. Following the alleged chemical weapons attack on Khan Sheikhoun Donald Trump, who had come into office promising to end foreign wars of intervention, authorised a missile strike on Al Shayrat airfield in a supposed attempt to damage the Syrian’s ability to launch further alleged chemical weapons attacks.

In yet another remarkable ISIS benefiting “coincidence,” it just so happened that the al Shayrat airbase was the centre of Syrian operations against ISIS forces around Homs and Palmyra. Syrian forces had used it to gain a growing military advantage over ISIS. The missile strike greatly reduced the number of air strikes against the terrorists. The missile strike on al Shayrat was another example of the US effectively providing tactical air cover for ISIS.

It is entirely reasonable to conclude that ISIS was created as ‘the bastard army’ of the Anglo-American ‘military industrial intelligence complex’ and its vassal, allied states, notably Turkey, Saudi Arabia and Qatar. Our elected leaders have not led a battle against them because ISIS, knowingly or not, works for same corporate power elite who control the politicians.

All the evidence points to the West’s consistent use of ISIS as a destabilising force in an energy rich part of the world whose impact on the global economy shaped the 20th century and remains a key strategic region at the start of the 21st . ISIS’ murderous barbarity suits the known geopolitical agenda of the Western powers. Cui bono?

Just like the tale you were spun about weapons of mass destruction, prior to the 2003 invasion of Iraq, practically everything you have been told about ISIS and the conflict in Syria is part of a monstrous deception.

Despite their contrition, following the lies they told about Iraqi WMDs, and promises to the public that they would never let them down again, the entire Western mainstream media has cheered the war machine along every step of the way. The simplistic narratives we have been given about ISIS have never mentioned the clear evidence that links the rise of the Caliphate to U.S led coalition objectives.

Every single time people noticed the coalitions military actions seemed to benefit ISIS, the MSM either covered this up with another ‘unfortunate coincidence’ story, accused those who raised these issues of being ‘conspiracy theorists‘ or created entirely false story lines to obfuscate the reality.

Once again, it appears most of us fell for it.

 

You can read more of Iain’s work at his blog IainDavis.com (Formerly InThisTogether) or on UK Column or follow him on Twitter or subscribe to his SubStack. His new book Pseudopandemic, is now available, in both in kindle and paperback, from Amazon and other sellers. Or you can claim a free copy by subscribing to his newsletter.

 

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image credit: OffGuardian

 




The Global Uprising Against CBDCs Has Begun!

The Global Uprising Against CBDCs Has Begun!

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
August 20, 2023

 

Stop the presses! Here’s my hot take for the day: CBDCs are a bad thing.

OK, maybe that take is not so hot. After all, I don’t even need to spell out “Central Bank Digital Currencies” for my well-informed, switched-on readers to know what I’m talking about when I refer to CBDCs. And the idea that a digital form of programmable money with a central banker’s on/off switch is a bad thing? Come on! Even the normiest of the normies can sense that.

But here’s the hot part of my hot take: CBDCs are deeply unpopular with the general public and we have a chance of stopping them in their tracks.

At first glance, you might not think this is such a controversial statement, but really think about it for a minute.

If you listen to the stenographers and presstitutes of the establishment dinosaur media, you’ll believe that CBDCs not only represent an exciting opportunity to bring our outdated paper money system into the digital age, but that they’ll be bestowed on us by the benevolent central banker technocrats in the next year or two (if we’re lucky!).

If you listen to the pundits in the alternative media, however, you’ll believe that CBDCs not only represent the greatest threat to human freedom in our lifetime, but that they’ll be forced upon us by the evil central bankster overlords in the next year or two (no matter what we do to fend them off).

Do you see the similarities in these two “competing” narratives? In both cases, you and your opinion about CBDCs are utterly irrelevant. It’s a fait accompli. You can love ’em or hate ’em, embrace them or recoil from them, but whatever your position, you will be forced to use them.

But this just isn’t true. In fact, we’re already seeing a massive global pushback against the CBDC agenda. And this pushback is already causing the banksters to panic and to pull back on their grand plan for world domination.

Of course you’re not hearing about this CBDC pushback in the establishment media. Why would they tout their masters’ failures, after all?

But, weirdly enough, you’re not hearing much about this pushback in the alt media either.

Let’s correct that today, shall we?

Global Pushback

As we all know, when globalists are looking for a population to test out their latest technology of enslavement, they turn to Africa. From genetic manipulation to vaccine experiments to agricultural “revolution,” there is no shortage of examples of pathocrats disguising their experiments in technocratic tyranny as philanthropic concern for the poor, beleaguered people of that continent. It’s hardly surprising, then, that Africa is once again serving as a laboratory for the latest globalist technocrat pet project: digital money.

Accordingly, Nigeria became one of the first nation’s in the world to adopt an official, national central bank digital currency when the Central Bank of Nigeria (CBN) launched the eNaira amid much fanfare in October 2021. Promoted with the slogan “Same Naira, more possibilities!” the bankster class collectively held its breath as it watched this trial run of digital money unfold before their eyes.

The early results of this experiment, however, were not promising for the money manipulators. Despite a massive push of the eNaira by the government and breathless coverage of its rollout in the establishment media, it was revealed one year after the digital currency’s launch that a mere 0.5% of the population—one in every 200 people—had actually used it.

Not to be dissuaded, the CBN imposed new banking regulations last December, limiting cash withdrawals from ATMs to just ₦20,000 ($45) per day in a bid to increase adoption of the nation’s CBDC.

The result? Again, utter failure. In fact, worse than utter failure. An actual uprising!

Nigerians took to the streets in February of this year to protest the cash restrictions and even attempted to storm the central bank.

CBN officials are now rearranging the deck chairs on the Titanic, upgrading the eNaira app to allow contactless payments, as if that was what was keeping people from using the banksters’ new digital enslavement tokens. But, try as they might to cover it up, the results of this experiment in monetary manipulation are now clearly visible for all to see. The eNaira is a failure of such gargantuan proportions that it now serves as a cautionary tale to central bankers around the world about how pear-shaped things can get when a digital currency is shoved down an unwilling public’s throat.

But it isn’t just Nigeria where people are saying “no, thanks” to the banksters’ digital money agenda.

In the European Union, protesters are already marching against the European Central Bank’s (ECB) proposed “digital euro.” In Croatia, for example, activists are warning that their government’s adoption of the euro “will be followed by the introduction of a digital euro, and then you will have to kiss all the freedoms you know goodbye.” In the Netherlands, meanwhile, demonstrators have staged rallies warning about the coming European CBDC and the ECB’s plan “to control the spending habits of the population.”

In Russia, too—where Putin has just signed the Central Bank of Russia’s “digital Ruble” into law as an official national currency—people are already threatening to go Nigerian on their government. Recent polls show that a mere 6% of Russians are actually excited about their opportunity to use the new CBDC. This widespread distrust of the digital Ruble is reflected in the coverage of the currency in the nation’s alternative news websites, which are filled with articles decrying the technocratic tyranny. One such article sums up the situation by noting that “we can only say that if citizens actively use non-cash transactions, then they themselves will enter the electronic banking concentration camp, seemingly completely voluntarily.”

And how about in the bastion of liberty, the beacon on the hill, the good ol’ US of A? Well, the grandstanding politicians—always eager to get in front of a parade and pretend they’re leading it—are already introducing (and even passing) legislation to ensure CBDCs never sees the light of day in America.

Of course, readers of this column will know that these political promises aren’t worth the paper they’re written on. Nevertheless, the proposed legislation is important because it reflects two underlying realities. Firstly, it demonstrates that the American public is not on board with the CBDC agenda. And secondly, it signals to the Fed and other central banksters that they risk upsetting their whole rigged monetary system if they push this agenda too far and too fast.

Banksters Running Scared

Yes, it’s safe to say that, on the CBDC issue at least, the momentum is not in the banksters’ favour. In fact, things are so bad that the establishment is now beginning to contemplate whether the mad dash toward CBDCs might just wake up the public to the whole monetary scam.

In a revealing op-ed in The Financial Times last month, Brookings Senior Fellow Eswar Prasad warned, “Central banks must not be blind to the threats posed by CBDCs.” After dutifully detailing all of the nifty features of programmable money that would-be world controllers can take advantage of (“imposing negative nominal interest rates to disincentivise saving,” for example), he then cautions the central banksters that their pretense of “political neutrality” might be exposed for the self-evident sham that it is if central banks start meddling in people’s everyday transactions.

Central banks could be viewed as political agents if their visibility into payment transactions is used for law enforcement or surveillance purposes. [. . .] Central banks already face threats to their independence, credibility and legitimacy. The more extensive the functionality of the money they issue, the greater the political pressures they will be exposed to. At a minimum, such innovations pose risks to the integrity of central bank money.

Oh, won’t somebody think of the central banksters’ credibility!?

And—wouldn’t ya know it?!—just as Prasad and others are beginning to warn that the banksters might be pushing too far and too fast with this whole “programmable money” idea, it looks like the monetary mafia are now stepping back from the CBDC brink . . . at least publicly.

Just this past week, the Central Bank of Colombia issued a white paper on the “Expected Macroeconomic Effects of Issuing a Retail CBDC,” which admits that if central banks push the cashless agenda too far and the situation “reaches a point where the use of cash is about to disappear, central bank money could lose its role as a monetary anchor for deposits and other forms of private money.” Also this past week, the Bank of Canada issued a report on “Unmet Payment Needs and a Central Bank Digital Currency,” which acknowledges that “consumers face few payment gaps or frictions and therefore might have relatively weak incentives to adopt and — especially — to use CBDC at scale.”

In other words, central bankers are quietly admitting there are no real advantages to retail CBDCs and there are even potential downsides to their introduction.

Of course, as my astute readers will already know, this does not mean that the issue is settled, that the bankers have given up, and that the CBDC dream is officially done. No, it just means that they have to change tack and try to find other ways to cajole the public into the digital gulag. Perhaps this is why the central banking minions are now openly strategizing about how best to sell their digital money agenda to an unwilling public.

Take the Bank of Israel, for example. It just released a new white paper purporting to identify “Principles for creating ‘Acceptance’ and ‘Network Effect’ for the Digital Shekel,” or, in plain English: “Ways to convince the rubes to use our virtual slave coins.” The document considers ideas for leveraging the “Network Effect” to artificially stimulate adoption of the digital shekel. Naturally, the plan does not focus on ways to incentivize the use of CBDCs but rather on ways to enforce their acceptance, including obligating banks, payment providers and merchants to participate in the scheme or forcing the government to officially declare the digital shekel to be legal tender.

On its face, the fact that the banksters are now openly plotting how best to stuff digital money down the public’s throat may be a worrying development.

But, upon further reflection, the fact that the banksters are now turning from the carrots of incentives and bonuses and discounts to the stick of government regulation and enforced adoption does not mean that the anti-CBDC movement is doomed to failure.

On the contrary. That the banksters are now actively engaged in a struggle against the general public is a sign that we are winning and that CBDCs are not inevitable.

Resistance is Fertile

I’ve made the point before, but it bears repeating: the constant stream of propaganda, conditioning and censorship that we are subjected to from governments, establishment institutions and their lapdog media is not a sign of their strength. It is a sign of their weakness.

The fact that they have to spend billions of dollars a year pumping lies and misinformation into the heads of the citizenry in order to keep people from seeing the truth is a tacit admission that our thoughts and opinions actually do matter. After all, why would they bother propagandizing to us at all if they didn’t require our approval (or at least our docile apathy) to continue pursuing their agenda?

Similarly, the fact that the banksters are ramping up the next stage of their CBDC indoctrination operation—attempting to convince an increasingly skeptical public that a complete overhaul of the fabric of our monetary reality is somehow beneficial to Joe Sixpack and Jane Soccermom—is a tacit admission that we are the ones who decide whether CBDCs are implemented or not. They can tout the benefits of their digital slave tokens all they want, but if we refuse to use them, then the CBDC world order will not come to fruition.

The banksters, for one, are well aware of this fact. But are we aware of it?

I understand why this message—that pushback and protest do matter and that the globalist agenda is not inevitable—is such an unpopular one in the “alternative” media. If the message is simply: “Relax, everyone! The battle is over and CBDCs have been defeated! Now go back to sleep!” then it is indeed no different from enemy propaganda.

But that is not the message here. Instead, the message is that the public is—for the time being and until the propaganda machine kicks into high gear—overwhelmingly on our side. People DO NOT WANT programmable money and the vast majority see it for what it is: another trick on the part of the establishment to take more power and control away from every day people and put it in the hands of the banksters and their cronies.

That’s why this is the time to seize the momentum of public opinion and steer it into actual productive activity. We can encourage Cash Friday awareness. We can build up local trading communities based on alternative and complementary currencies. We can introduce those around us to Agorist.Market. We can promote community currencies and precious metals and decentralized cryptos and barter circles and the million other forms of survival currency that clued-in Corbetteers have been researching for years.

The time has come to harvest those seeds you’ve been planting! The public is on our side!

Yes, your resistance and pushback do matter. It does make a difference. We do have a part to play in this. Now, let’s go out there and put the final nail in the CBDC coffin.

What are we waiting for?

 

This weekly editorial is part of The Corbett Report Subscriber newsletter. To support The Corbett Report and to access the full newsletter, please sign up to become a member of the website.

 

Connect with James Corbett




Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 20, 2023

 

In my August 11, 2023, article, I explained the evidence that a directed energy weapon was used to destroy Lahaina, a city on the Island of Maui in Hawaii. The only culprit who could possibly have used such a weapon is the U.S. Military. The cover story for the destruction of Lahaina was that out-of-control wildfires caused it. Indeed, Major General Kenneth Hara, the commanding general of the Hawaii Army National Guard, gave the world the wildfire cover story during an August 9, 2023, briefing. One would think that the head of the Maui Emergency Management Agency, Herman Andaya, would be the proper source of information about the alleged wildfires.

But, strangely, Herman Andaya was not even present in Maui at the time of the destruction of Lahaina. Administrator Andaya was absent in the days following the conflagration in Lahaina. Where was he? According to local news, Hawaii News Now, “Andaya was in Waikiki at the Alohilani Resort attending what was scheduled to be a three-day FEMA disaster preparedness seminar called the Pacific Partnership Meeting.” Oddly, the conference did not start until the morning of August 8, 2023, after the destruction of Lahaina was well underway and well known. Yet, Andaya remained at the conference during the first day of the disaster, and records show that he did not check out from his hotel until August 9, 2023.

Another odd thing about the fires was that the emergency alert system of sirens was not implemented after the destruction began. Someone other than Andaya made the decision not to warn the populace. That failure caused many to die needlessly. Andaya subsequently resigned on August 17, 2023, after his alleged dereliction became publically known.

Back to General Hara: while he is not an expert in emergency management, he is an expert in military armaments. It just so happens that Maui is the location for one of two major sites for the Air Force Research Laboratory (AFLR) Directed Energy Directorate. The other major location is Kirkland Air Force Base in New Mexico. You read that correctly; within 40 miles of Lahaina on the Island of Maui is located the Air Force Maui Optical and Supercomputing (AMOS) site, which is part of the AFLR Directed Energy Directorate. The AFLR states “the Directorate develops and transitions technologies in four core technical competencies: laser systems, high power electromagnetics, weapons modeling and simulation, and directed energy and electro-optics for space superiority.”</span

One of the products under study on Maui by the AFLRE uses “laser propagation through the Earth’s atmosphere.” So powerful is the directed energy technology that AMOS states it “has the ability to propagate light into the sodium layer of the atmosphere and create an artificial star.” AMOS further states that the “state-of-the-art electro-optical facility, the MSSS combines research and development with an operational mission; the only one of its kind in the world.”

Also located at the 10,023 foot-summit of Haleakala on the island of Maui, Hawaii, is the 15th Space Surveillance Squadron (15 SPSS). “The mission of 15 SPSS is to develop, assess, deliver, and operate cutting-edge SDA [Space Domain Awareness] capabilities to support warfighter needs.” The 15 SPSS also operates the experimental systems under the AFRL “15 SPSS is a component of Space Delta 2 and also operates experimental systems under the Air Force Research Laboratory [AFRL].” The Directed Energy Directorate is a component department of the AFRL with expertise in directed energy. That means that the 15 SPSS operates the AFRL experimental directed energy weapons. And it does so from the summit of Haleakala overlooking Maui. Haleakala is the perfect location to control directed energy weapons targeting Lahaina.

Picture of the Maui Space Surveillance facility atop Haleakala shooting a sodium guidestar posted on the AFRL website

Apparently, Lahaina became a target of one of the AFLR’s directed energy “operational missions” on August 8, 2023. Administrator Andaya took the fall for the death and destruction caused by a U.S. military operation against its citizens. The people are being led to believe that the death and destruction were exacerbated by incompetence. That way, they are kept from the reality that the destruction of Lahaina was premeditated mass genocide orchestrated by its own government.

It is notable that U.S. President Biden, the Commander in Chief of the U.S. Armed Forces, was utterly silent about the conflagration. The media did not even have an opportunity to ask him about it until Sunday, August 13, 2023, at which time he responded with “no comment.” Think about that for a moment. An entire city is destroyed, and the media does not even have access to the President of the United States to ask him about it until five days later.

And President Biden’s response is an incriminating “no comment!” Instagram influencer Rogan O’Handley wrote on Twitter that the more we learn about Hawaii, ‘the more we learn why Joe Biden has consistently responded with ‘no comment.’ He stated the obvious: ‘There is something REAL fishy going on here.”

How did the words “no comment” come out of his mouth? Who, President or not, responds to a tragedy with “no comment?” I will tell you who. A person who is part of the conspiracy that committed the tragedy. That is the kind of statement made by someone guilty of a crime! President Biden repeatedly refused to answer any questions about the Lahaina tragedy. On August 19, 2023, the White House officially announced that the President would visit Maui on Monday, August 21, 2023.

The Lahaina disaster has many parallels with the 9/11 attacks. Notably, Administrator Andaya was attending a three-day FEMA disaster preparedness seminar at the time a real disaster was taking place. In like manner, on 9/11 there were also several military drills involving hijacked airplanes while the actual 9/11 attacks took place. Three of the military exercises were called Northern Vigilance, Vigilant Warrior, and Vigilant Guardian. Rather suspiciously, the scenarios matched almost exactly the story of the alleged highjacked airplane attacks on 9/11.

 9/11 War Games by James Corbett

Stanley Hilton, former chief of staff to Senator Robert Dole, represents over 400 plaintiffs in a seven billion dollar class action lawsuit against President George Bush, Vice President Richard Cheney, National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, FBI Director Robert Mueller, and others in high government office, alleging that they planned and orchestrated the 9/11 attacks. The lawsuit was dismissed in 2004. The federal district judge ruled that the President and his subordinates enjoyed sovereign immunity from what the court described as a “non-justiciable political question.”

Mr. Hilton has documentary proof and eyewitnesses that President George Bush personally ordered the 9/11 attacks. Furthermore, he has eyewitnesses and documentary evidence that the U.S. Air Force and NORAD conducted 35 drills over the two months prior to 9-11-01 rehearsing attacks by airliners against various targets, including specific drills where the World Trade Center was to be the target of attacks by airplanes.

In fact, on 9-11-01 there were five drills being conducted by NORAD and the Air Force involving attacks by commercial airliners. The 35 rehearsals by the U.S. Government for attacks by airliners impeaches the credibility of National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, who said during a May 16, 2002 press briefing: “I don’t think anybody could have predicted that these people would take an airplane and slam it into the World Trade Center, take another one and slam it into the Pentagon; that they would try to use an airplane as a missile, a hijacked airplane as a missile.” Why would she say such a thing when it is so clearly false? Because she did not think that anyone would ever find out about the prior rehearsals. Now that the rehearsals have leaked out the conspirators had a problem. But that was all taken care of by the district court judge who ruled that the administrative officials had sovereign immunity.

Lahaina has all the earmarks of a directed energy attack, just as was done on 9/11. For more information about directed energy use during the 9/11 attacks read 9/11 – Enemies Foreign and Domestic.

 

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image credit: Wtp22
Lahaina burning during the night of August the 8th, from Wailea.

 


See Related:




Dane Wigington With Greg Hunter: Lahaina Incineration Is Deadly Weather Warfare

Dane Wigington With Greg Hunter: Lahaina Incineration Is Deadly Weather Warfare

by Greg Hunter, USAWatchdog
August 19, 2023

Climate engineering researcher Dane Wigington says the total incineration of Lahaina in Hawaii was caused by man-made weather modification called geoengineering. Wigington says this is really an attack using “weather warfare.”

According to Wigington, they used climate engineering to create a “wind tunnel effect right over Lahaina” with wind speeds up to 100 miles per hour to superheat the fire.

Wigington explains, “This creates a bellows effect, and that escalates temperatures exponentially over what they would have otherwise been. They have been melting steel around the world by exactly that manner for thousands of years by feeding air in. That’s the bellows effect.

“This is the same as an acetylene torch. If you burn just the acetylene, you have 1,500 degrees. When you add oxygen, now you get 6,000 degrees. People are not considering this. They don’t need Directed Energy Weapons (DEWs). . . .

“There is a 140-page U.S. military document that we found and posted at GeoEngineeringWatch.org. It is titled ‘Wildfires as a Military Weapon.’

“It describes surface preparation . . . prior to their commencement of the surface firestorm incineration. That’s exactly what we saw in that region of Hawaii. . . .

“We cannot prove the source of ignition in Lahaina, but what we can say is the template for this event to happen cannot be separated from climate engineering operations.”

Wigington says weird and deadly weather events are going to intensify.

Wigington points out millions of acres are burning in Northern Canada, while California and the Western U.S. brace for a huge hurricane coming from the Pacific Ocean. It looks like somebody wanted Lahaina burned to the ground no matter how many people had to die.

Wigington contends, “We have the disaster capitalists trying to profit off any cataclysm, but I would argue the stakes are much, much more grave. These people know that the planet’s life support system is failing.

“They should know because they are a party to bringing us to this dark place. There are much bigger powers in play. . . .Climate engineering is a covert weapon because they can bring populations to their knees without the population ever realizing they are under assault.

“They mire populations in difficulty, and that makes them easier to control. . . . Climate engineering is far to dignified a term. This is weather warfare.

“We at GeoEngineeringWatch.org are focused on the biggest hole in the bottom of the boat. Whatever people are worried about, political theater or whatever concern they have, none of it will matter if we continue on the current course.

“I mean, in the very near term, none of it will matter.”

Wigington says more and more people are waking up to the dire problems that weather engineering is causing. If there is a critical mass of awakening, many lives could be saved, and at least part of the planet’s life support system can be salvaged.

Wigington says, “It’s far easier to kill a million people that to control them. The U.S. population especially is a rapidly increasing liability to those in power. Many U.S. citizens are armed, and they are not happy about what’s going on.

“Those in power don’t want to get to a point that these citizens take to the street with their proverbial pitchforks and torches looking for them. So, they are going to debilitate, control and reduce that population as fast as they can. Anyone who can’t see that at this point has their eyes wide shut. So, of course, they are using weather as a weapon. Why wouldn’t they?”

There is much more in the 55-minute interview.

Join Greg Hunter of USAWatchdog.com as he goes One-on-One with climate researcher Dane Wigington, founder of GeoEngineeringWatch.org for 8.19.23.

 

Connect with Greg Hunter

Cover image credit: US Dept of Homeland Security
A cadaver dog with FEMA urban search and rescue searches a Lahaina neighborhood


See Related:

Wildfires As a Weapon: US Military Exposed




‘Rich Men North of Richmond’ Artist Turns Down $8 Million From Stunned Music Execs, Says “Nothing Special About Me”

‘Rich Men North of Richmond’ Artist Turns Down $8 Million From Stunned Music Execs, Says “Nothing Special About Me”

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
August 18, 2023

 

Nine days ago, Oliver Anthony’s gritty coal country ballad “Rich Men North Of Richmond” was published on YouTube. The song has become the blue-collar political anthem for millions of Americans ahead of the 2024 presidential election cycle.

On Thursday, Anthony revealed his real name is Christopher Anthony Lunsford. He said the viral response to the song blew him away and only anticipated it would get hundreds of thousands of views, not millions. As of Friday, the song ranks number one on iTunes.

Lunsford is a former factory worker and lives in the forgotten part of the US, Appalachia, an area plagued with an opioid crisis and abandoned factories. The song tells the story of working-class folk who struggle daily while being ignored and mocked by political elites just north of Richmond.

Lunsford detailed in a lengthy Facebook post that he turned down a $8 million deal from stunned music industry executives:

People in the music industry give me blank stares when I brush off 8 million dollar offers. I don’t want 6 tour buses, 15 tractor trailers and a jet. I don’t want to play stadium shows, I don’t want to be in the spotlight. I wrote the music I wrote because I was suffering with mental health and depression. These songs have connected with millions of people on such a deep level because they’re being sung by someone feeling the words in the very moment they were being sung. No editing, no agent, no bullshit. Just some idiot and his guitar. The style of music that we should have never gotten away from in the first place.

Since going viral nine days ago, he has received over 50,000 messages from people reacting to the song. He said some messages include stories about “Suicide, addiction, unemployment, anxiety and depression, hopelessness and the list goes on.”

Lunsford provided more details about who he exactly is…

My legal name is Christopher Anthony Lunsford. My grandfather was Oliver Anthony, and “Oliver Anthony Music” is a dedication not only to him, but 1930’s Appalachia where he was born and raised. Dirt floors, seven kids, hard times. At this point, I’ll gladly go by Oliver because everyone knows me as such. But my friends and family still call me Chris. You can decide for yourself, either is fine.

In 2010, I dropped out of high school at age 17. I have a GED from Spruce Pine, NC. I worked multiple plant jobs in Western NC, my last being at the paper mill in McDowell county. I worked 3rd shift, 6 days a week for $14.50 an hour in a living hell. In 2013, I had a bad fall at work and fractured my skull. It forced me to move back home to Virginia. Due to complications from the injury, it took me 6 months or so before I could work again.

From 2014 until just a few days ago, I’ve worked outside sales in the industrial manufacturing world. My job has taken me all over Virginia and into the Carolinas, getting to know tens of thousands of other blue collar workers on job sites and in factories. Ive spent all day, everyday, for the last 10 years hearing the same story. People are SO damn tired of being neglected, divided and manipulated.

In 2019, I paid $97,500 for the property and still owe about $60,000 on it. I am living in a 27′ camper with a tarp on the roof that I got off of craigslist for $750.

There’s nothing special about me. I’m not a good musician, I’m not a very good person. I’ve spent the last 5 years struggling with mental health and using alcohol to drown it. I am sad to see the world in the state it’s in, with everyone fighting with each other. I have spent many nights feeling hopeless, that the greatest country on Earth is quickly fading away.

He concludes with:

That being said, I HATE the way the Internet has divided all of us. The Internet is a parasite, that infects the minds of humans and has their way with them. Hours wasted, goals forgotten, loved ones sitting in houses with each other distracted all day by technology made by the hands of other poor souls in sweat shops in a foreign land.

When is enough, enough? When are we going to fight for what is right again? MILLIONS have died protecting the liberties we have. Freedom of speech is such a precious gift. Never in world history has the world had the freedom it currently does. Don’t let them take it away from you. 

Just like those once wandering in the desert, we have lost our way from God and have let false idols distract us and divide us. It’s a damn shame.

Meanwhile, the political left is triggered by this song for speaking the truth. And the country music industry is “confused by man actually from the country making actual music.”

Country Music Industry Confused by Man Actually From Country Making Actual Music

 

Connect with ZeroHedge


TCTL editor’s note: See the touching video compilation below of individuals  listening to Oliver Anthony singing The Rich Men of Richmond. Many with tears in their eyes and all responding with emotional recognition of the truth in his words. Below that is the YouTube link to the song, followed by the lyrics.

 

Rich Men North of Richmond by Oliver Anthony



Lyrics:

I’ve been sellin’ my soul, workin’ all day

Overtime hours for bullshit pay

So I can sit out here and waste my life away

Drag back home and drown my troubles away.

 

Pre-Chorus:

It’s a damn shame what the world’s gotten to

For people like me and people like you

Wish I could just wake up and it not be true

But it is, oh, it is.

 

Chorus:

Livin’ in the new world

With an old soul

These rich men north of Richmond

Lord knows they all just wanna have total control

Wanna know what you think, wanna know what you do

And they don’t think you know, but I know that you do

‘Cause your dollar ain’t shit and it’s taxed to no end

‘Cause of rich men north of Richmond.

 

I wish politicians would look out for miners

And not just minors on an island somewhere

Lord, we got folks in the street, ain’t got nothin’ to eat

And the obese milkin’ welfare.

Well, God, if you’re 5-foot-3 and you’re 300 pounds

Taxes ought not to pay for your bags of fudge rounds

Young men are puttin’ themselves six feet in the ground

‘Cause all this damn country does is keep on kickin’ them down.

Repeat Pre-Chorus

Repeat Chorus

I’ve been sellin’ my soul, workin’ all day

Overtime hours for bullshit pay.

 




The Only ‘National Defense’ Needed in This Country, Is Defense Against the Real Enemy: The Ruling Class and the U.S. Government

The Only ‘National Defense’ Needed in This Country, Is Defense Against the Real Enemy: The Ruling Class and the U.S. Government

by Gary D. Barnett
August 18, 2023

 

“I believe that all government is evil, and that trying to improve it is largely a waste of time.”

~ H.L. Mencken

Throughout our history, and today, little, if any defense of this country or its people, has been necessary or warranted. The true enemy of the people of America is, and has always been, its own government.

The real enemies are most all the politicians, regardless of party, the courts, the CIA, the NSA, the FBI, the IRS, the entire military industrial complex, and in general, the federal and state police forces. In other words, all the ruling class and it pawns in government, its enforcers, and all their institutions and bureaucracies, are the real threat to this populace and its natural freedoms.

The ludicrous notion of national defense, and that government forces actually “defend the country,” is an outright lie; propagandized by the State and its mouthpieces in media, simply as a way to gain great power in order to own and control society.

Many will take offence to these statements, mostly due to the fact that since birth, they have been inundated and indoctrinated by false ‘authority’ figures, to believe that they cannot survive and prosper without restrictive laws and rule, and worthless government schooling, all kept in check by severe coercive State prosecution.

They are taught (schooled) to abandon their individuality in favor of the so-called ‘greater good’ of a collective society, to depend on and trust others in power to protect and sustain them and their families throughout their lives. This breeds only ignorance and passivity in the face of State terror.

Independence, a supposed hallmark of this nation-state and its residents, is literally vilified, and even prohibited in many instances, causing personal sovereignty to be discarded in the name of unified slavery.

We live in a country that has warred aggressively against fictitious enemies, meaning without cause or necessity, more than any other country on earth.

It is stated, and supported, that the United States has been at war for at least 93% of its entire existence. I firmly believe this number to be much higher, and with proper consideration, it is likely closer to 100%.

If one is to determine the actual damage done, the actual harm due to direct war, proxy war, what is insanely considered ‘collateral damage,’ what is the horrid long term cost to human life in the aftermath of this terror, the total number of causalities, including the dead, would be tens if not hundreds of millions of innocent people.

But what is sold to the wrongly named ‘public, is that this country is and has been the savior of ‘democracy,’ a completely evil and failed ideology, which is a gross lie beyond the imagination of any sane and thinking human being.

Yes, the truth hurts, but without acceptance of truth, what is left is a deceitful lie; a manufactured myth so atrocious as to have caused an entire nation’s abhorrent and hostile policies to be supported by the masses to such an extent, as to have caused the most broad-based, aggressive, and egregious destruction of humanity in history. This should be the epitaph upon the death of this empire.

At this time in our lives, aggressive war by this government and all who support its heinous deeds, has graduated from its main objective of slaughtering innocent men, women, and children, in addition to the other devastation, in other countries most everywhere on earth, to include the entirety of this country’s population as well.

The major war currently is against all of us who live and work in the U.S. by those who continue to claim to be our protectors. This contradiction is absurd, but is still little understood by the average American, as can be evidenced by the terroristic treatment inflicted, and with little if any resistance, on this society these past few years.

At a time when this country and the world are steeped in madness and hate, more and more atrocities continue to take place, with almost zero empathy evident by the political class.

The last evil ‘ruler,’ just one among all, ‘chosen’ by the ‘people,’ was Biden, and this was his response to the State’s complicit murder of those in Lahaina just recently, after a very suspicious and devastating fire had destroyed an entire town and its residents.

He had the audacity to offer these poor people who lost everything, including many family members, a one-time $700 payment per household. This was in the midst of giving over $200 million more to Ukraine’s political criminals recently, with plans to give many more billions; this after more than $113 billion has already been paid to enrich the newly rich politicians in Ukraine. (Apparently, blackmail garners payment more than actual need of Americans.)

This alone should be enough for everyone in this country to grasp how little this government cares about its own, and how worthless all in the governing system have become. To depend on, or trust this scum to defend you from harm, is asinine beyond explanation.

Who will defend you from harm? Who will defend you from foreign invasion, although that has never once happened in this country’s history, not even including the pre-planned setup called the Pearl Harbor attack? Who will defend you from hyper-inflation and the resulting extreme prices for goods? Who will defend you from mass censorship and constant surveillance? Who will defend you from food shortages, energy shutdowns, and extensive restrictions on all transactions and travel? Who will defend your children from the consuming perversion being forced on them at every opportunity with this government’s blessing? Who will defend you from aggression and tyranny? Who will defend you from yourself?

It will never be the evil State that defends you, nor will it be its ‘national defense systems,’ its enforcers in the military and police, the politicians, the banking cartels, the large corporate monsters, or any government at any level.

There is only one legitimate defense, and that is self-defense.

Only you, each of you, has the ability and desire to defend himself. No other and no State entity can or will ever be your savior.  Until that is accepted, expect total serfdom to become your voluntarily accepted way of life.

Much more tyranny is coming. Lockdowns, fake ‘viruses,’ bioweapons, threats and totalitarian measures based on bogus ‘climate change, central bank digital currency, social credit restrictions, more inflation, destruction of money, health mandates, curfews, travel shutdowns, food shortages, transhuman promotion, among many other atrocities, including perpetual war.

National defense is an outright lie, and can never protect you, it can only harm you. There is but one enemy, and that enemy is the State!

There is but one defense against this demon called government, and that is when individuals, or individuals working together en masse, abolish all rule. The responsibility for you is you, and any dependence on government whatsoever can only lead to despair, hopelessness, disaster, and enslavement. Defend yourself from this evil State, and break the chains that bind you.

“Every government is run by liars. Nothing they say should be believed.”

~ I.F. Stone

 

Reference links:

America’s perpetual wars of aggression

What the media won’t tell you about the Maui fires

 

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: kirillslov




Mass Murder and the West Maui Land Grab

Mass Murder and the West Maui Land Grab
Maui will either be a major milestone for the ruling class, or a line in the sand for we the people.

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
August 18, 2023

 



The blame for the destruction of West Maui is falling upon Hawaiian Electric who knew as early as four years ago that there was a risk of fire due to their own negligence of maintaining power lines. But did nothing.

Hawaiian Electric, who is owned by Vanguard and BlackRock, has been shifting their focus to clean energy. But in order to Build Back Better, they must first destroy the old system. And so the power was left on to feed the fires.

The outdoor siren warning system on Maui is one of the most advanced and maintained warning systems on Earth. Residents are accustomed to monthly tests and on the day of the fire, no sirens went off.

The director in charge of this warning system was at a FEMA disaster seminar in Oahu as the fires were devastating the people of Maui.

When asked if he regretted not sounding the alarm, he said no. Because he was worried that the people would run into the fire.

But instead, they burned to death. Including an untold number of children who were home alone that morning because of a school cancellation.

The water wasn’t on. Fire hydrants were dry. And the Deputy Director of Water Resource Management, who was named an Obama Foundation Leader, refused to release water for the west Maui fires until it was too late. He says that in order to share water, Hawaiians need to discuss equity.

Without any warnings and without any water, the people tried to flee. But they were stopped by the police who had orders to keep people from escaping.

The Maui chief of police, John Pelletier, was the incident officer at one of the biggest cover-up operations in US history; the 2017 Las Vegas shootings.

Residents are not allowed to leave unless they get a permission slip from the federal government. But the government recently decided to shut that option down.

While the fires burned, a book was published about the entire event. The book blamed climate change and was written by a Dr Miles Stones. The definition of milestone is; an action or event marking a significant change or stage in development.

Hawaii is being usurped by the same billionaires pushing for the World Economic Forum’s Great Reset. They have been planning on turning Maui into a test bed for their Artificial Intelligence Smart Grid. But the people were in their way, so they burned them out.

Maui will either be a major milestone for the ruling class, or a line in the sand for we the people.

The federal government offers a one-time payment of seven hundred dollars to each family that has lost their home. And the Governor of Hawaii tells reporters that the state plans on acquiring the land.

And if it wasn’t for the local community, the survivors would be left alone to die in the ashes of their neighbors.

 

Connect with The Reese Report




Multi-Billion Dollar “Direct Energy Weapons (DEW)” Market, for Military and “Civilian Use” (?). Were DEWs Used in Hawaii?

Multi-Billion Dollar “Direct Energy Weapons (DEW)” Market, for Military and “Civilian Use” (?). Were DEWs Used in Hawaii?

by  Prof Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research
August 17, 2023

 

Directed Energy Weapons (DEW) constitute a buoyant $5.3 Billion dollar business (2022) which is slated to increase to $12.9 Billon dollars by 2027. This profit-driven military-industrial market is dominated by six “Defense Contractors” including Raytheon, Northrup Grunman, BAE Systems (plc), Boeing, Lockheed Martin and L3Harris Technologies.

According to Raytheon:

 “The development of directed energy (DE) technology is used to counter the drone threat”.

While DEWs are largely intended for military use, so-called “non lethal” and/or “less lethal” Direct Energy Weapons are  envisaged for so-called “Homeland Security applications”. 

The Evidence: Were Direct Energy Weapons Used in Hawaii?

Images confirm the extent and nature of devastation and destruction. (see videos below). 

They also suggest that the damage incurred was not attributable to “natural causes”. 

The evidence suggests that Direct Energy Weapons (DEW) may have been used (yet to be fully ascertained) and that the acts of destruction were deliberate.

Video: Houses are Targeted? Green Trees Remain Untouched



Note the above CBS report points to “A Wildfire Disaster”.

Thousands of families have lost their homes, burnt to the ground. The devastating impacts resulting from possible DEW attacks are not mentioned. The official statements point to “Natural Causes”:

Can you imagine calling up a family that has just seen their home burn to the ground and offering to buy their land for below market value?

This is apparently happening in Hawaii right now on a massive scale.”  

Michael Snyder, (August 17, 2023)

***

Among the six private companies of the military industrial complex, Raytheon and BAE Systems are also involved in ENMOD technologies on behalf of the U.S. Air Force.

There is a flourishing international market. DEWs are exported Worldwide.

The usage for so-called “Homeland Security applications” includes “non-lethal” civilian applications including Airport protection, riot controls, protection of infrastructure (see below).

A Citizens’ Criminal Investigation?

Are these so-called “non-lethal or “less lethal” DEWs available for acquisition or purchase by private sector and/or governmental entities?

A citizens’ investigation is required to establish what is behind this devastating process of destruction in Hawaii and in various  parts of America.

Our thoughts today are with the people of Hawaii.

Below is an examination of the Direct Energy Weapons Market by:

Marketandmarkets.com

click image below to access the complete document:

 

Connect with Global Research

Cover image credit: US National Guard
Combined Joint Task Force 50 (CJTF-50) search, rescue and recovery elements conduct search operations of areas damaged by wildfires in Lahaina, Maui, Aug. 15, 2023. Members of CJTF-50 from the Hawaii Army and Air National Guard, U.S. Army Active Duty and Reserve are actively supporting Maui County authorities to provide immediate security, safety, and well-being to those affected by the wildfires to ensure unwavering support for the community of Maui and first responders. (U.S. Army National Guard photo by Staff Sgt. Matthew A. Foster)




Glyphosate: Cancer and Other Health Concerns

Glyphosate: Cancer and Other Health Concerns

by Stacy Malkan, U.S. Right to Know
July 21, 2023

 

Glyphosate, a synthetic herbicide patented in 1974 by the Monsanto Company and now manufactured and sold by many companies in hundreds of products, has been associated with cancer and many other health concerns discussed in this fact sheet. Glyphosate is best known as the active ingredient in Roundup-branded herbicides, and the herbicide used with “Roundup Ready” genetically modified organisms (GMOs).

Herbicide tolerance is the most prevalent GMO trait engineered into food crops, with some 90% of corn and 94% of soybeans in the U.S. genetically engineered to tolerate herbicides, according to USDA data. A 2017 study found that Americans’ exposure to glyphosate grew by about 500 percent since Roundup Ready GMO crops were introduced in the U.S in 1996.

Why is Bayer taking glyphosate off the U.S. consumer market?

In July 2021, Monsanto owner Bayer AG said it would remove glyphosate-based herbicides from the U.S. consumer market by 2023 due to litigation. More than 100,000 people are suing Bayer alleging they developed non-Hodgkin lymphoma from exposure to the company’s glyphosate herbicides, such as Roundup. We are posting documents released via discovery on our Monsanto Papers page.

Glyphosate will still be used in large quantities in agriculture in the U.S. Reformulated versions of Roundup brand herbicides without glyphosate will also remain on the market, but may contain other chemicals of concern. For example, one of the active ingredients in “Roundup for Lawns” is dicamba, a chemical that can damage non-target plants and crops.

How much glyphosate is used around the world?

According to a February 2016 study, glyphosate is the most widely used agricultural chemical: “In the U.S., no pesticide has come remotely close to such intensive and widespread use.” Findings include:

  • Americans applied 1.8 million tons of glyphosate (or 1.6 billion kilograms) from its introduction in 1974 to 2014.
  • Worldwide, 9.5 million tons (or 8.6 billion kilograms) of the chemical has been sprayed on fields —enough to spray nearly half a pound of Roundup on every cultivated acre of land in the world.
  • Glyphosate use has risen almost 15-fold since Roundup Ready GMO crops (genetically engineered to tolerate glyphosate) were introduced in the mid 1990s.

In the U.S., approximately 281 million pounds of glyphosate were applied to 298 million acres annually, on average, from 2012 to 2016, according to the Environmental Protection Agency. The most glyphosate was applied to soybean (117.4 million pounds annually), corn (94.9 million pounds annually), and cotton (20 million pounds annually). Many citrus fruits, including grapefruit, oranges and lemons, and field crops such as soybeans, corn and cotton have high percentages of their acres treated with glyphosate.

What do scientists and health care providers say about glyphosate?

Many scientists, health care professionals and public interest groups have raised concern about the health impacts of glyphosate. Here are some key statements:

Monsanto owner Bayer AG maintains that glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides are safe when used as directed and do not cause cancer. “Glyphosate is one of the most studied herbicides in the world – and, like all crop protection products, it is subject to rigorous testing and oversight by regulatory authorities,” Bayer states on its website. “There is an extensive body of research on glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides… that confirm that glyphosate and our glyphosate-based formulated products can be used safely and do not cause cancer.”

Internal Monsanto documents, investigative journalism and independent research have established that Monsanto used many tactics over decades to manipulate the scientific record on glyphosate and that regulatory agencies relied on poorly conducted studies and insufficient data.

How much glyphosate is in our bodies?

More than 80% of urine samples drawn from children and adults in a U.S. health study contained glyphosate, according to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Out of 2,310 urine samples taken from Americans intended to be representative of the population, CDC found that 1,885 contained detectable levels of glyphosate. Scientists described this finding as “disturbing” and “concerning.”

2017 study in JAMA found that Americans’ exposure to glyphosate increased approximately 500 percent since Roundup Ready GMO crops were introduced in 1996.

While it is clear that most Americans are being exposed to glyphosate, the literature on glyphosate exposure levels, especially in children, remains limited, according to a 2020 paper in Environmental Health. “Without more data collected in a standardized way, parsing out the potential relationship between glyphosate exposure and disease will not be possible,” the researchers concluded.

Why are corporate studies a problem?

Regulators in Europe and the United States, Canada and elsewhere have repeatedly affirmed the corporate assertions of glyphosate safety. In making determinations about safety, these regulators have relied in part on tests that are conducted by or for the companies that have not been published or peer reviewed.

The corporate studies have long been kept secret, even by regulators. But in Europe, litigation by a group of European Parliament lawmakers led to the release of dozens of such studies. More than 50 of those corporate studies were analyzed in 2021 by independent scientists from the Institute of Cancer Research, Department of Medicine at the Medical University of Vienna, Armen Nersesyan and Siegfried Knasmueller.

Their goal was to determine if the industry studies comply with current international guidelines for chemical testing.  The researchers concluded that the bulk of the industry studies were outdated and did not meet current guidelines. An array of shortcomings and flaws were found in the studies, rendering most of them unreliable. Of the 53 studies submitted to regulators by the companies, only two were acceptable under current internationally recognized scientific standards, Knasmueller said.

Glyphosate and cancer: What do scientific and regulatory agencies say?

The scientific literature and regulatory conclusions regarding cancer links to glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides show a mix of findings, making the safety of the herbicide a hotly debated subject.

In 2015, the World Health Organization’s International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) classified  glyphosate as “probably carcinogenic to humans” after reviewing years of published and peer-reviewed scientific studies. The team of international scientists found there was a particular association between glyphosate and non-Hodgkin lymphoma.

U.S. agencies: At the time of the IARC classification, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) was conducting a registration review. The EPA’s Cancer Assessment Review Committee (CARC) issued a report in 2016 concluding that glyphosate was “not likely to be carcinogenic to humans” at doses relevant to human health. In December 2016, the EPA convened a Scientific Advisory Panel to review the report; members were divided in their assessment of EPA’s work, with some finding the EPA erred in how it evaluated certain research. Additionally, the EPA’s Office of Research and Development determined that EPA’s Office of Pesticide Programs had not followed proper protocols in its evaluation of glyphosate, and said the evidence could be deemed to support a “likely” carcinogenic or “suggestive” evidence of carcinogenicity classification. Nevertheless the EPA issued a draft report on glyphosate in December 2017 continuing to hold that the chemical is not likely to be carcinogenic. In April 2019, the EPA reaffirmed its position that glyphosate poses no risk to public health. But earlier that same month, the U.S. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR) reported links between glyphosate and cancer: “numerous studies reported risk ratios greater than one for associations between glyphosate exposure and risk of non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma or multiple myeloma,” the report said.

The EPA issued an Interim Registration Review Decision in January 2020 with updated information about its position on glyphosate, continuing to hold the position that glyphosate is unlikely to cause cancer. In June 2022, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals rejected EPA’s decision. EPA withdrew its interim decision in September 2022 and the agency will start over in its review.

European Union: The European Food Safety Authority and the European Chemicals Agency have said glyphosate is not likely to be carcinogenic to humans. A March 2017 report by environmental and consumer groups argued that regulators relied improperly on research that was directed and manipulated by the chemical industry. A 2019 study found that Germany’s Federal Institute for Risk Assessment report on glyphosate, which found no cancer risk, included sections of text that had been plagiarized from Monsanto studies. In February 2020, reports surfaced that 24 scientific studies submitted to the German regulators to prove the safety of glyphosate came from a large German laboratory that has been accused of fraud and other wrongdoing.

In June 2021, the European Union’s (EU) Assessment Group on Glyphosate (AGG) issued an 11,000-page draft report concluding that glyphosate is safe when used as directed and does not cause cancer. The finding is based in part on a dossier of roughly 1,500 studies submitted to European regulators by the “Glyphosate Renewal Group (GRG),” a collection of companies that includes Monsanto owner Bayer AG. The companies are seeking the renewal of the EU authorization of glyphosate. Current authorization in Europe expires in 2023.

WHO/FAO Joint Meeting on Pesticide Residues  determined in 2016 that glyphosate was unlikely to pose a carcinogenic risk to humans from exposure through the diet, but this finding was tarnished by conflict of interest concerns after it came to light that the chair and co-chair of the group also held leadership positions with the International Life Sciences Institute, a group funded in part by Monsanto and one of its lobbying organizations.

California OEHHA: In March 2017, the California Environmental Protection Agency’s Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment confirmed it would add glyphosate to California’s Proposition 65 list of chemicals known to cause cancer. Monsanto sued to block the action but the case was dismissed. In a separate case, the court found that California could not require cancer warnings for products containing glyphosate. On June 12, 2018, a U.S. District Court denied the California Attorney General’s request for the court to reconsider the decision. The court found that California could only require commercial speech that disclosed “purely factual and uncontroversial information,” and the science surrounding glyphosate carcinogenicity was not proven.

Agricultural Health Study: A long-running U.S. government-backed prospective cohort study of farm families in Iowa and North Carolina has not found any connections between glyphosate use and non-Hodgkin lymphoma, but the researchers reported that “among applicators in the highest exposure quartile, there was an increased risk of acute myeloid leukemia (AML) compared with never users…” The most recent published update to the study was made public in late 2017.

What health problems are linked to glyphosate exposure?
Cancer

July 2023 study in Chemosphere: Researchers from the University of California, Berkeley, conducted a systematic review of mechanistic studies on glyphosate and glyphosate-based formulations to evaluate them for the 10 key characteristics of cancer hazard identification. Data analysis revealed “strong evidence” for five of the key characteristics of carcinogenicity. An in-depth analyses of genotoxicity and endocrine disruption revealed “strong and consistent positive findings.” The researchers wrote, “Our findings strengthen the mechanistic evidence that glyphosate is a probable human carcinogen and provide biological plausibility for previously reported cancer associations in humans, such as non-Hodgkin lymphoma.”

March 2023 Leukemia and Lymphoma journal: Pooled study of three case-control studies found statistically significant increased risk and confirmed an association between Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL), including sub type hairy cell leukemia, and exposure to certain herbicides including glyphosate.

A February 2020 paper in Environmental Health presents a comprehensive review of chronic exposure animal carcinogenicity studies of glyphosate. It reports toxicologically plausible pathways for why glyphosate may cause various cancers in rodents.

In April 2019, the U.S. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry issued its draft toxicological profile for  glyphosate, reporting an increased cancer risk from glyphosate exposures. Emails released via court proceedings show officials at EPA and Monsanto tried to hinder the ATSDR report. (The ATSDR profile is now final, and raises concerns about cancer.)

March 2019 study published in the International Journal of Epidemiology analyzed data from more than 30,000 farmers and agricultural workers from studies done in France, Norway and the U.S., and reported links between glyphosate and diffuse large B-cell lymphoma.

February 2019 meta analysis in Mutation Research/Reviews in Mutation Research reports a “compelling link” between glyphosate-based herbicides and non-Hodgkin lymphoma. Three of the study authors were members of the EPA’s scientific advisory panel on glyphosate who have stated publicly that the EPA failed to follow proper scientific practices in its glyphosate assessment.

A January 2019 analysis in Environmental Sciences Europe argues that the U.S. EPA’s classification of glyphosate disregarded substantial scientific evidence of genotoxicity the negative impact on a cell’s genetic material) associated with weed killing products such as Roundup.

For an analysis released in July 2021, researchers from the University of Vienna analyzed 53 glyphosate studies submitted to regulators by pesticide companies found that most of the studies do not comply with modern international standards for scientific rigor, and lack the types of tests most able to detect cancer risks. The same researchers reported in November 2021 that only two of the 11 studies Monsanto submitted to EU regulators were deemed “reliable.”

In June 2022, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals rejected EPA’s decision that glyphosate likely poses no “unreasonable risk” to the environment and human health. In September 2022 the U.S. EPA withdrew its interim decision on glyphosate.

Endocrine disruption, fertility and reproductive concerns

July 2023 study in Environmental Pollution investigated the potential effects of low levels of glyphosate exposure from weaning to adult life in male Wistar rats on hypothalamic-pituitary-thyroid (HPT) axis function. Various changes suggest that glyphosate “may affect several steps of HPT axis regulation at the transcriptional level in an age-dependent manner and alter the morphometric parameters of the thyroid gland and TH synthesis, with potential repercussions in the TH-target organs.”

November 2022 paper in the Review of Economic Studies discusses glyphosate exposure and birth outcomes of populations surrounding GMO soy growing regions in Brazil. “We document a significant deterioration in birth outcomes for populations downstream from locations that are likely to have increased relatively more the use of glyphosate … average increase in glyphosate use in the sample during the 2000-2010 period led to an increase of 5% of the average in the infant mortality rate.”

October 2022 study in Environmental Health found glyphosate in 99% of pregnant women in a Midwestern cohort. Higher maternal levels in the first trimester were associated with lower birth weight, higher NICU admission risk. See also Indiana University School of Medicine news release.

In a March 2021 paper in Frontiers in Endocrinology, researchers that glyphosate is detected in the urine of residents of rural and urban environments and there is a correlation between “farmers’ exposure to glyphosate-based herbicides and altered thyroid hormone levels or incidence of thyroid pathologies.”

October 2020 paper in Chemosphere journal is the first comprehensive review consolidating the mechanistic evidence on glyphosate as an endocrine-disrupting chemical (EDC). The paper concludes that the world’s most widely used herbicide meets at least eight of the 10 key characteristics of EDCs, as proposed in an expert consensus statement published in 2020. See also article by USRTK.

July 2020 paper published in Molecular and Cellular Endocrinology, Are glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides endocrine disruptors that alter female fertility?” summarizes the endocrine-disrupting effects of exposure to glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides at low or “environmentally relevant” doses in the female reproductive tissues. Data suggesting that, at low doses, glyphosate-based herbicides may have adverse effects on the female reproductive tract fertility are discussed.

June 2020 paper in Veterinary and Animal Science concludes that some ingredients of glyphosate-based herbicides appear to act as reproductive toxicants, having a wide range of effects on both the male and female reproductive systems, including endocrine disruption, tissue damage and dysfunction of gametogenesis.

June 2020 paper in Environmental Pollution finds that neonatal exposure to glyphosate-based herbicides decreased cell proliferation and altered the expression of molecules that control proliferation and development in the uterus, potentially affecting the female reproductive health of sheep.

July 2020 study in Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology found indications that “chronic low-level exposure to glyphosate alters the ovarian proteome and may ultimately impact ovarian function.”

September 2020 study in Food and Chemical Toxicology reports that perinatal exposure to a glyphosate-based herbicide or glyphosate “disrupted critical hormonal and uterine molecular targets during the receptive state, possibly associated with the implantation failures.”

A 2018 ecological and population study conducted in Argentina found high concentrations of glyphosate in the soil and dust in agricultural areas that also reported higher rates of spontaneous abortion and congenital abnormalities in children, suggesting a link between environmental exposure to glyphosate and reproductive problems. No other relevant sources of pollution were identified.

A 2018 rat study by Argentinian researchers linked low-level perinatal glyphosate exposures to impaired female reproductive performance and congenital anomalies in the next generation of offspring.

A birth cohort study in Indiana published in 2017 – the first study of glyphosate exposure in US pregnant women using urine specimens as a direct measure of exposure – found detectable levels of glyphosate in more than 90% of the pregnant women tested and found the levels were significantly correlated with shortened pregnancy lengths.

2011 study in Reproductive Toxicology reported that glyphosate impairs male offspring reproductive development by disrupting gonadotropin expression.

2009 study in Toxicology found that glyphosate-based herbicides are toxic and endocrine disruptors in human cell lines.

Liver disease

A 2023 prospective cohort study using data from the Center for the Health Assessment of Mothers and Children of Salinas (CHAMACOS) reports a strong association between glyphosate and AMPA levels in the urine of 4-year-old and 14-year-old Hispanic children and markers of damage in the liver indicative of future non-alcoholic fatty liver disease and metabolic syndrome. See also reporting in Inside Climate News.

A 2019 study based on urinary analysis for glyphosate reported that glyphosate excretion is significantly higher in patients with nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH) who are considered to be at a higher risk of fibrosis progression and development to cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma.

A 2017 study associated chronic, very low-level glyphosate exposures to non-alcoholic fatty liver disease in rats. According to the researchers, the results “imply that chronic consumption of extremely low levels of a GBH formulation (Roundup), at admissible glyphosate-equivalent concentrations, are associated with marked alterations of the liver proteome and metabolome,” the biomarkers for NAFLD

Kidney disease

The American Association for the Advancement of Science awarded two Sri Lankan scientists, Drs. Channa Jayasumana and Sarath Gunatilake, the 2019 Award for Scientific Freedom and Responsibility for their work to “investigate a possible connection between glyphosate and chronic kidney disease under challenging circumstances.” The scientists reported that glyphosate plays a key role in transporting heavy metals to the kidneys of those drinking contaminated water, leading to high rates of chronic kidney disease in farming communities. See papers in SpringerPlus (2015), BMC Nephrology (2015), Environmental Health (2015), International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health (2014).

The AAAS award to the scientists was suspended amidst a fierce opposition campaign by pesticide industry allies to undermine the work of the scientists. After a review, the AAAS reinstated the award.

Microbiome disruption

November 2020 paper in the Journal of Hazardous Materials reports that approximately 54 percent of species in the core of the human gut microbiome are “potentially sensitive” to glyphosate. With a “large proportion” of bacteria in the gut microbiome susceptible to glyphosate, the intake of glyphosate “may severely affect the composition of the human gut microbiome,” the authors said in their paper. See also reporting by USRTK.

A 2020 literature review of glyphosate’s effects on the gut microbiome concludes that, “glyphosate residues on food could cause dysbiosis, given that opportunistic pathogens are more resistant to glyphosate compared to commensal bacteria.” The paper continues, “Glyphosate may be a critical environmental trigger in the etiology of several disease states associated with dysbiosis, including celiac disease, inflammatory bowel disease and irritable bowel syndrome. Glyphosate exposure may also have consequences for mental health, including anxiety and depression, through alterations in the gut microbiome.”

A 2018 rat study conducted by the Ramazzini Institute reported that low-dose exposures to Roundup at levels considered safe significantly altered the gut microbiota in some of the rat pups.

Another 2018 study reported that higher levels of glyphosate administered to mice disrupted the gut microbiota and caused anxiety and depression-like behaviors.

Neurotoxicity

A large nationwide study published in the journal NeuroToxicology (December 2021) reports that “several neurotoxic pesticide exposures estimated using residential location were associated with statistically significant increased risk of ALS (amyotrophic lateral sclerosis). These include the herbicides 2, 4-D and glyphosate, and the insecticides carbaryl and chlorpyrifos.” ALS is a progressive nervous system disease that affects nerve cells in the brain and spinal cord, causing loss of muscle control.

Anemia

A July 2023 study in Environmental Science and Pollution Research, Taiwanese researchers analyzed data from the 2013-2014 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) of 1466 adults to explore the relationship between glyphosate exposure and erythrocyte profiles. The study found a “significant negative association between urinary glyphosate levels and hemoglobin and hematocrit … and provides “preliminary evidence of a plausible association between glyphosate exposure and anemia in a subset of the adult population in the United States.”

What are the environmental impacts of glyphosate?
Harm to bees and monarch butterflies

A 2023 study reports that glyphosate impairs learning in bumblebees. See news coverage in Phys.org.

A 2018 study reported that glyphosate damaged the beneficial gut bacteria in honeybees and made them more prone to deadly infections.

Research from China suggests that honeybee larvae grew more slowly and died more often when exposed to glyphosate.

A 2015 study that found field-levels of exposure impaired the cognitive capacities of honeybees.

Research from 2017 correlated glyphosate use with reduced populations of monarch butterflies, possibly due to reductions in milkweed, the main food source for monarch butterflies.

Why are people suing Bayer over glyphosate?

More than 100,000 people have filed suit against Monsanto Company (now Bayer) alleging that exposure to Roundup herbicide caused them or their loved ones to develop non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), and that Monsanto covered up the risks. As part of the discovery process, Monsanto has had to turn over millions of pages of internal records. See our Monsanto Papers page for documents released during the trials. The first three trials ended in large awards to plaintiffs for liability and damages, with juries ruling that Monsanto’s weed killer was a substantial contributing factor in causing them to develop NHL. Bayer is appealing the rulings. The U.S. Supreme Court has so far upheld the rulings against Bayer.

Monsanto influence over research

In March 2017, the federal court judge unsealed some internal Monsanto documents that raised new questions about Monsanto’s influence on the EPA process and about the research regulators rely on. The documents suggest that Monsanto’s long-standing claims about the safety of glyphosate and Roundup do not necessarily rely on sound science as the company asserts, but on efforts to manipulate the science.

More information about scientific interference
Why is desiccation of wheat and other crops a problem?

Some farmers use glyphosate on non-GMO crops such as wheat, barley, oats, and lentils to dry down the crop ahead of harvest in order to accelerate the harvest. This practice, known as desiccation, may be a significant source of dietary exposure to glyphosate.

How much glyphosate is in our food?

Despite having annual pesticide residue testing programs for more than 30 years, the USDA U.S. FDA mostly skipped testing food for glyphosate until after criticism from the Government Accountability Office in 2014. The USDA said it would start testing but then dropped the plan in 2017. Internal government documents obtained by U.S. Right to Know show USDA had planned to start testing over 300 samples of corn syrup for glyphosate in April 2017; but the agency killed the project before it started. FDA began a limited testing program in 2016, but the effort was fraught with controversy and internal difficulties and the program was suspended in September 2016. The FDA did later resume limited testing.

One FDA chemist found alarming levels of glyphosate in many samples of U.S. honey, levels that were technically illegal because there have been no allowable levels established for honey by the EPA. Here is a recap of news about glyphosate found in food:

What mixtures of glyphosate and other pesticides are in our food?

USDA data from 2016 shows detectable pesticide levels in 85% of more than 10,000 foods sampled, everything from mushrooms to grapes to green beans. The government says there are little to no health risks, but some scientists say there is little to no data to back up that claim. See Chemicals on our food: When ‘safe’ may not really be safe.

In 2020, a group of FDA scientists published a research paper examining pesticide residue data collected from 2009-2017. The scientists said: “In this study, results for over 56,000 human food samples collected and analyzed under the FDA pesticide residue monitoring program between fiscal years (FY) 2009 to 2017 were reviewed to identify trends not apparent in annual reports. The overwhelming majority of these samples, 98.0% of domestic and 90.9% of import human foods, were compliant with federal standards. Although herbicides may be more widely used, the 10 most frequently detected residues were insecticides and fungicides. On a yearly basis, the violation rate for imported samples is 3-5 times higher than the rate for domestic samples. The import violation rate increased over time, as did the number of residues detected. Targeted sampling of foods with higher commodity-specific violation rates appears to be a major contributor to the increased violation rate. Mismatches between US tolerances and international MRLs can lead to violations; this was especially marked for rice. Overall, the majority of violations are due to residues of pesticides not authorized for use in the US (lack of tolerances). While DDT continues to persist in the environment and was found in 2.2% of domestic samples and 0.6% of imported samples, 42.3% of DDT-positive samples were below the limit of quantitation. The trends and analyses identified in this paper may help FDA plan future sampling and continue to protect the food supply.”

Monsanto owner Bayer AG maintains that residues of glyphosate in food are not harmful at levels approved by the EPA. A 2021 paper written by longtime Bayer (former Monsanto) scientist John Vicini and published in Comprehensive Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety states that “dietary exposures to glyphosate are within established safe limits.”

For a complete history of the use of glyphosate, including regulatory action and inaction, scientific controversies, human and environmental impact data, read Whitewash: The Story of a Weed Killer, Cancer and the Corruption of Science, winner of the 2018 Rachel Carson Book Award from the Society of Environmental Journalists. See also USRTK’s report on what internal corporate documents reveal about the tactics Monsanto and Bayer used to defend glyphosate. Merchants of Poison: How Monsanto Sold the World on a Toxic Pesticides by Stacy Malkan, with Anna Lappe and Kendra Klein, PhD.

This fact sheet was originally written by Carey Gillam and is regularly updated by USRTK staff

 

Connect with U.S. Right to Know

Cover image credit: maxmann




Dependency on the State Is the Core of the Takeover Plot of Humanity

Dependency on the State Is the Core of the Takeover Plot of Humanity

by Gary D. Barnett
August 16, 2023

 

“It’s not an endlessly expanding list of rights — the ‘right’ to health care, the ‘right’ to food and housing. That’s not freedom, that’s dependency. Those aren’t rights, those are the rations of slavery — hay and a barn for human cattle.”

~ P.J. O’Rourke

Most of you have entered the final stage of your voluntary acceptance of mass slavery, and that slavery is fully dependent on the concept of fear, compliance to a false ‘authority,’ and total dependence on the very tyrant called government, whose plan is to control the world by controlling the common, ignorant, and apathetic collective crowd called ‘the people.’ The most vital component of this ‘Great Reset’ agenda, is for the majority to be dependent on the State, and that phenomenon is now close at hand. The final foundation of all restriction, control of financial and monetary transactions, and control of movement, will hinge on the farcical fraud called manmade ‘climate change.’ No worries however, because many other excuses, and aspects of control and manipulation will be used as well, but at this point, the ‘climate change’ hoax is the lynchpin of the future takeover plot.

The speed of this agenda has accelerated far past earlier time projections, and I believe this to be due to more exposure by the few who understand what is actually happening, to explain all the contradiction, lies, and propaganda, that have inundated society for the past few decades. At this point, the somewhat panicked ruling class and its pawns in government, have vastly escalated their terror campaign worldwide, in order to shut down dissent before it can gain too much ground. This campaign of terror is meant to drive the tool of fear to a much higher degree, so as to be able to accomplish takeover goals with less resistance. As mentioned earlier, the main focus of this increased intimidation is based on the fake ‘climate change’ model.

One obvious example of this fear campaign, is the purposely heightened threat of so-called weather anomalies, especially what are conspicuous (intentionally set) fires burning at ridiculously high temperatures, destroying particular properties, towns, cities, and valuable mineral-laden land holdings. These unnatural fire outbreaks began in earnest in early spring, and have continued incessantly since that time. What began in Canada, has now overtaken the Hawaiian island of Maui, among many other areas around the world, and the devastation is incredible. Only psychopaths could perpetrate such evil as this, but the coverup and blame on bogus ‘climate change,’ has been accepted by most of course, and promulgated by the ruling class, and every State-owned or controlled mainstream media outlet. The attack on all truthtellers claiming these horrendous fires to be intentionally set, was instant, without any legitimate evidence to the contrary to back their plotted refutations, and in fact, this universal response was certainly coordinated.

Now there is a fight to see who will take this land in Maui, and by take, I mean exactly that. It has been exposed that many are attempting to buy and gain contracts to build a new ‘smart city’ on this hallowed ground, and many big players are involved, including Blackrock.. Those claiming to help, people like  Jeff Bezos and Oprah Winfrey, are already heavily involved, and the governor of Hawaii, Josh Green, has taken control of this, and not to the benefit of those residents and business owners who lost everything. (As an aside, the houses and property of Bezos and Winfrey magically escaped the fire?) This evil governor, a true controlling politician, said, and before all bodies have been recovered, or any funerals for the dead have taken place, “I’m already thinking of ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into workforce housing, to put it back into families, or make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial to the people who were lost,” Democrat Gov. Josh Green said. What about all those who own that land the ‘State’ is going to force buy? (Steal)

But let us not stop here, as during this same year, there were unbelievable train derailments. most all of which involved very poisonous, and toxic materials, the most noted of course, being the purposely released (due to deliberate fire-setting) noxious chemicals in East Palestine, Ohio, that poisoned much of the northeast U.S. There were many more incidents of this nature as well.

As to extreme fear-mongering, weather ‘services’ nationwide, have intentionally changed all reporting in order to strike extreme fear in the collective herd called the ‘citizenry.’ Fantastic claims of record heat, which are bogus in most every case, are rampant. Instead of greens and darker muted colors to show heat, dark reds and purples just so happen to be the new norm across the entire country, and simultaneously; a coincidence certainly? In addition, the heat is not just hot, it is now “boiling” according to these weather idiots. These descriptions, while ludicrous and plotted, are purposely meant to cause undue alarm in an uninformed ‘public’ with little or no desire or effort to understand any truth.

All of these things, and an endless supply of other threats, including the threat of nuclear war, of financial collapse, of food shortages, of extreme inflation leading to extreme prices, to new ‘pandemic’ emergencies, to travel restrictions, lockdowns, monitoring of all transactions, and of total digitization of the economy in order to control all, are now constant. The end of cash is being pursued aggressively, and the replacement by central bank digital currency (CBDC) is looming in the near future. This agenda too, has recently accelerated greatly, indicating that the ruling element of society is attempting to expand its control mechanisms more quickly so as to avoid any pushback. Given what is happening in open view, the great increase of intentionally-structured disastrous events, the massive transfer of wealth and property, the government’s aggressive stance immediately following every manufactured ‘weather event’ or so-called ‘natural’ emergency, and the total disregard for life and personal property, how long will it be until this takeover plot becomes fully entrenched in reality?

All of these events are meant to make the average ‘citizen’ dependent on the State. The more dependency, the easier to control. When the bulk of society cannot or will not take care of themselves, will not be responsible for their own lives and freedom, will not fight back in their own defense, and voluntarily choose to acquiesce to authority and State relief instead of taking any personal responsibility, what will become of this country?

It will be very telling to watch this State terrorism that has been released on Maui, and how the people respond. Will they give up their homes and land that was destroyed by and due to evil forces, or will they demand to keep and hold their property? Will they disallow this totalitarian scum called a governor from his nefarious U.N. plans, and keep what is theirs? Or will they simply allow the State’s political class to do as they please with everything they have deliberately destroyed, and become wards (slaves) of the State?

Once mass dependence is in place, there will no longer be any chance of a free society. The State seeks to control all, and the way to accomplish that heinous mission, is to make the populace at large completely impotent, so that they have not the ability or drive to fight back. Total dependency is key to any takeover conspiracy by the ruling class and its State thugs, and many feigned threats and so-called emergencies will erupt on a regular basis going forward. This is without doubt in my opinion, so believe nothing, trust no State representative at any level, trust no mainstream media, and question everything!

Between the government which does evil and the people who accept it – there is a certain shameful solidarity.”

~ Author: Victor Hugo

Reference links:

A message to Maui … The truth may shock you!

Canada fires four times more toxic

California firestorms

Lahaina rebuild scheme

Additional government complicity in Lahaina fires

Hawaii governor wants to swoop in and buy up Lahaina

East Palestine, Ohio intentional chemical fire corruption

 

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: stevepb




Michael Tellinger With Reiner Fuellmich: ‘One Small Town’ vs the Globalist Agenda’s ’15-Minute Cities’ — On Creating a Life Outside the Enslaving Government Systems

Michael Tellinger With Reiner Fuellmich: ‘One Small Town’ vs the Globalist Agenda’s ’15-Minute Cities’ — On Creating a Life Outside the Enslaving Government Systems

 

TCTL editor’s note:

Below, you will find a conversation between international attorney (US & Germany) Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, attorney/economist Dexter Lejay Ryneveldt from South Africa, & Michael Tellinger (founder of Ubuntu and One Small Town intiatives) also from South Africa. Also in attendance is Emil Borg, the new One Small Town (OST) ambassador for Sweden.

As some of the readers here will know, the One Small Town (OST) initiative has gone through many challenging phases over the past 17 years, learning from failures and gaining wisdom through discussion and experience of many of its supporters. Many years of trial and error — blood, sweat and tears — have gone into the creation of this OST model.

Those of us who have lived long lives and have experienced the falling apart, again and again, of our work and our dreams, know what it takes to remain trusting and persistent in spite of the odds.

In this interview, Michael presents the basic details of what One Small Town (OST) initiative is, its history and its evolution from the Ubuntu Contributionism vision. He also discusses the new digital Infinity token and explains that it differs from cryptocurrency coins, and that they are keeping it separate from the current global financial system.

Reiner and Dexter asked some key questions during this interview and will be doing a follow-up interview with Michael after they have the chance to do additional research and look into the details of the OST initiative.

As Reiner said in the interview:

“The one thing that most people, when it comes to setting up your own self-sufficient systems, have been worried the most about is what do we do about the monetary system.”

As this conversation is of great importance to many of us, the follow-up interview will be posted here at TCTL when it is available.

Below the video is a basic description provided by ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee).  The video can be found at ICIC channels at Odysee and Rumble.

I have added show notes and a transcript to make review of this information easier. This is a lot of information for most of us to take in. You’ll likely have your own questions about this initiative.  Some may want to join the One Small Town initiative and/or offer support to this vision by purchasing Infinity tokens.

Following the transcript, you will find links to One Small Town and Michael Tellinger websites where you can do further research.

My thanks go to paying substack supporters and others who have made donations via the donation page at here at TCTL. You make this work and the maintenance of this website possible, providing access to thousands of readers around the world. 

~ Kathleen Stilwell, editor & curator, Truth Comes to Light

 



One Small Town vs. 15 Minute Prisons

by Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, ICIC
with Michael Tellinger, Dexter Lejay Ryneveldt & Emil Borg
August 14, 2023

 

In this episode of ICIC, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich talks with Michael Tellinger, a scientist, author, explorer, humanitarian founder of the ‘One Small Town‘ initiative, as well as Emil Borg, New National Ambassador for One Small Town Sweden, and Dexter Ryneveldt, lawyer and economist in South Africa: possible solutions to help free ourselves from the dependencies of the systems and live a dignified and free life.

Especially in the so-called Corona pandemic with its inhumane measures, it became abundantly clear that the prevailing governmental systems have nothing good in mind for humanity and that they have long been pursuing a subtle global agenda to install totalitarian mechanisms. This is to make humanity controllable and fully dependent on their system at their will.

These brutal procedures have made many people wake up rather uncomfortably, and question the authorities as well as the reality in which we live.

Michael Tellinger presents the idea of the “One Small Town Initiative” in detail.

He has been involved with its development since 2005 and has dedicated all his time, possessions and manpower to this project, as he is completely convinced of this possibility of living together without depending on and being abused by a governmental system.

He talks about the beginnings of the ‘One Small Town’ project, formed from the so-called Ubuntu movement and Contributionism, a system in which people contribute their skills and talents for the benefit of the community. In this way, everyone can benefit from each other’s skills.

It’s about realizing how much power and potential a small town of several thousand people has, where everyone co-operates with everyone else at all levels instead of competing.

If the mindset changes, there is an infinite abundance of opportunities to live with each other, from growing food, to starting businesses, to creating property and to participate in these same local small town businesses.

The basis of this project lies in returning ownership to those, away from global world corporations, and towards those who provide and work to create real value.

Why is this kind of free coexistence impossible within the framework of political systems?

How exactly does the underlying exchange of goods and services work from an economic perspective?

Is this method feasible, and how does one manage not to fight against the system, but to create one’s own independence within the legal framework?

Where do one-small-town companies already exist?

What explains their rapid growth worldwide and how can people become part of these projects?


Transcript & Show Notes prepared by TCTL editor:

00:00:42

Introduction

Reiner:

Dear friends, today we will try and talk about, not the problems, but the solution to those problems that we’ve been talking about for so long — for at least three years.

Some people have been talking about these problems for even longer — those who have realized that we’ve been lied to by those who we used to trust.

But today we have Michael Tellinger from South Africa. We have Emil Borg from Sweden. And we have my friend and colleague Dexter Ryneveldt from South Africa to discuss how we can get away from under the thumb of the system and have much better lives than we do under the system.

So thank you very much for making the time. It’s an honor, and it’s a pleasure, of course, Michael, to have you. And same with you, Emil. It’s always fun to talk to you.

So what do you do in South Africa? You have been working on these solutions for, not just for the last three years, but for much longer, right?

00:01:50

The Evolution of Ubuntu Contributionism & One Small Town Philosophy

Michael:

Yes, I have, Reiner. Thank you very much. It’s great to meet you and I’m very excited to have this conversation with you. Thanks to Emil for setting this up. And great to meet you, Dexter, out here in South Africa as well.

Yes, look, the One Small Town initiative has been around for a long time. Initially I started talking about this idea in 2005 already and slowly but surely it evolved.

We’ve walked the talk, we’ve paid the price, we’ve — it’s taken blood, sweat and tears. Everything I’ve had. Everything I have. Every cent I’ve ever earned has been poured into this. So it’s been my lifelong passion the last two decades at least. And here we are.

Something that started as a crazy idea that everybody laughed at me. They wanted to beat me up for even suggesting these kind of crazy ideas. And it was was really a thing about people. It needed to evolve and also grow into a time when the level of consciousness was a little bit higher around the world.

And I think this, especially the whole COVID plandemic and the lockdown that people felt attacks, they felt the abuse of governments, they felt — they realized how abusive governments can be and how they can completely and utterly overstep their boundaries.

That helped a lot of people wake up, and it really — during the lockdown is when the One Small Town movement really exploded.

So just a little bit more background. So the One Small Town movement grew out of what I started calling Contributionism and the Ubuntu movement out in 2007, 2006-2007.

So it all started with the Ubuntu movement, with the idea called Contributionism: a system in which people contribute their skills and talents towards the benefit of their community, so that everybody benefits from everybody’s skills and talents. And it’s slowly but surely evolved, gotten better and stronger over time.

We also had a period that we went through politics. We got involved in politics in South Africa. I registered the Ubuntu Party in 2010. We participated in three elections — 2012, 2014 and 2016.

So in essence, I ran for president in 2014 during the national elections as the leader of the Ubuntu Party.

And I must tell you, that’s when I truly discovered how crooked the political arena is and how the entire outcome of the elections is prepared. It is laid out for us. It is not elected, it is selected.

And that taught me really to use the One Small Town philosophy. We then participated in the 2016 elections in South Africa again, but just in the municipal elections under the One Small Town banner. By then we’re in transition from trying to promote the philosophy of Ubuntu because it was a bit vague. And it turned into the One Small Town philosophy where you take small towns and you turn them around by waking people up and showing them that if they cooperate and collaborate, they can achieve so much more.

In fact, any small town of several thousand people has infinite potential to create abundance for themselves.

The only thing that people have to do is change the way they think. And start to, instead of competing against each other, start to cooperate and collaborate on every level — starting with growing food, starting as many businesses as they can, and creating the ownership of the businesses in our small towns.

The ownership start needs to come back to the people away from the large corporations, away from the multinational retailers, away from the multinationals that control everything.

And that’s where I realized in 2016 that this is most likely not going to happen on the political arena. And then we exited the political arena in 2016 and One Small Town became a non-political and nonprofit community development program. But since then it’s just exploded.

Just to add a little bit more before I stop yapping, the Ubuntu Party, actually with the philosophy of unity within community and people cooperating, and the whole philosophy of Contributionism — which I must say really appeals to people and still appeals to people around the world in larger and larger numbers because it’s such a simple, beautiful philosophy of people contributing towards their own prosperity.

The philosophy of Contributionism turned into the Ubuntu Party in a number of countries, so we had the Ubuntu Party in Canada, in the UK, in Australia. And we almost launched in the USA and that didn’t happen. The Canadian Ubuntu Party fell apart because of inner conflict, and then after the 2016 elections it became very clear that going into politics is not a solution.

You cannot inject a seed of consciousness into the political beast and think that the political beast is going to change.

But the important thing here is that we walk the talk. I walk the talk and therefore I have the experience to talk about all these things where most other people do not have these experiences.

The Failure of Intentional Communities

We also engaged with intentional communities around the world, whether it’s Esalen or Damanhur and other — many, many other communities that I met the founders of such communities around the world, only to realize that all of these communities are a huge disaster and a huge failure on every possible level.

And that’s where it just gave more and more strength and credence to the One Small Town initiative, which is completely and utterly different from any other community upliftment project or an initiative. And this is why it is suddenly growing around the world at such a rapid rate.

And that’s my little introduction, just to familiarize people with who I am and where I come from and what we’ve done in the last 17 years.

00:08:12

Reiner:

I think it’s great that I’m finally meeting someone who really knows what they’re talking about, because I’ve been propagating, and most people on our side of the fence have been propagating, the disconnection, the shutting ourselves off of the system — because the system is not only thoroughly infiltrated and utterly corrupt, therefore you can’t fix it, but it is also not worth fixing. Because it’s based on the wrong virtues. In fact, there are no virtues except materialism. And it’s fighting each other. It’s competition in the worst sense imaginable.

So I can’t wait to hear more about this because we all know that we cannot trust the global corporations. We cannot trust the global NGOs because they’re all run by the same very few, very evil, people.

And we also know — because I’ve been into politics as well, for about, I don’t know, a year maybe. And then I got out because I was totally frustrated. I realized this is totally corrupt because you’re part of the system when you enter politics.

So there’s no other way than to reimagine ourselves as free, independent, sovereign people who can do whatever they want. And we should do it for our own benefit, and not even think about that old rotten system that is now definitely coming apart. This whole house of cards is collapsing.

00:09:47

A New Paradigm: Competition Within a Cooperative Spirit

Michael:

I think what you said there is absolutely 100%. I resonate with every word you say.

It’s also important for me to stress that the One Small Town initiative is not a system — we’re not fighting the system.

You know, like you said, this the system that we’re in is broken. It cannot be fixed, and it’s not worth fixing. Because, as you said, it’s built on the rotten foundation. Foundation of greed, control, competition — destructive competition.

So within the One Small Town initiative, we still have competition, but it’s competition within a cooperative spirit. And that’s a completely different thing.

You know, as long as you have competition within a cooperative spirit then you achieve things. And the achievements that you create actually benefit the community. And not become a detriment to the community because now… So I’ll go into more detail later.

So I just want to stress to everybody watching this that the One Small Town initiative, we’re creating a new reality. We’re creating a new paradigm, a new system that will slowly but surely make the current system obsolete.

So there’s no violence, no opposition, no conflict. We don’t have to fight anyone or anything or any government. We just build this up in our small towns in larger and larger numbers across the world.

All the small towns are connected to each other through our centralized blockchain, our centralized exchange mechanisms and sharing and so forth. I’ll go into more detail about this.

And this is how we slowly but surely take back the power to the people and especially into the small towns.

Hubs of Innovation, Creativity & Investment Opportunity

So the small towns not only become hubs of innovation, of excitement, of technology, of creation, of happiness and everything else we’ve always imagined for our families and our future. But also the small towns suddenly become the most exciting investment opportunities for the conscious investors of the world.

Because once the investors with the billionaires and the millionaires realize that the Small Towns is a safe and ongoing investment opportunity with unlimited potential for growth, watch the stampede.

I anticipate that once the first billionaire or millionaire joins us and invests into a number of the cornerstone businesses in a Small Town, and… by doing that, really, exposes the opportunity.

Watch the stampede of conscious investors around the world move away from the very, very scary and questionable investment opportunities on the stock markets and the normal kind of investment opportunities that are running dry very, very quickly.

And when people realize that by investing into a community where you go into a partnership with an entire community, you’ve literally created for yourself a safe haven for you and your family. The safest town that you can imagine, where everybody works together because the businesses that we start all belong to us.

The profits that we make belong to us. They don’t go offshore to some shareholders sitting in a boardroom somewhere else. And the technology and innovation that we create is used to help the community, and not help a few rich individuals on some board, in some foreign country, that are selling us electricity and withholding medicines and cures for disease from us. And that goes for the supply of food, obviously.

So with the One Small Town initiative, we have a very small, very simple plan of action, how to initiate it, how to start it.

Start it small and grow it as quickly as we can. And as people see this excitement and the joy in their fellow town folk, that creates the domino effect that becomes unstoppable.

00:13:56

Two Worlds That Cannot Be Rejoined

Reiner:

And one more thing. In that previous discussion I just had with that person who — a nice guy — who believes in this utopian dream of reviving the public television and radio stations. I told him I think this is utopia, but I wish you the best of luck.

For me, however, the reality looks like this. And this is based on another interview I had the day before, which deals with a scientist who is now deeply into spirituality.

And it resonates with what some of the people from the Maori who we speak with in terms of bringing justice to the world. In terms of what they call restoring the peace for the world, it resonates with their spirituality.

We already have a divided world. We have two worlds. And I think that they cannot be rejoined. It’s impossible. Because the other side of the fence, they’re either in cahoots, knowingly in cahoots, with those who are pulling the strings, or too stupid — stupidity out of cowardice because they don’t dare use their brains. Or too stupid to realize that they’re being used for evil purposes.

So if they want to join us, if they want to join your One Small Town initiative, fine. Of course we’ll welcome them, but we don’t really worry about them. I don’t.

I think we should, on our side of the fence, focus on what’s good for us because we’re the ones who are creative.

It’s not the large corporations. Guess why they’re buying up all these small and medium sized businesses: because they don’t have their own creativity.

So let’s keep that power for ourselves and make use of it for our own benefit.

What is your take? Go ahead, Michael.

00:15:52

“If It’s Not Good for Everyone, It’s No Good at All.”

Michael:

So, Reiner, I just say, you know, if you have any questions about One Small Town, please shoot them at me. Because I feel, I don’t want to just feel like I’m talking away here. So if you have any specific questions about how does this work, how does that work, please feel free to shoot them at me.

But I just want to outline a little bit for your viewers that might be new to this. Go to our website onesmalltown.org. Watch all the videos. And you’ll also realize that some of the videos go back, you know, one year, two years, five years, 10 years, 15 years. Some of the videos are very old. And you’ll see how we’ve evolved, how this thing has grown and matured into what it is today.

That’s why it is so strong. That’s why I can speak with such confidence and passion about how this thing works. How One Small Town has all the solutions that you can think of for all the problems. And the solutions already built into the One Small Town model.

Not because I’m smart, but because the solutions have evolved over the years from the One Small Town model and just presented themselves.

Because if it’s not good for everyone, it’s no good at all. That’s one of our slogans.

And one of the other important slogans that’s really important for people to try and digest here is that we’re not fighting the system.

We’re not opposing anyone. We are using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation. This is really important.

And this is why most, not most, every other sort of intentional community initiative that has been attempted around the world — even the great Osho out in California, in Oregon, was it? Which could have been an incredible solution, but the ego got in the way.

And every other intentional community that has started has been a failure. And we can say that because if it was a success we’d be using it. We’d be doing it and we’re not.

So One Small Town comes and brings together all the lessons we’ve learned from all the failed experiments and presents a very simple transitional phase for people that are sick and tired, people that resonate with what we are talking about here, people that know there’s a better way, there’s a better life.

That we can live in a utopian world. That Utopia is a good word. It’s not a bad word. It’s been made a bad word by the negative people in the world, right?

So yes, we’re striving and we’re creating a utopian world for ourselves. And this is a step-by-step introduction of how to get from here to there. And it does not have to take a long time.

But in the process of going from here to there, we have to realize that the reason why the corporations are so successful and have such a strong stranglehold on all of humanity is because of their systems, their structures and their control mechanisms.

So what we are doing, we’re using the same kind of systems and structures and control mechanisms so that we can create success.

But these structure systems and control mechanisms are controlled and managed by the people of the community. They are the owners of these systems.

It just helps them to navigate the treacherous seas and oceans of corruption, and theft and deceit, and so forth so that it provides our blockchain and our online platform.

One Small Town (OST) Token & Blockchain Platform — An Alternative Exchange System

The One Small Town platform and blockchain provides a secure environment for investors to know — if they invest into a brewery or growing food or medicinal plants or whatever else it is — that they’re investing into our small town.

They can follow their investment. They know exactly how the money is being used, that it’s going where it’s intended to go.

That all the members from our community — that are 60% or 90% shareholders in some cases of all the businesses — that they see, exactly how much profit we’ve made in each and every business and how many dividends are going to be distributed every month to all our members.

Everything is completely transparent in every town and every One Small Town initiative and community. And this is why we have to put these structures into place.

This, however, has caused a little concern with some of the slightly more “spiritual” — and I use the word with love — some more sort of hippie-minded members, right.

They go ‘Wow, you guys are behaving just like the corporates now. You know, like, wow, man, I really don’t like the way you’re doing this. You’re just acting just like the corporates.’

And the answer is yes, we are. For your own safety. Because if we don’t do this, everyone’s gonna rip you off, dude. And everyone’s gonna run away with all your hard work and you’re gonna have nothing to show for it.

And this is why all the hippie colonies of the past, and all the intentional communities of the past have failed, for this very simple reason.

And to just to add one final thing before I hand over to you: to do this, we’ve created what our what we call the One Small Town platform and blockchain. And that then also, about just more than a year ago, spawned out of the blue, the most exciting opportunity that we realized — is that because we have this as a membership. One Small Town has a voluntary membership that people join for free. You don’t have to pay an entrance membership fee or nothing. You just join for free. Go online, sign up as a member. You instantly become a member and you open your digital wallet.

On the Infinity Token & Contribution of Three Hours a Week

So what we’ve created is an Infinity token. Which is really the token. (Excuse my noisy Rife machine right here that’s just finished treating my feet.)

So what we’ve suddenly had an epiphany is that, instead of using —

Before I go there, I need to say that the only thing that One Small Town members have to do is that, when when you become a member, you’ve pledged to contribute three hours a week towards your businesses, towards your community. Three hours a week. It’s all it takes, right?

People that know what I’m talking about will understand. That turns our community into an incredibly powerful labor force. If you have a town of 10,000 people, suddenly you have 30,000 hours of free labor a week. Because we contribute our time voluntarily towards our own businesses, towards fixing our town.

Now, the difference between our 30,000 hours of labor a week and a large corporation. You know how much a large corporation would pay for 30,000 hours of labor. It’s very simple to do the calculation. That’s what they can’t afford. And yet we can afford it, and we do it with love and willingly for free.

And this is why a small town of 10,000 people, that every member just contributes three hours a week, suddenly becomes a fierce competitor to any global-multinational corporation.

Immediately and instantly. We can grow anything, build anything, manufacture anything, distribute anything. Because we choose to do it together, and we are the owners of these businesses. It’s a very powerful position to be in.

And to manage all of this, we’ve had to create the system that is foolproof and cannot be cheated, etc.

So in the process we had to find a way of — how do we know when somebody arrives to do their three hours in one of our businesses or, you know or cutting the grass in the park or helping the orphans, or delivering food to the elderly, or whatever it is that we do (we’re gonna do all kinds of things in our community).

And that certainly presented us with an incredible opportunity. Instead of just using a punch card system — you know the old punch card system that you clock into your job and clock out — suddenly we use technology with QR code readers. And we created what is known as the Infinity Token, which is a membership-asset-backed-NFT token which is created every time one of our members contributes three hours towards one of our businesses or community.

So suddenly we’re now also sitting with the fact that all our members, the moment they contribute their 3-hours a week, over and above the dividends that we distribute to ourselves from the profits of our businesses, and the food and everything that we grow, that we distribute to ourselves every month.

We also reward ourselves with our own Infinity tokens that are growing in value at a rapid rate, because it’s the only truly asset-backed-NFT community token that’s backed by true and real human sweat equity.

And the more members we have around the world contributing three hours a week towards their businesses, the more the value of the Infinity token grows.

And to finish this little ranting monologue is — to utilize these Infinity tokens, we’ve created what we call the One Small Town digital wallet that every member instantly gets in your account. When you open your account online, you get your digital wallet and you start collecting your Infinity tokens every time you contributes three hours towards the One Small Town initiative.

And you can send those tokens from your digital wallet instantly for free to any other member around the world. As long as they’re member, you can send it to them via their e-mail (boom) and I send it from me to your digital wallet instantly, outside of any banking system, outside of anybody’s prying eyes. And you and I can exchange anything we want by exchanging these tokens.

So we’ve created an alternative currency system, if you can call it. An alternative exchange system. It exists. It’s real and everyone, everywhere in the world can use it right now.

00:25:57

Dexter Ryneveldt Questions the Financial Reality & Implications

Dexter:

I’m actually very, very impressed what you have said in the synopsis that you have given, Michael, as to what is the basis for you guys working and working towards, like you say, Utopia, the One Small Town initiative.

One of the things that I just want to find out from you. I know here in South Africa, one of the big things within the communities we are talking about, and you have mentioned cooperative units.

So what I want to find out from you, and in particular when it comes to the financial implications and things.

I want to find out, when we talk about cooperative units, organizations that are the One Small Town initiative is actually driving.

Is it actually registered with the South African Reserve Bank or are you actually trying to keep it not connected to any system here in South Africa?

00:27:01

The Financial Organization of OST – 17 Years in the Making

Michael:

Yeah, no, it is a completely independent system. The One Small Town company is registered as a nonprofit company.

The way we operate right now is that every One Small Town initiative is actually registered as a pool under the One Small Town nonprofit company. So they operate as a pool. So they’re also then seen as a nonprofit company.

Remember that we’re not providing work. We’re not creating work, so we don’t fall under the labour law. Because everybody that contributes their three hours a week is a co-owner of the business.

So they’re just working in their own business. So it’s not a job.

So we’ve eliminated all these potential problems with government and labour and any of that.

So yeah, this is why it’s taken 17 years to get to this point. It didn’t happen overnight. Slowly but surely, we found the problems and the solutions were presented to us.

One Small Town Trading Platform About to Go Live

And now with the Infinity tokens, that has opened up a door, not only to reward ourselves with our own Infinity tokens and be able to exchange them amongst ourselves. And also sell them and trade them on our One Small Town trading platform, which is about about to go live probably about four weeks from now.

And again, this is a private trading platform. This is not trading on on any open cryptocurrency markets or any of that. You have to be a member of One Small Town.

In other words, the Infinity token cannot be crashed. It cannot devalue. No one can steal your tokens. You can’t lose them because it’s an NFT that can be traced.

And so it’s a very, very different system from any other cryptocurrency or NFT scenario. We operate in a way that we don’t fight the system. If they’re taxes to be paid, we’ll pay the taxes.

You know, so we don’t want to create any ripples. We don’t want to resist or fight anyone. We use the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation.

And one of those tools of liberation is finding the smartest tax advisers there are, so that we as a community, that very soon could be turning over millions and maybe billions of dollars or rands or euros per town —

(Please, remind me to come back to this where I can make such an outrageous statement.)

If we’re turning over billions of euros in our little town, we’re going to find the best bloody tax adviser.

Just like Bill Gates and these rich bastards. They pay zero tax because they have very smart people doing their tax for them.

00:29:43

Dexter:

So if I understand you correctly, when we talk about — when you talk about the Infinity token, the Infinity Token is basically based on each and every individual member of the One Small Town initiative, where they give three hours of their time, and there is then an investment. And then from that investment, that creates the value. And from that value, that can be an exchange globally.

That’s basically the foundation of this Infinity token.

00:30:17

On the Challenges Faced by OST Organizing Resources & Finances

Michael:

It is a foundation. And more and more people are getting excited about it.

It’s taken a little while for the crypto heads and the, you know, those kind of people that are so stuck in Bitcoin mind. It’s just, it’s sickening. But they’re starting to realize how faulty and how insane that world is. And how sane and safe our world is.

And that penny is starting to drop for people to say, wow, hold on, this is a far more safer environment. I invest in this. I contribute in this. And I’m gonna talk to you more about our additional investment tokens we’re about to launch related to the businesses and the profits of the businesses.

So this is an infinite potential for growth on every level you can image. And it’s a safe environment, completely safe.

Blockchain. Membership protected. Investor protected. Members protected. Everyone is protected. No one can ever run away with you. No one can collapse it. No one can collapse your investment. The stock markets can’t collapse it.

It is bulletproof, right? So it’s controlled by the people and the members.

Right now we can determine the value of the Infinity token. That’s how we actually launched the Infinity token. We launched it at $1.00.

Based on the value — the launch value was actually $40 and the reason we can say that is because the average three hours of labour — If you had to work in the United States or Europe or — and some of the Western countries — where you looked at all the different possible scenarios. So for a three-hour shift you would earn on average $40, U.S. dollars. For a three hour shift.

So that is in real life, real terms, the true value of the Infinity Token. It’s $40. Right? And we launched it at $1.00.

So at this stage, it is grossly undervalued. So anyone that buys the Infinity Token now is buying it at an incredibly discounted rate because it’s going up and up and up towards $40. Whether the people like it or not, that’s what the true value of it is.

And then it’ll just go higher and higher. And the reason it’s gonna go higher and higher is that because — there’s an algorithm. We created an algorithm. Our programmers created an algorithm to determine the value of the token.

So it’s not just me sitting here deciding what the value is. The algorithm is linked to the issuing of the tokens. And basically every time one of our members — every time a member joins and every time members contribute their three hours, the blockchain picks up on it and it increases the value of the token by my minute little fraction.

So if we have a few hundred members working and contributing, it goes up slowly. If we have a few thousand members, it goes up faster. Once we have a dozen thousand or 100,000 members, watch the value of the Infinity token go higher and higher. Very, very quickly and steadily.

And then finally the other true value of the token, which is really playing games with people’s minds is this one:

So imagine you now live in a small town situation where we’ve created really abundance and utopia for ourselves. We’re growing vast amounts of food. We’re keeping a portion of the food for ourselves. The rest of the food we sell, to export internationally. We bring the dividends back. We distribute our dividends.

We build laptops and fridges and bicycles and nail clippers. And bread and milk and cheese. And I mean everything you can imagine. Because that’s what we do, we choose to do it. It’s our decision. Right?

And now the more we grow and build and create, the more we’re gonna have every week and every month.

Where do we put it? We have to put it somewhere, right? So this suddenly gave birth to the One Small Town superstore, like a Walmart. So suddenly we open a superstore that belongs to the people, the community.

But because everything we put in there, we have manufactured, we have grown, and made the bread and milk and bicycles and laptops, whatever. Whatever goes into the One Small Town superstore is made by us. That means we can sell it for a much cheaper price than Walmart or anybody else.

You see the interesting situation that’s developing here. Right? So even the greedy, multinational retailers are gonna not be able to compete with our own retail store — that makes all our products and food available to everyone that wants to buy.

They come in there and they buy in fiat currency. They don’t buy it in tokens. They pay dollars or pounds or whatever. And this is where we get fiat currency and cash to still manage and meet the needs in a in a system.

So we are not jumping out of the system. We are still using, you know, profits in cash and euros and everything to help distribute to the people, so they can still live in this crazy world we find ourselves in.

But slowly, but surely, we’ll transition into a whole new world in which that money is no longer needed.

But, this is how it works. So the benefits to members of One Small Town, there are three benefits.

First one, you get tokens. Every time you can do about 3 hours, you get a token in your digital wallet. You can contribute up to three hours a day. So in one month you can earn 31 tokens. The maximum you can earn in a month — 31 tokens a month.

Or, minimum, to get your benefits, one token per week, right? So one three-hour shift a week. That’s a minimum you have to contribute to get the labor, the free labor force, that we know we can allocate people towards a number of businesses. So we know we’ve got the labor force to perform certain tasks.

And the second benefit we give to ourselves from the One Small Town is all the profits from all the businesses are pooled collectively and distributed evenly to all the members.

So you don’t have to work — Just because you worked in the bakery and you didn’t work in the in the stables doesn’t mean that you’re not going to get benefit from the stables. You get benefit from everything because you’ve contributed towards your businesses in your community.

So you’ve pooled — The One Small Town initiative is a is not a bartering trade, a one-to-one exchange. It is a one-to-many exchange. 

I contribute towards the well-being of my community. So does everybody else. And therefore we share in everything that we create. And we distribute it evenly to all of us. That’s why it’s called contributionism.

So I benefit from everybody’s input and they benefit from my input and that’s why it’s such a perfect leveling of the playing fields.

So even if you’re a surgeon and your doing brain surgery for three hours, you’re still going to get one token. And if I’m cutting the the lawn or draining the sewage pipes in the hospital, I get the same token that you get as a surgeon, because if the sewage pipes aren’t cleaned, you ain’t doing any surgery. Right?

So this is the absolute leveling of the playing field. Everybody’s treated equally and their contribution is valued equally. And that’s what most people truly appreciate because now they feel appreciated for who they are and what they do, not diminished because they’re doing some measly work.

But the third thing — the benefits that we get — is at the end of each month —

So it’s the tokens, the dividends, the distribution of the profits and then the basket of goods. Every month at the end of the month, you go to the One Small Town superstore. And all the food that we’ve created, we keep keep a portion of everything that we do. Whether its laptops, we make a limited number of laptops to distribute to our members. The rest is sold. If it’s bread or cheese or milk or corn flour or whatever.

So you go to the One Small Town superstore. You put in your membership card. And it prints out a ticket and says this month you get a bag of this, you get a bicycle, you get nail clippers, you get a helmet or whatever it is that we created.

So you go there and get your basket of goods for free. The only thing you have to sacrifice is one Infinity token. That’s to show that you received your basket of goods.

Alright, now obviously every month we’re going to distribute food. Food is number one. So you’re always going to have food distributed to all our people. So they never, ever go hungry.

And there’ll be building materials. There’ll be bricks and cement and God knows what. Windows and doors and, you know. Who knows what we’re going to be manufacturing. It could be a car.

So what is the value of that one Infinity token that you’ve had to sacrifice to get your basket of goods?

The value of that token is the total value of the basket of goods that you just received. And the people will know this. My God, for one token he got all the stuff that doesn’t add to the value of the token on the algorithm. But in the minds of the people, the people know that that’s what the value of the token is.

So just to understand, we didn’t include the value of the basket of goods into the algorithm of the value of the token, because the moment we do that we breach the Securities and Exchange Act. So suddenly we’re dealing in Securities and Exchange and we can’t do that.

So I’m just telling you how complex this has been and how many different things we’ve had to think about not to break the law. And yet give the people as many benefits as they possibly can get. And make the Infinity token very, very lucrative around the world.

00:39:58

Reiner:

Emil, go ahead. You’ve been silent.


Emil:

Sometimes you should talk and sometimes you should just be quiet. And I think this is a time to be quiet, to be perfectly honest.

My role in this is to be Michael’s disciple in Sweden. I’m trying to, not trying, going to start One Small Town in Sweden. And I’m the ambassador for Sweden. That’s my role in this. I’m going to be on the ground, and, yeah, make sure that we get it all the way through. Make it happen.

OST Not Dependent on the System — Inside the System But Disconnected From It

Reiner:

So what I gather from this, Michael, is that the One Small Town idea can exist inside the system but disconnected from it. It has some connections, but it isn’t dependent on the system.

You’re totally self-sufficient if I understand you correctly. But you’re still complying with the rules and regulations of that, I believe, collapsing system so that through this transition period you can already build these One Small Towns.

And when the time comes and the system collapses, which it sure will, then you can do your own thing completely without being bound by any rules and regulations outside of the One Small Town ideas, right?

00:41:34

Changing the Way People Think: 

Michael:

Yeah, that’s exactly it. And that’s how we call it One Small Town and not one small settlement. Because, you know, when people think that we’re, you know, we’re going out buying a piece of land and building houses. No, no, no, no, no. That’s a failed system. That doesn’t work.

There are very exclusive potential situations in which it can work, but it’s a huge nightmare.

Why should we start from scratch? We have hundreds of thousands of small towns and villages around the world. We don’t have to build anything from scratch.

Towns exist. They have everything. All the infrastructure. They have halls and factories and streets and sewage and electricity and farms and everything we need.

All we need to do is change the way the people think. And realize that if we just cooperate and collaborate, anything becomes possible. So I want to come back to the potential of the small towns.

If you look at any international corporation. The average annual turnover of a company that has 4,000 or more employees is $1 billion or more per annum.

Just let that sink in. I’d like your viewers to think about what I’m saying here.

So if you have an international company of 4,000 employees that work in a 9-to-5, with all the expenses that come with them and the offices, and all the crap and the corporate stuff, and et cetera. All the labor costs. Four thousand employees. Your average minimum turnover is $1 billion or more. Some of the companies I looked at it doing $16-$20 billion turnover per annum with four or five thousand employees.

Can you imagine what we can achieve with 10,000 members in a One Small Town situation where each one of our members contributes three hours a week? And some of them three hours a day.

Because now they’re not just employees at a company wasting time, wasting company resources. Taking this home. Taking that home, you know. Suddenly we have members of the community that are co-owners of that business, that are shareholders in that business, that depend on the profit of that business. That take that business and approach it very, very differently.

So when they go and contribute their three hours towards that business, they do it with a very different mindset.

One Small Town Businesses as Investment Opportunities

Suddenly, as an investor, if I invest into a business in a small town, I — the investor, by the way, can never own more than 30% of the business. That’s the maximum that we allow.

So the business plans are set up so that investors invest the funding capital and they retain 30% of the business. The 60% belongs to the community because the community does the work, the labor. And 10% is retained for the One Small Town management locally, nationally and internationally. Because, you know, that’s how we’re going to be able to have funds to keep running the different One Small Town offices.

There is no money coming into those offices other than the success of the businesses created by the small town businesses. So it’s the bottom up, not top down.

Well, it’s again an example how the people, the people power, create the success on every level.

So as an investor from outside, my investment, I go into partnership with an entire community. That means every member of that community is my partner. And wants my business to succeed as much as they want it to succeed, or as much as I want it to succeed, because they have a vested interest in the profits.

So this is a game changer on every possible level.

The other big thing that we’ve done, that we’re about to do, is to start issuing investor tokens, and this is a way to allow communities themselves to crowd fund their own businesses.

So every business plan — so this is how it works:

We get together. You launch One Small Town in your community. You become the ambassador. You start signing up members and every member that you sign up pushes the value of the Infinity token a little bit more. You start doing this.

You have a creative think tank with your members. What kind of businesses can we start? What kind of businesses can we start with very little money, if any? What kind of businesses can we do business plans for that we need, you know, maybe $10,000, $50,000, $100,000? And what kind of businesses cost us $5 million or $10 million? And what kind of businesses do we think we can start when it cost us $100 million or more? And start developing these business plans because we gotta think big.

How much food can we grow? How much land is available?

We have different models to go into partnerships with farmers and land owners and traditional leaders in the Americas and countries where you have traditional leaders that own vast amounts of land.

Where very lucrative and exciting partnerships for the land owners, for farmers, even municipalities and governments if they’re not using the land.

So we start coming up with ideas for the businesses. And then we start writing business plans for those businesses. Those business plans get loaded onto the One Small Town platform and they get connected to a project management system that gets connected to an accounting system. Just so that it’s online and all your accountants can use it. Plus it’s all free of charge. There’s no cost to any other One Small Town members.

And then the project management system is connected to the accounting system. And the accounting system then allocates the investment funds to that specific business on a monthly drawdown based on what the business plan requires.

So it is a completely transparent situation that everyone can see what’s going on. No one can steal the money and run away with it.

And to come back to the investment thing. (So, Emil, if you want to say anything, just raise your hand and I’ll let you chip in.)

But the key thing here is that every business plan will need the investment amount. So we want to allow our communities, or give the opportunity to the people in our communities, to become shareholders in their own businesses first. And not some outside rich people that always own the businesses in your town.

So every business that we start that lands up on the platform, we issue a token. If it’s, say, a dairy — we’re starting a dairy. So we issue 1,000,000 dairy tokens for the town of Nora.

Let’s use our example town in Sweden. We decide we’re gonna start a One Small Town dairy and we need to raise $2,000,000 to start that business. And run for two years until we become profitable.

We need to raise $2,000,000. So we issue 1,000,000 Nora dairy tokens at $2.00 each to raise $2,000,000.

So we’re never gonna release more or less than 1,000,000 tokens for any business, right? And the million tokens will then have a value based on how much we need to raise. So we’re going to issue 1,000,000 tokens at $2.00 each to fund the Nora dairy. And then we open that up to all our members in Nora to buy those tokens. So they become shareholders in that business. That funding is 30% of that business.

So I literally am buying a piece of 30% by the number of tokens that I’ve bought. And those tokens — now you’re benefiting in two ways. Now you earn a token and you’re getting annual dividends, profits, from that dairy. So you got two benefits here.

You’re not just a shareholder, you’re also a token holder. And that token might become a lot more valuable than the dividends from that dairy at some point in the future.

So you see what we’re doing here? We’re really, really using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation on every possible level.

This is just explaining how we are about to fund some of the exciting new businesses. If we can’t raise the $2,000,000 for the dairy, then we open it up to the country. And hopefully we’ll raise it from the people in the rest of the country. If we can’t raise it there, then we open it up to the world. And this way we try and retain the investment from the people of the community first. Then the country. And then the rest of the world. To keep the money local.

So it’s not just ‘buy local’. Like a lot of towns and communities are going ‘buy local’, ‘buy local’. We’re doing a lot more than that.

We invest local, manufacture local, grow local, buy local, export local and bring in the profits into our community to benefit us locally.

00:50:49

How Will OST Protect Itself from Mr. Global?: “The system is rigged to always destroy humanity.”

Reiner:

You know, Dexter is not just a lawyer, he’s an economist too. So he’ll ask the questions that concern the economics or the money, the monetary system.

I have one question in particular.

It is almost certain that the other side — Mr. Global, that world which is about to collapse, but it’s still there — that they’re going to try and do everything in their power to stop this from evolving. Infiltrate. Invent all kinds of legal or whatever rules.

How are you going to protect yourselves against that?

Michael:

Yeah, it’s a very important question. And this is why I made it very clear right up front — is that we don’t fight the system. Because the moment we start fighting the system, we’re gonna lose.

People need to understand this. You cannot beat the system. The system is rigged to always destroy humanity, so we can’t fight them.

So we are playing by their rules. We’re using their tools. We’re using their money. We’re using the banks. We’re using the legal systems, using everything that they’ve created to enslave us. But we’re using that to now benefit us and help us.

That’s why I call it — We’re using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation.

And in every small town —

I jumped — I actually digressed a little bit earlier when I spoke about what is the potential of the profits being made in a small town.

So right now our objective is that any town of 10,000 people or more should be turning over — through the businesses that they start — should be turning over $1 billion, a minimum $1 billion per annum.

If you’re not doing that, then you’re doing something wrong.

It’s not going to happen overnight, but that’s our goal. That’s our objective. That’s where we’re heading.

And you know, money talks, bullshit walks. Unfortunately, that’s the world we live in.

And the stronger our communities become financially, the more difficult it is to knock them over or to undermine them. So every One Small Town community needs to become as financially strong as quickly as possible. Because then it’s very difficult to infiltrate, to overturn, to undermine, because that financial strength in fiat currency becomes the strength of that community — to stand united and protect that wealth that they’ve created for themselves while they’ve got this whole other wealth behind them.

There’s infinite supply of food and technology. And I’m not even going to talk about the other technology, but just to let you know that we have all the technology you can imagine that will be implemented in these small towns.

I’ll let your imagination run wild. I’m not even going to mention the technology, because that gets dangerous.

Reiner:

Well, I would think, Michael, that as I am absolutely convinced that all the creative people with all the intuition, and all that what makes us human, are on our side of the fence, they will be attracted to this.

And therefore there will be competition between the One Small Town concept and the other side. But they can’t win.

I mean, they’re collapsing anyhow. But if this kind of a competition sets in, there’s no one there to support their ideas and their systems because they don’t have any ideas. All the people with the ideas are going to be on our side of the fence.

So it does look very, very promising.

I’ll have to look into this in much more detail, of course, and I will, but that’s exactly what we’ve been talking about for at least three years.

You’ve been dealing with this for much longer. But many people who have only woken up through this wake-up call — which corona is, as far as I’m concerned — they will, all of them, have understood that the system will not survive.

And we have to get out from under it, so to speak, and we have to create our own. And this sounds extremely promising.

What do you think, Dexter, as an economist?

00:55:07

On the Importance of Decentralization & Safeguards Against Future Centralization

Dexter:

I completely agree with you, Reiner. One of the words that basically comes to mind is decentralization.

Based on what you have said, Michael, I want to find out how are you going to ensure that your initiative is not gonna get to a point where everything is centralized.

Because that’s one of the biggest obstacles that humanity is actually faced with, especially when one has regard to huge, big corporate companies. Their main goal, and that’s basically for the elite, is to say we have to centralize because when we centralized we can then control.

So from what you’ve said, you confirmed that power, authority, sovereignty is basically given back to the people.

So then the big question is how are you going to ensure at all times that there is not going to be a point where one will actually have to deal with a centralization issue itself?

00:56:16

Michael:

A very important question, Dexter. And this is why it’s taken so long to develop the system and learn from our experiences and answer questions like this.

You know, I have — since 2005 I have done lectures in more than 35 countries, probably in more than 500 cities of the world.

I’ve done evening lectures, one-day workshops, weekend workshops and week-long workshops on the One Small Town. And so you can imagine how many questions I’ve faced over the years.

And I can tell you there has never, ever, ever been a time that, within the group of people participating in the One Small Town workshop, that we did not solve the problem that was brought up by the people in that meeting, in that workshop.

So this is the most exciting thing that I can share with you. So think about this.

Decentralization is really — this is the foundation of One Small Town, where every community is its own master. But we’ve created the platform and the blockchain through which all these communities are interconnected. That if that community in Cape Town suddenly needs — they realize that we haven’t grown enough apples for next season, then the system is used to put up there ‘we’re going to be short 200,000 apples’. And some other One Small Town up in Caribou or whatever is gonna say, ‘hey, we’ve created too many apples’. And they put it up there. So it becomes an exchange mechanism between the small towns.

And that exchange mechanism becomes free because this is part of the ethos of the One Small Town initiative.

Not only that, but one of the most exciting and attractive attributes of this, or benefits, is that if you’re a member of One Small Town in Germany, right, and you decide you want to come visit your cousin in Cape Town or outside of Cape Town somewhere for a few months, you arrive there and you go to the town and it happens to be a One Small Town. So you arrive at the One Small Town office. You give them your membership card. They scan it and they know exactly what you have contributed and what value you have presented to your small town in Germany, where your skills and abilities are. If you’re a master carpenter that you are training others, you know young students, to become carpenters, or you’re a master cake maker or an engineer or whatever.

They know exactly who you are and what you can contribute to their small town outside of Cape Town. And they say, ‘hi, welcome, Michael. Welcome to our town’. And they log you on to the system as a member of that specific town, and immediately, based on your experience, the blockchain then allocates you to where you are most needed with your special skills, abilities and talents.

And you start that week. You get a message on your phone, saying please, you know, report here for three hours. Or you can then tell them I’d love to teach art. Or I’d love to teach this. And then they’ll log you in as a teacher that’s going to be teaching this. And for that you get your tokens. And at the end of the month you go to the One Small Town superstore, get your food and everything else that you get in your basket and you get a portion of all the profits, dividends, from all the businesses — profits that we’ve created in our businesses.

So you can literally move to another town anywhere in the world slot into that community and be able to not just survive, but live very, very well, have everything you need and be respected and honored within that community from the moment you arrive because the people know what you’re contributing to their community.

So it is a completely decentralized system. No one can ever centralize this. It’s impossible.

01:00:11

On the Threat of Track & Trace Technology

Reiner:

What about the dangers of tracking and tracing with this system?

Michael:

Well, that’s a very important question. And those dangers will always be there.

And my answer to questions like this is, the same technology that is used to track and trace people is available to neutralize the tracking and tracing technology.

And we know those kind of people. We have the people that can cure disease. We have the people that know how to generate electricity.

They are many. They are all on our side.

They all participating in larger and larger numbers, but that’ll come out of the woodwork as this thing progresses.

And that includes telecommunication. It includes, you know, frequencies. It includes broadcasting. It includes everything.

The same people that work for these big telecommunication companies are just ordinary people that may have started out in a small town somewhere. And they are thousands and thousands and thousands of very smart people that do not like the system.

And the moment they have an opportunity to do something good for a small community that they want to be part of, guess what they’re going to choose.

Dexter:

Then I want to find out, Michael, when it comes to the value of the Infinity token, I’ve heard you actually say it can actually be pegged to the dollar. And we know — it’s common knowledge — the dollar, when we talk about the dollar, we talk about the fiat currency.

And I think that’s one of the major concerns for humanity as well.

Is it going to be possible at some point that your Infinity token can actually be pegged to any mineral commodity like gold, silver, diamonds, etc.?

Michael:

Yes, it is. The only reason we pegged it to the dollar is just to give people the perception of the value.

The token is infinitely powerful because somebody just worked for three hours. So, you know, how much value is somebody’s three hours worth? And imagine a million people around the world working three hours a week?

Imagine 20 million or 100 million people working three hours a week. By the time we get to that level, the value of the token becomes irrelevant really, quite frankly.

You see, so what we’re doing is transitioning from this system, the current system, into a new system. And with that transitioning, using the current banking systems and the ratios and rationale that people can relate to.

But as it grows and gets bigger and bigger, people pay less and less attention to the value of the token, because they’ll be exchanging the token between themselves.

Out of sight. Out of mind. No one can interfere with how many tokens I send you. It’s free. It’s instant.

I send it from my wallet to your wallet. You can give me your house. You can sell me your house. I’ll send you 1,000 tokens and you transfer the house to my name, you know. So people will be doing all kinds of trades.

But for me, the most important part is for the people at the lowest level, the people that have nothing. And you know, South Africa. This is a very important part for South Africa.

So my heart always looks at how do we handle third world situations or impoverished countries where people have nothing. They don’t have jobs. Most of our towns have 60-70-80% unemployment.

You know, the people in Europe can’t imagine that kind of situation. So it’s a very different situation.

So we start looking at community kitchens. Something as simple as a finding a hall where a church has already got a kitchen. The church becomes a member of the One Small Town community. Now when they cook food for the people, they’re actually getting an Infinity token. They’re a member of One Small Town.

When we start making dividends from our businesses, each one of those church members starts to receive dividends and Infinity tokens and everything else.

So it brings the community together. The food community kitchen becomes the heart of the community. Where those that have nothing — they wake up in the morning with nothing — they at least now have somewhere to go.

They can join and go and clean the streets. Or help in this business or that business. And at the end of a three hour shift they get their token and they go to the community kitchen and get a nice plate of food.

So that’s a life changer for people in those kind of situations. You know, first world countries don’t understand that.

We understand that very, very clearly here. And in Brazil and India and other countries like that, you know.

So I’m very, very passionate about those kind of things — that foundational, beautiful structure that really helps the people on the ground in the One Small Town initiative.

Dexter:

Can you mentioned just a few examples here in South Africa, whose got the Small Town initiatives, Michael?

Michael:

Yes. So we started out in Kuruman. And we got very excited in Kuruman, because we had the mayor there that really liked the idea. And we all believe that it was gonna work because the mayor and the council is going to help promote it to the people and so forth.

Well, you know, unfortunately — and I don’t want to speak ill of the mayor or anyone there, because there are some wonderful people there, and they truly — their heart was in it.

Unfortunately the political system prevented it from happening. You know, meeting after meeting, council meeting after council meeting, resolution after resolution. And six months later, nothing is happening. And that was our baptism by fire — to learn that we cannot work with councils. We cannot work with politicians. We cannot work with mayors.

And there was just a reminder of why I got out of politics, why the Ubuntu movement and the One Small Town initiative got out of politics.

This was just a quick reminder.

So now we have a number of small towns that are brewing, that are buzzing. But ambassadors are still learning. And they’re trying to figure out how to how to get this off the ground. And this is brand new.

Remember, we’re building this from the ground up. You know this isn’t — we’re creating something that’s never been done before. So some some ambassadors are really a lot more active. Or they see it clearly or they have more experience.

So in Barrydale, Western Cape, that’s our newest One Small Town. And I expect that’s going to be the town that’s really going to rock and roll, and show and lead by example.

We’re doing so many exciting things in Barrydale already. And our ambassador there, Graham Abbott, is just an incredible guy — an incredibly talented and very, very experienced entrepreneur, self-driven guy.

And these are the kind of ambassadors that we need — people that are self driven, that have got diverse experience and all kinds of businesses and activities. How do you start things up? How to find solutions for problems that seem insurmountable? These are the kind of people we need as ambassadors because they’re the guys are going to start — the guys and gals — they’re going to start this thing up right.

Reiner:

I think that’s what it really — it is not always the leaders, the so-called leaders of a community you need to talk to.

But if it’s a really, a real grassroots movement, you have to talk to the people themselves.

We just realized that in New Zealand. You have to talk to the Hapu, the people themselves. Some of the leaders have sold out to the government, to the corporate government, so that’s why you need to get the hearts and minds of the people themselves.

I think that’ll make all the difference.

01:07:46

Examples of Current One Small Town Initiatives

Michael:

Yeah, yeah, absolutely, right. We’ve learned the same. Exactly the same here.

So you know, every traditional leader in South Africa that we talked to just loves it. They they love it, they want it. They’re offering us land.

So in terms of land, especially in the areas that there’s loads of land available among the traditional leaders, we have a lot of land that we can go grow things.

So yeah, just to give you an example in Lebanon. By the way, Lebanon is by far the most the biggest success we have with One Small Town. Our ambassador there, Fayez Mu*** [spelling unknown], in the last nine months has performed miracles.

It’s truly spectacular what has happened. They have started the One Small Town Art Gallery. They’ve got lands that they’ve started to plant. All kinds of medicinal plants, including oregano, to extract oregano oil for medicinal purposes. It’s a very high profit yielding business.

They’ve they’ve got lots of land allocated to them, going into partnership with farmers to grow all kinds of other medicinal plants, medicinal honey. Beekeeping. All the products also made from from beekeeping. All health products and shampoos and soaps, et cetera.

They’ve got primary water in a very, very deep well that the water is absolutely beautiful and healthy. That’s been tested. That they are about to start bottling. As primary, healing water for bottling and export as a One Small Town product from Ras el-Metn, Lebanon. Like Fiji Water, you can buy everywhere in the world. Well, very soon you’ll be able to buy Ras el-Metn primary water.

They’ve started the art gallery, which is, and I’d love to talk to you about the art gallery, which — we’re changing the rules of selling art around the world completely. Which is one of my pet projects because I’m an artist at heart as well.

And the other big thing that we’re launching in Lebanon, in Ras el-Metn, is our first health and wellness center. A five-story building with some of the latest alternative healing modalities. Where 40 of the top doctors in Lebanon have have volunteered 30% of their time to come and help and work in this health and wellness center — and only take a small portion — only take a 30% cut of what they do for that health and wellness center.

This is unheard of, so we are opening the hearts and minds of medical professionals who — many of whom are just, you know, money driven and success driven.

We’re now finding those healers and health industry professionals that want to do good, that want to help people, that want to heal people. And this is going to be our first beautiful example of a health and wellness center.

We’re about to launch the health token. I think we’re gonna be launching 1,000,000 tokens for $5 because we need to raise $5,000,000. And again, we start locally and then go outwards and raise that $5 million for 30% of that of that investment.

And the business plan for that is mind blowing. It’s absolutely mind blowing. It’s incredibly detailed and the most exciting part of it is that it actually shows a profit of around $7 to $8 million just in the first year after launching. No, no, it’s crazy. It’s crazy.

So now that business plan has become a model for a health and wellness center for every other country, every other small town with with slight, obviously, adaptations for the new specific environment.

But now we have — this is how it’s going to happen. Every time we launch a new business plan for a certain situation, that business plan becomes the property of One Small Town members all over the world. They can take it and use it for their community to launch that business in their community, raise funds on an adapted version of that business plan for their community.

It could be a brewery, it could be a cement factory. It could be built making cornflakes. It could be whatever you can image.

Reiner:

So it’s the exchange of the best ideas then.

Michael:

Yeah, exactly. Exactly. Yeah.

Dexter:

Michael, excuse me. You’ve been talking about the Infinite token. And I’m thinking do you have an app?


Michael:

Yes, it’s not an app within the One Small Town website, One Small Town platform. It’s a secure blockchain platform environment, so it’s like an app within that.

In fact, I think, if I’m right we’re launching the digital wallet. It was either launched today or tomorrow, in the next day or two we’re launching the One Small Town digital wallet, which means that any member, anywhere in the world, if you’ve got Infinity tokens in there, you can send them free of charge, out of sight or mind of any bank or government, to anyone you want in the world, as long as they are a One Small Town member. It’s instant. And it’s for free (boom).

Let me tell you, I’ve seen this happen. The excitement that you experience and the joy when you see that happen, when somebody sits next to you, they say I’m going to send you Infinity token now. And they just click (boom) and it appears in your wallet. You go, ‘oh, my God’.

You just realized how powerful that is. You just realized that we have created an alternative trading system. An alternative exchange system.

Should the global banks collapse tomorrow, we already have a solution for it. We don’t have to build anything.

It exists, it’s ready. And anyone in the world can use it immediately. And it’s free.

01:13:58

On Using the Same Technology the Globalists Use to Control Us, to Liberate Us

Reiner:

So you’re using as you’re saying the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation. You’re using all of the tech, all of the available technology. But instead of what they’re doing — they’re using it to control us — you’re using it to liberate us.

That’s the ultimate goal of this. You’re simply making use —

Everything has two sides as we all know. You can use energy for good and for bad purposes.

So what you’re doing is you’re using all of the technology that they’re using for bad purposes for good purposes.

It’s a very simple approach, but it makes a lot of sense. And if you can protect —

Michael:

That’s exactly what it is.

What I need to add — it’s very important that you brought us back to that thought — is because I’ve noticed that some of our members, and even sometimes people that want to become ambassadors —

(And historically some of our ambassadors that weren’t quite ready to take on the role, maybe because we also don’t know how to interview ambassadors. How do you know whether it’s going to be a good ambassador or a bad ambassador? We don’t know. We take a chance with everyone we bring on board. We’re building this from the ground up.)

So I’ve also noticed that many of our members — well not many — some of our members that are still little hippie-minded, little freedom-bunny-minded, and, you know I love spirituality — I’m the most spiritual bunny in the world if I want to be — but at the same time, I realize that that’s not going to put bread on the table. I need to go and plant the food, to make create the food.

So we’ve had to implement this very strict control mechanism. The way that corporations control their systems ,so no one can steal from them.

We’ve had to set this in motion and set this up for our members to use, so that they can’t get ripped off. No one can run off with their ideas or their money or their businesses.

And sometimes some of our slightly, you know, airy-fairy members don’t yet, don’t quite get it. They think that we now want to become draconian corporations that want to control everything.

No, not at all. We’re not controlling anything. We’re just giving you the platform to use for your own control and protection.

But if you want to be part of One Small Town, you have to be on the platform. Otherwise you can’t be part of One Small Town.

Otherwise, how will the system know whether your members have done work for three hours somewhere in a Siberian village? You’re out there in the Amazon jungle or in the bloody Outback in Australia. How will we know if somebody’s going to contribute their three hours?

So, just like you said. We’ve built this very powerful system, this tool, this monster that is aiding and helping the people to be able to connect and share. And no one can rip them off and no one can steal anything that they’ve created.

So it’s there for the benefit of the community, not for my benefit. Believe me, I’ve sacrificed everything I have to get to this stage. And when I say everything I have, I’m not kidding.

Reiner:

It sounds and looks great.

I will, and Dexter too, we will take a very close look so that we will be able to connect you with all the right people. Because
I think that’s ultimately what it takes.

This idea, if it is going to fly worldwide, needs a lot of supporters from our side of the fence.

The other side, we don’t care about, but from our side of the fence. And they have to be absolutely — they have to be convinced that it works.

And they have to be — I’m sure it work — but they also have to be convinced that it’s safe from infiltration and control.

01:17:53

An Idea Whose Time Has Come

Michael:

Yeah, it’s very important. Thank you for saying that, Reiner.

And it’s people like you — and your influence is vast globally, obviously. Especially during this COVID era, you’ve become a a global celebrity on the social media.

So I’m very grateful that you took this interview or this conversation with us. With me and with Emil.

Thank you, Dexter, for participating. So you’re an absolute joy. I didn’t even realize that you were going to join us from South Africa. So it makes my makes my heart jump even more with joy. So it’s wonderful.

And this is working. It’s an idea whose time has come. It’s taken 17 years to get here.

But watch this space. It’s growing exponentially. And a year from now, who knows where we’re going to be.

We might have 100,000 towns signing up to the One Small Town initiative on the platform. Because the intention is that it becomes a completely automated process that we don’t have to intervene. And that’s why we’re working very, very hard to make sure that everything works — the platform, the blockchain, works.

Because once people want to sign up, it’s gotta be smooth. We can’t have gremlins in there.

Taking a Closer Look at the Technology & the Possibility of Surveillance

Reiner:

Yes, I can see that and the one thing that most people, when it comes to setting up your own self-sufficient systems, have been worried the most about is what do we do about the monetary system.

What about the —

We don’t want to be controlled by CBDC. We want to be absolutely free and not controlled by anyone.

Now, the tools you’re using can be used for two purposes. As I said before, for a good purpose and for a bad purpose.

And from what it sounds like — we’ll have to take a much closer look — but from what it sounds like you’re using it for a really good purpose. So that people will not have to be afraid that somebody is watching over their shoulder and trying to see what they’re doing 24/7.

That’s the one big worry that most people have. So we’ll have to convince them that there is no risk, no danger of this happening in this system.

Otherwise, I applaud you. This is great.

This is probably exactly what everyone’s been looking for from our side of the fence.

Emil:

If I can put in a word with that whole fear. When you make everything local, that fear disappears.

But what happens if someone wants to take control of you when your local environment is running and functioning?

They can’t do it so. So the solution is simple.

Michael:

Yeah, that’s a very important point to bring up.

Yeah, Reiner, thank you so much for your interest.

Thank you, Dexter.

If if you want to discuss anything at any stage, if you want to jump on a zoom call or quiz me on anything, please feel free to do so.

We’re building this up and we do need the influence of people like you, and all the others that you have in your pool of influence.

Let’s get this growing. Remember, this is free.

No one is forced to join One Small Town. And the beautiful thing is that you don’t have to jump off the cliff into uncharted waters to try something new.

No, nobody has to leave their job. Nobody has to stop doing what they’re doing. All they have to do is become a member and contribute three hours a week. That’s all it takes.

Getting More People on Board

Reiner:

It sounds so fantastic, but it also feels good.

So, we’ll have a follow up meeting on this, because we’re gonna have to get some more people on board. Some more people who really, really will be able to help set this up.

I know there are a lot of people out there who’ve been kind of waiting at the sidelines to see if there’s something coming up where they can chip in. A lot of very well-intentioned and very smart people.

But I think maybe this is it.

Michael:

Those are the kind of people that I know you have, obviously, a good reach to. But even more so, I hope that this message also reaches the conscious millionaires and billionaires out there, who know that the investment markets are rotten to the core, that are looking for new conscious, humanitarian investments with consequence and infinite potential for growth.

One Small Town is exactly that. You’re investing into communities, entire communities, that you’re going to help turn upside down and turn into to hubs of creative creation, creative new businesses, food production, health and Wellness, everything you imagine as a powerful individual, powerful financial support. You can take a small town and completely turn it upside down.

From the small towns around the world that are collapsing at an increasingly rapid pace, we can turn that around. And we just need the conscious millionaires and billionaires to realize that One Small Town is that new opportunity that they never imagined would present itself.

Reiner:

The stock market is crashing anyway.

Dexter:

Thank you so much, Michael. I really love what you have presented.

I think for me, one of the core message is that you are basically, through your initiative, you are putting power back into the hands of the individual, back into the hands of the communities.

And I think it is going to be a great success, especially when actually talking from a South African developing country’s point of view. When you look at communities, communities are basically the backbone of any society.

So you cannot even start talking about the society if you don’t look after the best interest of communities.

And as far as what I can see, and to what you have presented, I don’t have any doubt in my mind that this is something that is going to be successful.

This is something that is going to ensure that humanity can continue to thrive for generations to come.

So I wish you all the best, and I am definitely going to take up your offer. I will get your contact details. I’ll actually visit your website as well, get in touch with you. And I would love to actually have another zoom meeting with you.

Thank you so much, Michael. Great success.

Michael:

Thank you, Dexter.


Reiner:

I have nothing to add to that. Now that Dexter has said it, I can only confirm it.

Yeah, this sounds like the best idea. This is the way out of this collapsing system. That’s it.

Michael:

Well, I’d like to thank you, gentlemen.

Emil, thank you for setting it up.

Dexter, thank you for joining us from Cape Town, I believe.

And Reiner, it’s a great honor and pleasure to meet you. I’ve followed your work especially throughout this COVID period, this, this plandemic. And I’m deeply grateful for this meeting.

And I want to end on this note.

If it’s not good for everyone, it’s no good at all.

Reiner:

You’re right.

Thank you very much, Michael. It’s been an honor and a pleasure. Talk to you later.

 

Connect with One Small Town

Connect with Michael Tellinger

Connect with ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee

Info on Infinity Tokens

(If you have trouble finding a workable link to buy tokens, try here.
Use the menu on the left side to select ‘Buy Tokens’)


See Related: 

One Small Town & the Restoration of Human Freedom: Michael Tellinger Interview With Jerm Warfare

Michael Tellinger: Money Was Created to Enslave Humanity

Reiner Fuellmich: On Standing With the Māori People of New Zealand Who Never Ceded Their Independence

Cover image credit: TheDigitalArtist




Maui Wildfires and the Theft of Sacred Hawaiian Land

Maui Wildfires and the Theft of Sacred Hawaiian Land

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
August 14, 2023

 



Survivors of the Maui fire say that they received no warning and that the flames appeared so quickly that escape was difficult. Everything was suddenly in flames and many found refuge in the ocean for hours while their homes burned to the ground and into the same powdery ash footprint we’ve seen in recent years. So far, it is estimated that nearly a thousand people have died. Locals are worried this includes hundreds of children who were home due to school being canceled that day.

Several people are reporting that the government is not only doing little to help but they are blocking local efforts to do so and not allowing local donations through. And blocking life-saving medicine because it isn’t federally approved.

The people of Maui are on their own for now. And aside from the federal government’s bureaucratic failure, they have good reason to be suspicious. Just like what we saw five years ago in Paradise California, there was nothing normal about these fires. Within a day of burning, it was like a bomb went off.

Local residents have been reporting bright flashes of light. One was captured by a home security camera that appears to have been the start of the Olinda fire.

Many people are saying that it was Directed Energy Weapons. We know that most major governments already have them. And during the California fires, online weather maps recorded what looks like a laser from above striking an area just before it bursts into flames.

In his research, Denis Mills discovered that the incendiary aluminum and barium nanodust from chemtrails is most likely fueling the ferocity of today’s so-called super wildfires. And on the day before the Maui fires broke out, locals were reporting a heavy overcast from chem-trailing that they’d never seen before.

It’s also interesting to note that the Maui police chief was the incident commander for the Las Vegas mass shooting in 2017.

Lahaina is considered to be a historic and sacred land. It was the capital of the Kingdom of Hawaii before it was taken by the United States. It’s been occupied by native Hawaiians ever since who are defiantly opposed to the mainland outsiders who have been buying up land with no respect for local culture. Not just BlackRock and Vanguard, but Billionaires like Mark Zuckerberg who owns more land on Kauai than what the government of Kauai owns. And Oprah Winfrey who has bought over a thousand acres of land in Hawaii. Including a new 870 acres in Maui she bought this Spring.

In 2018 the Paradise wildfires broke out exactly where the United Nations have plans to somehow make off-limits to humans. And that same year a report on wildfire prevention was published that was focused on the exact same areas in Maui where the fires just broke out.

Governor Josh Green has been putting the World Economic Forum’s Great Reset agenda ahead of Hawaiian interests. Just weeks before the fire he unveiled an emergency proclamation on housing that eliminates the Land Use Commission. Allowing the government more leeway to build as they see fit. Such as building 15-minute Smart Cities run by Artificial Intelligence. Just like they’ve been planning for years.

 

Connect with Greg Reese




Dr. Joseph P. Farrell: Strange Wildfire Incidents Move to Maui

Joseph P. Farrell: Strange Wildfire Incidents Move to Maui

by Joseph P. Farrell, Giza Death Star
August 14, 2023

 

By now we’ve all heard of the disastrous, and sad, fires on Maui that have wiped out hundreds of people’s homes, livelihoods, and tragically ended the lives of many.

If you’re wondering why I’ve not commented until now, it is because  like many of you, I’m  shocked and saddened that these fires caused so much damage, and seemingly struck without much of a warning. Unlike the propatainment media, I did not want to comment in my usual fashion about my suspicions about these fires, because it was just not “right” nor the time to do so.

Needless to say, such attempt to maintain some tact was utterly absent from the propatainment media which wasted no time invoking its nutty climate change narrative, beating even the Bai Den Dzhao misadministration to that punch. Indeed, in a rare display of sensitivity and tact, and to his rare credit, the “president” refraining from making any reference to that narrative.

But comment and speculation is necessary, particularly for anyone paying attention to the strange resemblance of what has happened in Maui, to what happened in California years earlier with equally strange fires, particularly those in Paradise, California.

We all recall the strange pictures from those fires: homes and businesses completely burned to the ground, while next to them, bushes, trees, and shrubs remained alive and unburned.

Perhaps these strange results are the bizarreries one comes to  expect from plasmas, i.e., perhaps they are “firestorm equivalents to Leidenfrost layers”.

Whether or not that wild and “out there” speculation makes any sense is really irrelevant, because my point is  that one can contrive almost any “naturalistic” explanation to account for the strangeness of what we saw. It becomes more difficult when one remembers the pictures of melted roadbeds on bridges, buckled and melted guard rails, right next to abundant – and unburned – underbrush.

Again, naturalistic explanations are possible: the metal in the roadbed or guard rails acted as heat conductors and actually channeled heat away from the underbrush. Maybe (but did they channel the fires away from the trees and underbrush? if so, how?).

Then from Paradise, CA, there were the pictures of homes with burned out electrical power boxes where, apparently, some of the fires had started.  Pictures from earlier fires showed clear evidence of vorticular behavior in the heat flows, reminiscent of the “fire vortices” reported by Germans and Japanese that survived the firebombings of Hamburg, Dresden, and Tokyo during the Second World War.

The bottom line is, naturalistic explanations are possible, though highly speculative, and a bit of a stretch.

Thus, the fires can also be explained in other, equally speculative but much more sinister ways. For example, initially I advanced the idea that one possible way to explain why trees and shrubs survived the ambient heat of fires right next to them that burned down homes and businesses was perhaps that the fires were triggered and initiated in conductive materials by very powerful microwave interferometry.

Others produced alleged pictures of the fires being initiated by lasers as “proof” that some sort of directed energy started the fires.

Pictures can, of course, be doctored and photoshopped, but their production indicates many others were at least thinking in similar terms.

My other “sinister speculation” was that the fires were initiated by the power grid itself. Every electrical circuit is also a small broadcast circuit, and the electricity in  the wires in one’s home could literally be modulated and pulsed by transients in such a fashion that they might possibly be used to initiate fires.  Of course I’m guessing, and my speculations are an attempt to rationalize what makes no sense.

With that in mind, however, there is already a bit of significant testimony by Dr. Kathy Forti, who was there when the fires began. I am grateful to our friend Catherine Austin Fitts for spotting this, and passing it along; it’s worth your consideration:

What Really Happened on Maui – I Was There

Note the following from Dr. Forti’s story:

A friend called me early on the morning of Tuesday, August 8th and told me he had a strong urge to visit Lahaina that day. Tempting me with lunch at Cool Cats, one of my favorite eateries in Old Lahaina, I said “Okay. Let’s go!”

The 30 minute drive was without incident, without winds, and without any warning advisories. As soon as we reached Lahaina, all power got zapped. Cell phone, internet, traffic lights, GPS, the 911 emergency system (which is never supposed to go down) and the power outage caused every store and shopping mall to immediately close. Nothing was open.

Then the winds came in, bringing with it a rare rainless hurricane with gusts from 60-80mph. Trees became uprooted and branches were coming down everywhere, along with power poles. I heard a crash behind me and where I was less than 30 seconds prior was a crashed and uprooted tree. It was time to get out of there.

Now first of all, I can empathize with what Dr. Forti is recording here, as it sounds suspiciously like the 100mph + winds I experienced just this last June where I live, which put Shiloh and I in our shelter for an hour and a half: the constant roar of the wind and the unbelievable lightning storm were like nothing I’ve ever seen or experienced before. My only advantage is that our warning system was not suspiciously “non-functional” prior to the event.

Hawaii’s system appears to have been “down”, and I’m reminded like many of you of that strange incident during the Trump administration when the warnings went off, and then were retracted. Now the system was completely down during a major weather emergency.

I’ll just come right out and say it: to me these incidents betoken some massive security problems, and possible deliberate interference with those systems.  And yes, I realize that means I’m stating that the whole sad Maui episode might have been a deliberately engineered event.

But just wait, because I’m not the one saying it: Dr. Forti is, and she was there:

No evacuation sirens ever went off that day when the fires began. They failed as well. My friend and I had to escape through the back road going all the way around the island as all traffic was blocked in the other direction. Many might not have known about this back route since GPS was down.

These fires were indeed strange. The night before both my friend and many others claimed to have had very restless sleep. I personally experienced a strange flooding wave of energy in my head, almost like seizure activity, which I have come to identity as dark energy coming in. This flooding energy continued on and off the next morning, more so when I was in Lahaina. This told me there was directed energy involved in what was occurring.

This was not just a random act of mother nature. It reminded me of the strange fires in Paradise, California a few years back which swept through and wiped it off the map. Their only crime was getting in the way of a high speed railway project slated to come through the town.

A little bit of history to draw your own conclusions: Historic Lahaina is the key harbor seaport on the island. The Lanai Ferry goes back and forth from there, all the commercial snorkeling and scuba diving firms set sail from there and tourists flock there in daily droves.

The problem with Historic Lahaina was that it had a large old Hawaiian community that was in the way of the developers. Now it’s like ground zero, declared a disaster area, and federal and states rules are probably going to be tossed aside. It’s a toxic mess. They will undoubtedly blame it all on climate change and welcome in the developers to totally bull doze and level it.

All over the island tracts of land are being bought up by corporations and no one knows who is behind them. Foreign interests? The people on this island are beginning to put the pieces of the puzzle together and suspect this was a major power land grab.

In January 2023 there was a Smart City Conference where they discussed turning Maui into a 15-minute “smart island”. Next month there is a Digital Summit to discuss turning the island digital and all AI. I kid you not. (Emphasis added)

What intrigues me most about this story are the remarks I’ve highlighted by italics: prior to the fires, Dr. Forti experienced a “strange flooding wave of energy” in her head, an energy that she describes as “almost like seizure activity.”

This, too, struck very close to home, for the very day of the big storm that hit here where I live, I was listening to the weather radio, and tracking the storms that began way out on the western edge of the state and followed an almost perfect straight line all across the state until it finally arrived here and struck right about midnight.  That whole day I had this very strange sensation of energy, vague and “in the background” and amorphous, but unsettling and causing a kind of anxiety and unfocussed mental state.

All I can say is that I knew that this storm was not normal, and I had the absolute distinct impression hours before it actually struck that when it struck here, it would cause massive damage and power outages, which it did. Similarly, my little dog Shiloh was also anxious and nervous all day, and constantly begging me for attention.

Dr. Forti notes that corporations are buying up all the land on Maui, and that “they” have plans to turn the island into an artificial intelligence/fifteen minute island prison. That may be one motivation  behind the firestorm. Others have pointed out the presence of certain populations there they want removed. Still others have written me and pointed out the concurrence of the Maui fires with the release of the film Oppenheimer.

The point is, many people are sensing something is “not right” about these fires, and you can number me among them. If so, and if someone has deliberately caused them as part of some sick agenda, or for personal or corporate or political gain, then amid our prayers for Mauians, we might also pray for the exposure of the perpetrators, and for them to face justice.

Some might complain that we don’t really know who “they” are. I would aver, on the contrary, that we do… the doctrine of mens rea is a very powerful thing, and some of them have already openly declared their “real mind”…

See you on the flip side…

 

Connect with Joseph P. Farrell

Cover image credit: US Coast Guard Station Maui




Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 11, 2023

 

There were some strange things about the alleged wildfire at Lahaina, Hawaii. Notably, the spokesman who explained what happened was NOT a fire official or anyone from the local government with any knowledge of fire fighting or emergencies. Instead, we find Major General Kenneth Hara, the commanding general of the Hawaii Army National Guard. He stated that he did not know what ignited the fires. But he opined that low humidity and high winds “set the conditions for the wildfires.” He is an army general; what does he know about forest fires?

There is reason to question the general’s claim. The wildfire would only make sense if a forest of trees surrounded the city of Lahaina. That is the first problem with the story. There is no forest near the town. Indeed, the satellite photo below shows that the tallest trees near the city belong to the Maui Kuaia Estate Cacao Farm. Cacao trees are pretty small ranging in height between 13 and 26 feet. But those trees are across a highway several hundred yards from the nearest building.

Notice that Lahiana, Hawaii is NOT surrounded by a forest of trees. The only dense area of trees would be the Maui Kuaia Estate Cocao Farm. Cacao trees are quite small ranging in height between 13 and 26 feet. That small clump of trees on the tree farm separated by a roadway and many hundreds of yards of barren land containing only scrub grass could not cause a massive conflagration alleged to have been caused by wildfires.

What about the trees within the city itself? There are lots of trees in the town. But when we look at the photos of the city after the alleged fire, we find that the trees in the town are mainly intact. Strangely buildings that have been destroyed allegedly by fire are surrounded by trees untouched by flames.

Something else is going on here. That something else is directed energy. The buildings were destroyed by directed energy weapons. Directed energy weapons use microwaves. They cause molecular destruction of materials that absorb them; wood remains unfazed because wood absorbs very little microwave radiation. It is similar to how you can put a paper plate in a microwave oven without concern that it will catch fire. But if you put aluminum foil into that same microwave oven, it will quickly begin to spark and burst into flames.

Directed energy is not new technology. Directed energy weapons were used during the 9/11 attacks on the World Trade Center. The book 9/11-Enemies Foreign and Domestic details the evidence that directed energy weapons were used on 9/11.


 

The pictures above and below are frames from an aerial video of the alleged wildfires that destroyed the city of Lahaina, Hawaii. The authorities do not know how the alleged fires started. Notice that buildings are leveled, but standing trees surround the destroyed buildings. How could the city have been destroyed by wildfires when the trees in the town are untouched by any flames? Notice in the video frame below there are two buildings completely leveled with unburned trees abutting the buildings. Nearby buildings are untouched by any fire. This is telltale evidence of directed energy weapons.

 

Notice in the video how the buildings are leveled to the ground, but the trees remain standing and unburned.

 

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image based on creative commons work of:
debeeonmaui & tumisu




Jon Rappoport: On “the Big Con” of Concocted Science as a Control System — “Centers of Fake Knowledge Are Modern Cathedrals”

Jon Rappoport: On “the Big Con” of Concocted Science as a Control System — “Centers of Fake Knowledge Are Modern Cathedrals”

 

“CONCOCTED science is the modern version of spiritual revelation. The Roman Church—while it was carrying out witch hunts and inquisitions replete with confessions obtained through torture and capped off with death by burning at the stake—was claiming Jesus Himself had passed the keys of the Kingdom to the Church…and He tacitly approved its policies.

“These days, debilitating, brain damaging, and life-destroying vaccines are the scientific revelations the Church of Federal Medicine stands for.

“Concocted science.”

 

Science as Control; Centers of Fake Knowledge Are Modern Cathedrals; the Big Con

by Jon Rappoport, No More Fake News
August 10, 2023

 

I continue to write about this subject because it’s vital.

NIH, the US National Institutes of Health, is the largest medical research facility in the world. It has 18,000 employees and runs on an annual budget of $45 billion.

I once suggested to Jim Warner, a White House policy analyst under Ronald Reagan, that somebody should do an audit of NIH and determine exactly what medical advancements the agency had actually made during its long history. He thought that was a terrific idea. But nothing came of it.

I assure you, an audit would reveal much less than meets the eye. Much less in the way of useful discoveries and technology. Along with mountains of useless and fraudulent science.

BUT NIH stands as a center of knowledge and a symbol, a reference point, a proof positive that medical science is marching forward.

It’s a very expensive public relations tool.

How could we not accept and signal our obedience to medicine, when we have such an awesome modern cathedral for its research?

Ditto for the CDC and the FDA. Both infernally corrupt agencies.

CONCOCTED science is the modern version of spiritual revelation. The Roman Church—while it was carrying out witch hunts and inquisitions replete with confessions obtained through torture and capped off with death by burning at the stake—was claiming Jesus Himself had passed the keys of the Kingdom to the Church…and He tacitly approved its policies.

These days, debilitating, brain damaging, and life-destroying vaccines are the scientific revelations the Church of Federal Medicine stands for.

Concocted science.

People accept science as fact, based on the IMPRESSION that actual knowledge is being discovered.

PR people make sure this impression is delivered.

Just as the Roman Church never confesses to fraud in its doctrine, the centers of modern medical knowledge never confess fraud.

 

Connect with Jon Rappoport

Cover image credit: prettysleepy1




“Apocalyptic Scene”: Out-of-Control Wildfire Spreads on Hawaii’s Maui Island

“Apocalyptic Scene”: Out-of-Control Wildfire Spreads on Hawaii’s Maui Island

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
August 9, 2023

 

Shocking footage of an out-of-control wildfire burning in Hawaii has been shared on Twitter, showing the devastation.
The epicenter of the destruction is in the Hawaiian town of Lahaina on the island of Maui. CBS News said, “People were jumping into the water to escape flames and smoke from a wind-fueled wildfire.”
Strong wind and dry conditions have been fueling the fire. As of early Wednesday local time, fires were active in Lahaina, Kula, North Kohala, and South Kohala.

 

 

Acting governor Sylvia Luke declared an emergency on Tuesday and activated the National Guard to help with evacuation efforts.
Here’s footage from Lahaina:

 

 

 

 

 

Connect with ZeroHedge

Cover image credit: ulleo


See related on global fires: 

Reiner Fuellmich With Peter Mac Isaac: Why Are Canada´s Forests Burning? 

Wildfires As a Weapon: US Military Exposed

[Updated] On the Massive Fires in Canada & All Over North America

Dane Wigington: Geoengineering Is Fueling Firestorm Catastrophes

 




USA v. Dr. Kirk Moore et al.:  Katherine Watt on DoD’s “Vaccine” Bioweapons & the DOJ’s Case Against Dr. Kirk Moore

USA v. Dr. Kirk Moore et al.:  Katherine Watt on DoD’s “Vaccine” Bioweapons & the DOJ’s Case Against Dr. Kirk Moore

 

“Cases like Moore’s, in which defendants flip the apparent but illusory strength of the DOJ position back on the government, by demanding production of evidence that simply doesn’t exist, help expose the foundational fraud. 

“These cases are useful for building public understanding and public momentum to get at the real crimes and the real criminals.”

 

USA v. Dr. Kirk Moore et al.

by Katherine Watt, Bailiwick News
August 8, 2023

 

Key premises of Bailiwick reporting and analysis

The US military is actively engaged in an organized criminal enterprise to injure and kill large numbers of military personnel and civilians without detection or legal impediment.

One of the most useful tools in the arsenal — because it strikes an effective balance between the killers’ two primary interests in speed and deniability — is the deployment of prohibited biochemical weapons labeled as FDA-authorized or FDA-approved ‘vaccines.’

The ‘vaccine’-based killing program is an extension of medical and psychological torture and homicide programs conducted to kill millions of people (disabled, mentally-ill, Jewish, Catholic, Protestant, Roma, politically-dissident and many more), especially during and since World War II, including but not limited to Aktion T-4 and the Soviet gulag system.

The most recent and most visible phase of the program launched in the US in early 2020, under the title Operation Warp Speed, and resulted in global deployment of psychological fraud and control programs including terrorizing propaganda; social isolation; mask mandates; diagnostic tests; manipulated data presentations (i.e. “dashboards”); prohibition on treatments for symptoms; and financial coercion of hospitals and nursing home death protocols (sedatives, ventilators and toxins).

These components were followed by distribution of three brands of biochemical weapons (Pfizer-BioNTech, Moderna and Johnson & Johnson) with an unknown number of different batch formulations.

The biochemical weapons were and are developed and manufactured under redacted contracts, to DoD specifications, non-compliant with FDA pharmaceutical manufacturing regulations.

They are delivered — by way of the Strategic National Stockpile and DoD transport systems, non-compliant with FDA pharmaceutical distribution regulations — to retail pharmacies, nursing homes, hospitals, clinics, workplaces, schools, parking lots and medical offices, and from there into the hands of pharmacists, nurses and other ‘vaccinators,’ for injection into military targets at community-level ‘vaccination’ clinics.

To date, the contents have not been publicly disclosed.

Independent researchers have identified some but not all components of some vials diverted from the Strategic National Stockpile supply chain, including heavy metals, genetic code fragments, and many other contaminants not listed on applications submitted to regulators by manufacturers, who are working under redacted contracts for the US Department of Defense.


USA v. Dr. Kirk Moore

In January 2023, the US Department of Justice charged Dr. Kirk Moore and three other individuals by indictment, alleging criminal violations of 18 USC 371 (conspiracy to defraud the United States); 18 USC 641 (conspiracy to convert, sell, convey and dispose of government property); and 18 USC 2 (aiding and abetting.)

The US government alleged that Dr. Moore and his colleagues:

“…ran a scheme…to defraud the United States and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (“CDC”), whereby they destroyed hundreds of doses of government-provided COVID-19 vaccines, and in exchange for either direct cash payments or required “donations” to a specified charitable organization, defendants distributed COVID-19 vaccination record cards to persons without administering a COVID-19 vaccine to them and administered saline shots to minor children to trick them into thinking they had received a vaccine…”

Moore’s case is unusual because the US government is prosecuting alleged criminal acts, allegedly committed by civilians, relating to the products known as Covid-19 vaccines.

Most other Covid-19 vaccine cases are civil cases (not criminal prosecutions) and the parties are individual civilians and military personnel as plaintiffs, suing Department of Defense manufacturing contractors (including Pfizer and Moderna) and the US government as defendants — for violations of plaintiffs’ civil and constitutional rights.

Whether the US government is the prosecutor or the defendant in any given case, DOJ attorneys work to delay or prevent discovery: the phase of trial preparation in which parties exchange evidence on which each party intends to rely for making their claims and defenses.

But in criminal prosecution cases, government prosecutors sooner or later must disclose evidence, or else drop the charges.

The more the prosecutors want to make a timely public example of a defendant to discourage others inclined to engage in similar conduct that the government doesn’t like, the sooner the prosecutors must disclose the evidence they claim will incriminate the defendant and bring the case to trial.

In criminal prosecutions brought by an infiltrated government comprised of un-indicted war criminals, who are themselves engaged in criminal conduct (suppressed by government/media censorship and obscured by government/media propaganda) — which is the situation in the United States since January 2020 and the start of the global and nationwide ‘public health emergency’ — the DOJ calculus shifts again.

The evidentiary exchange goes both ways, at least for so long as the Attorney General wants to uphold any semblance of a credible criminal justice system, rather than simply convict, sentence and imprison citizens on accusations alone, without evidence and without trial.

For as long as American prosecutors and courts want to keep up the appearance that due process and rule of law remain functional, criminal defendants have the right to request and receive records and other evidence to prepare their defenses.

So prosecutors have to weigh the benefits of disclosing the evidence they believe is incriminating for the defendants, against the risks of being forced to disclose evidence that tends to incriminate themselves, through their conduct (acts and omissions) as treasonous government officials and corrupt prosecutors.

This is particularly tricky for DOJ in cases concerning the alleged “Covid-19 vaccines,” because the development, manufacturing, testing, labeling, serialization, distribution, chain-of-custody and use of the products — under Emergency Use Authorization procedures — have been subject to secrecy.

Cloaked by the secrecy, identifiable men and women impersonating US government officials have committed discernible, lethal fraud, to carry out mass murder behind ‘public health emergency’ camouflage.

Related Bailiwick reporting and analysis:

By program design, the infiltrators posing as US government officials cannot prove that the contents of any vial or batch include or exclude any specific ingredients, nor can they prove the potency or inertness of any ingredients that may or may not have been in each allegedly mishandled vial.

Even more importantly, the infiltrators posing as US government officials do not want the complete lack of label conformity, verification procedures, purity or standardization to become widespread public knowledge.

Using Kirk Moore’s case as an example, a useful defense strategy would be for Moore to ask the DOJ to prove two things:

  1. That the US government ever produced and delivered any regulated pharmaceutical products or ‘vaccines’ to his business premises and;
  2. That the contents of any vials that may have passed through Moore’s office included any ingredients complying with any alleged ‘vaccine’ labels, information sheets or product specifications listed in applications submitted to FDA and other regulators.

DOJ can’t provide that proof, because it doesn’t exist.

The proof doesn’t exist, because the products allegedly delivered to Moore’s office, which he and his staff allegedly improperly disposed of, were and are prohibited biological and chemical weapons, manufactured and adulterated with a wide variety of known and unknown ingredients. These biochemical weapons are exempt from, and therefore non-compliant with, all pharmaceutical regulation.

As such, DoD, CDC and FDA took great care to not produce any pharmaceutical chain-of-custody paper trail between suppliers, manufacturers, distributors, ‘vaccinators’ and targets.

If they can produce any chain of custody records at all, those records will demonstrate that the products are military-grade biological and chemical weapons passed through the Strategic National Stockpile — not handled by regulated pharmaceutical distributors — under direct military control from the point at which raw materials entered production facilities to delivery of finished vials to retail pharmacies, medical offices, drive-through vaccination centers and other “points of dispensing.”

Moore’s defense boils down to:

“What vaccines?

I never handled any vaccines, and neither did anyone in my office.”


Cases like Moore’s, in which defendants flip the apparent but illusory strength of the DOJ position back on the government, by demanding production of evidence that simply doesn’t exist, help expose the foundational fraud.

These cases are useful for building public understanding and public momentum to get at the real crimes and the real criminals.


In support of civil and criminal litigation — including defenses to prosecutions like the one filed against Dr. Moore and his co-defendants — Sasha Latypova and I prepared a set of proposed discovery questions.

These discovery materials can be adapted for use by injured plaintiffs pursuing civil cases and by defendants facing US Government prosecution for their acts of resistance to criminals occupying high-level US Government positions.

These materials can also be used to deepen public understanding and resistance to the globalists’ control-and-kill programs.

 

Connect with Katherine Watt

Cover image credit: CDD20




Reiner Fuellmich With Peter Mac Isaac: Why Are Canada´s Forests Burning? 

Reiner Fuellmich With Peter Mac Isaac: Why Are Canada´s Forests Burning? 

by Reiner Fuellmich, International Crimes Investigative Committee

 



In this episode of ICIC, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich talks with Peter Mac Isaac, former provincial game warden in Canada about the current situation there, particularly with regard to the devastating forest fires from which humans, animals and nature are still suffering.

This series of wildfires began suddenly in the spring and the causes are being blamed on the narrative of man-made climate change.

Peter Mac Isaac is not afraid to openly express his personal opinion on this and has already had to suffer reprisals from the Canadian government, which has censored his expressions of opinion in every way.

This dictatorial approach of the government under Justin Trudeau to suppress freedom of expression is reminiscent of the harsh persecution of the “Truckers for Freedom” movement in the so-called “Corona Pandemic”, when many courageous people rebelled against the incipient totalitarianism in Canada and received broad popular support.

As an expert in the field of nature and forest protection, Mac Isaac denounces the government’s fatal handling of the forest fires.

Why were no experts called into action and why were they even discouraged from assisting on the ground?

In his opinion, one of the simplest terrorist methods is to frighten people with fires so that they will accept without protest any measures that the government orders, such as a “climate lockdown”.

It was modeled on the “Corona pandemic” with its inhumane measures, after which new sociopolitical and social control mechanisms could be installed.

Through his reporting on the situation in Canada at that time and through the comparison with almost all other countries in the world, it becomes quite clear that everything that happened then and is currently happening are meticulously planned and orchestrated actions carried out by a certain group, namely “Mr. Global” and the correspondingly corrupt and unscrupulous henchmen.

He points out the importance of not being intimidated by this small group, of standing up and speaking the truth out loudly.

It only takes 3% of the people on the planet to initiate a momentum of change, the other 97% who suffer from fear and cognitive dissonance will then join and also find the courage if they have role models.

Because if we do not change anything today, this task will become more and more difficult for our children and our children’s children. We must not remain inactive, the time to stand up is now!

 

Connect with ICIC

Cover image credit: CharlVera




Nanotechnology Found in Both Vaxxed And Un-Vaxxed

Nanotechnology Found in Both Vaxxed And Un-Vaxxed

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
August 5, 2023

 



Doctor Charles Morgan, former CIA and consultant for the US military on neurological sciences, spoke to cadets at West Point in 2018 about the current state of technology. He briefed the cadets on experiments from 2013 where humans were given neural implants that allowed them to control prosthetic arms with their thoughts. Experiments where one person can control another person’s hands by just wearing an EEG cap. Experiments where information is transmitted from one mind to another. And experiments where memories are erased.

Doctor Morgan admits they have the technology to target an individual person and are working on the ability to erase the memories of any human they choose. Their biggest challenge five years ago was being able to interface with the hippocampus without the use of physical wires. And this is most likely one of the motivating factors for the deployment of the experimental COVID shots.

Using Dark-field microscopy, Doctor Ana Maria Mihalcea has captured in great detail what the scientific literature describes as effective technologies that exist today. Technology such as Quantum Dots.

Quantum Dots are nanotechnology with the ability to organize, operate, communicate, and build structures within the blood. They do so with a tunable photoluminescence that can be programmed to dictate various tasks via optical communication. The description and images displayed in the scientific literature compared to what Mihalcea’s Dark-field microscopy has captured are the same. You can see the Quantum Dots blinking in different colors acting as the artificial intelligence directing the self-assembly around them. Bubbles are created within the blood that act as construction sites. Within these construction bubbles, the Quantum Dots organize the various materials into self-assembly.

These technologies are being found in both the blood of the vaccinated and in the blood of the un-vaccinated. Depending on what materials are available, the Quantum Dots will trigger them into self-assembly. The COVID vaccines are full of rare and heavy metals to make all manner of nanotechnology. But it seems as if almost everyone is infected with some sort of nano-tech. According to several research teams, everyone’s blood seems to contain the materials required to produce the filaments, and the lattice work for this technology. Blood samples that appear to be healthy have been completely transformed by applying a mere 10 milliamps of electric current for two hours. And it looks as if we may have been infected by the Chemtrails.

Morgellons disease was first reported in 2002. It’s when synthetic fibers or filaments are growing in a person’s body. It has been theorized for decades that this was being spread via Chemtrails. And under a microscope, it appears to be the same filaments that people today are calling blood clots. And what the scientific journals call self-assembled hydrogels. According to Dane Wiggington from Geoengineering watch dot org, nanoparticles are being sprayed worldwide.

The good news is that Doctor Mihalcea’s research has found a remedy. The iron in the infected blood has been oxidized to a 3-plus state. And by taking antioxidants one is able to dissolve these filament clots. She has found that EDTA Chelation therapy will remedy infected blood within 3 days. And mega-dosing Vitamin C also works.

 

Connect with The Reese Report

Cover image credit: PublicDomainPictures




Debunking Robert F. Kennedy Jr’s Pro-Israel Talking Points 

Debunking Robert F. Kennedy Jr’s Pro-Israel Talking Points

by Robert Inlakesh, The Last American Vagabond
August 6, 2023

 

US Democratic Party Presidential candidate, Robert F. Kennedy Jr recently sat down with celebrity rabbi Shmuley Boteach at an event in New York to perform a pre-prepared set of pro-Israel talking points. This came after the politician stated that Covid-19 didn’t effect Jewish and Asian people as much as White and Black Americans, drawing complaints of anti-Semitism from aspiring statesman.

Robert F. Kennedy Jr’s support of Israel, showcased in a recent event in New York, has been broadly interpreted to have been set up in order to run damage control over claims of anti-Semitism against the Democratic Party contender. RFK’s pandering to Israel tipped over into conflations between Jewish people and the Israeli regime, with the Presidential hopeful going on to deny that Palestinians lived under a racist Apartheid regime. Kennedy shared that,

“a major piece of my campaign will be explaining to Americans why that is wrong and making the case for Israel.”

RFK, despite pegging himself as the anti-establishment figure running within the Democratic party, takes an even more extreme pro-Zionist view than the sitting US President, Joe Biden, as he slammed his own party’s acknowledgment that Israel occupy’s Palestinian territory. In terms of his pro-Israel stance, there is little that seems to separate Kennedy and former US President Donald Trump, with RFK demonstrating a much more robust understanding of Israeli history and pro-Israel talking points.

Debunking RFK’s Pro-Israel Talking Points

During the course of the dialogue between Rabbi Shumely Boteach and RFK, the Presidential candidate made a large number of factually incorrect statements and spread provably false accusations about Iran, the Palestinians, the Arab world, and the Israeli government itself. To address each point in extensive detail would be too lengthy, however, the following claims are in need of rebuttal.

Claim 1: Israel is the only nation in the Middle East with freedom of expression

False: To begin with, Israel was ranked 97 in the world for press freedom, by Reporters Without Borders, in 2023. On the leading NGO’s website, it is stated that “Palestinian journalists are systematically subjected to violence as a result of their coverage of events in the West Bank, and Israeli reporters are barred from entering the Gaza Strip.” The 2022 assassination of Palestinian-American journalist Shireen Abu Akleh by Israeli security forces remains unpunished, despite strong pressure from the international community and the Israeli authorities’ admission, as well as video evidence, witness testimony, and forensic evidence all finding that this was a targeted killing by the IDF. The climate of impunity has only increased violence against Palestinian journalists in Israel, as well as in the West Bank and Gaza.” Reporters Without Borders also understates the number of Palestinian journalists currently held under Israeli detention and has not factored in the countless shootings carried out by the Israeli military, against Palestinians journalists, so far this year. The Committee to Protect Journalists has also protested that Israel’s murder of 20 renowned Palestinians journalists over 22 years, without anyone being held accountable, endangers reporters further.

While the Middle East may have a very low standard for protection of journalists, no other nation has a two tier system of racial segregation, with separate sets of laws to target a specific ethnicity. The Israeli police have even barred the display of Palestinian flags in public, attacking and injuring those who have displayed it. The Israeli Knesset is currently in the process of advancing a bill that will make it a criminal offense to display the flag of Palestine. The current Israeli border authorities also frequently detain, interrogate, and deport people for the very reason that they are interpreted to hold anti-Israel beliefs, whether or not they do, based largely on their ethnicity. In the US, this is called racial profiling and is considered by most as racist and unacceptable, yet those same people often turn a blind eye in the case of Israel.

Claim 2: Israel is the only place in the Middle East where women have rights

False: Bobby Kennedy claimed that Israel is the only place in the Middle East where women have rights, he then went on to say that women in Iran “are being jailed for wearing habibs, uh, for not wearing habibs”. To begin with, the word he is trying to say is hijab, which is the term for an Islamic headscarf. The mere fact that he repeatedly said the word habib, which means “darling” in Arabic, demonstrates his lack of knowledge on the subject. However, getting past that semantic point, the Israeli system is again a two-tiered one, where Palestinian women are afforded no rights at all in the occupied territories. One cannot claim that because Jewish Israeli women have a set of rights that in many ways replicate those that are afforded to women across the collective West, that Israel in its totality is a State that performs well on women’s rights.

Furthermore, there are decency laws in the Islamic Republic of Iran. Morality police (that are small units) that will sometimes appear in public spaces to either tell women to put on their headscarfs, and in the worse cases arrest women for not doing as such, and there is a small possibility of arrest for not wearing one. It is important to note that the harassment faced by women inside Iran for this is indeed a real thing and there are cases of abuse for not wearing the hijab. Yet to say this type of dynamic does not exist in the West is simply not true. One obvious example of such a dynamic is the recent vaccination craze, wherein people are still being pressured to adhere to a government required action, and demonized and attacked if they do not. What is often ignored in this discussion about hijabs is that many women in Iran choose to wear these, both for religious adherence as well as an act of rebellion against the previous illegal US occupation, while other do because they feel they must for varying reasons. The Western media has clearly exploited the situation in order to demonize their enemy, which has brought with it much exaggeration.

In addition to this, the point that RFK is making was concocted to stereotype Middle Eastern men as being backwards and oppressive towards women. While in various Middle Eastern nations, there are a number of laws that restrict female freedom of movement, dress and expression, by no means are all Middle Eastern nations the same. For instance, in Turkey or even Lebanon, anyone who goes on holiday there will see with their own eyes how women are free to dress, work, and behave in a similar manner to their Western female counterparts. In the region, societal pressures and cultural norms will create certain restrictions for women in different contexts, which is made apparent when you visit different parts of Middle Eastern countries. If you are to travel to the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan for instance, you will see that women who live in the city of Amman are going to be treated completely different than if you were to travel to a more isolated village community. Similarly, Jewish Israeli women who live in Tel Aviv are treated starkly different to Jewish Israeli women who are living in Ultra-Orthodox Jewish neighborhoods located in Jerusalem; where women are often isolated to remaining indoors and even kept from attaining literacy in some instances.

Claim 3: Iran is castrating gays, while Israel has pride parades with 150,000 present

False: There are no known cases of Iran ever castrating gay people, nor would this be permitted under its legal system. Claims have been made that due to a law passed in 1987 in Iran, permitting sex-change treatments, Iranian parents have forced their gay children to undergo hormone therapy and even surgery’s in order to make their sexuality legal. The research on how extensive this problem is/was, is minimal to say the least, yet due to a statement from former Iranian President, where he stated that “in Iran, we don’t have this phenomenon [of gay people]” there have been concerns raised over the above mentioned claim.

When it comes then to Israel’s pride parades, you will be welcome to join such events, so long as you are not Palestinian of course, then your attempt to travel from the West Bank or Gaza would be stopped by armed soldiers with guns and potentially land you in a military prison. Israel has long used ‘pink washing’ to try and justify its crimes against the Palestinian people, by claiming that because it welcomes the LGBTQ+ pride parades, this somehow undoes its ongoing racial tier system. Ministers in the current Israeli government are also threatening to abolish the yearly pride parades and may soon succeed at this.

Claim 4: The Israeli military only killed terrorists in Jenin, it refrains from killing civilians

False: Israel killed 12 Palestinians during its recent invasion of Jenin, 8 of which were members of armed groups, the rest were verifiably civilians. RFK claims that not a single civilian was killed, which is a lie, he also made up the claim that all the 12 killed were involved in bomb making and planning attacks on Jewish civilians. So not only did he call 4 civilians terrorist, but justified their murders through more lies. He also spread the racist Israeli claim that “virtually everyone” living in Jenin supports terrorism and claimed that Israel went in surgically. He then went on to entertaining the idea that insulting idea that the Israeli army is more restrained than it has to be and is “putting its own soldiers in harms way”.

During that invasion, journalists, medical workers, children, women, and the elderly were all injured by Israeli fire. Airstrikes and military vehicles also targeted the critical infrastructure of the Jenin refugee camp. Not only this, but the UN rapporteur on Palestinian rights accused the Israeli army of committing possible war crimes. As for the claims about the conduct of Israeli forces in general, there has been no accountability for the murder of tens of thousands of Palestinian civilians by the Israeli army. There are only a handful of cases where Israeli soldiers have been held accountable for their abuses of Palestinian human rights in the past 15 years, one of them was for murdering a Palestinian on video and the soldier became a hero in Israeli society, donations totaling in the hundreds of thousands poured in to support the soldier. That same soldier went on to live a life of luxury, being regarded as an Israeli hero and only served a small stint in prison, far from a life-sentence. The Israeli army’s conduct is without question one of the worst on the planet, the ICC has a pending investigation into its warcrimes, countless UN and human rights reports document hundreds of thousands of violations of international law — to list the crimes committed would take a lifetime.

Claim 5: The Palestinian Authority pays people to kill Jews, Hamas has an official policy of genocide against Jews

False: The Palestinian Authority (PA) fully coordinates with the Israeli army, it has saved countless illegal Israeli settlers and soldiers, it arrests, tortures, harasses, and has even killed Palestinians in order to protect Israelis. The PA does not pay Palestinians to kill Jews, however, it does give financial support to Palestinian family’s in the West Bank if they are killed by Israeli soldiers or settlers, in addition to this it will give an allowance to families of political prisoners held illegally in Israeli military prisons. Even Israeli Prime Minister, Benjamin Netanyahu, has been recently calling for strengthening the PA; the PA’s President Mahmoud Abbas has repeatedly condemned Palestinian armed attacks on Israelis and rejects the idea that Palestinians should use arms to resist and protect themselves — despite their legal right to do so as an occupied territory, which is outlined by the Geneva Conventions and supported by the UN.

As for Hamas, in its original charter that was released in 1988 it used language such as it intended to push the Jews into the sea. In 2017, Hamas made its latest update to its charter, in which it rejects anti-semitism and all forms of racism and explicitly states its opposition to Zionism and Israel. Upon the founding of Hamas, in 1987, it had no armed wing and next to no power. It then dramatically changed over time and became the governing force in the Gaza Strip, where it ran in a democratic election. The Hamas organization also stated in 2017 its openness to a two-state solution. Hamas does not advocate the genocide of the Jewish people and has never carried out an attack against non-Israeli Jewish targets. Hamas explicitly seeks the liberation of Palestine through violent means (again, that which is their legal right as an occupied territory) but the idea that it seeks the genocide of the Jews is explicitly a lie.

Claim 6: All the Arab country’s had plans to exterminate the Jews in 1948 and sided with Hitler

False: The idea that is conjured up by pro-Israel propagandists, that attempts to depict the Arab World as being on the side of Hitler and of seeking to cause a Holocaust, is completely ahistorical. To begin with, there was no master plan to exterminate all the Jews in Palestine. The Arab nations that sent soldiers to fight against the newly declared Israel, did so after a third of the ethnic cleansing of the Palestinians had already occurred. Countries like Syria, Jordan and Lebanon all witnessed a massive surge of refugees into their lands and scrambled to put together what forces they had to fight on the side of the Palestinians. These nations were not capable of carrying out such an extermination campaign, nor is there any historical evidence to suggest that all the Arab nations came together to work on a genocidal plan.

The idea that the Arab world sided with Hitler’s Germany is also ridiculous. Jordan and Egypt for instance were very much on the side of the British, as were others like Saudi Arabia during the war. In the case of Syria for example, the nation only won independence from the French in 1945 — the year that WW2 ended — meaning that it quite literally could not have sided with Hitler, as he was dead. There were a handful of high-ranking Arab personalities who had collaborated with the fascists in Germany and Italy, yet, they did so out of a need for support in their liberation struggles against Britain and France; this context is key, as some leaders within communities under foreign rule were simply seeking to ally with the enemy of their enemy. The Grand Mufti of Jerusalem, Hajj Amin al-Husseini, for example, who received his position as a Palestinian leader with British authorization originally, did collaborate with the fascists, but had been driven out of Palestine and was in competition with others who sought to lead the Palestinian struggle. The Grand Mufti is now wrongfully blamed for coming up with the idea for the Holocaust by the likes of Benjamin Netanyahu, yet his influence was minuscule and he suffered to even receive meetings with Nazi officials for a period of his stay in Hitler’s Germany. All of this, however, is getting into unnecessary detail, because the point made by RFK is not rooted in history and is an invention of Zionist propaganda, not a debate on individual leading Arab personalities who had met with or received funds from fascists.

RFK Jr. also disputes the idea that Israel is an Apartheid regime. Israel’s top human rights organization, B’Tselem, in addition to the world’s two leading human rights groups, Human Rights Watch and Amnesty International, all say that Tel Aviv operates an Apartheid regime. Calling Israel an Apartheid regime is not hyperbole, it is not just students and professors on university campuses saying this, it is the mainstream human rights groups who have released lengthy documents — hundreds of pages long — not only documenting why Israel constitutes an Apartheid regime, but also rooting their argument in international legal standards. To second that, leading anti-Apartheid activists and freedom fighters — against South African Apartheid — such as the later Archbishop Desmond Tutu, not only compared Israel’s oppression of the Palestinians to Apartheid South Africa, but stated that the situation in Palestine-Israel is worse than what they suffered.

Robert F. Kennedy Jr’s pro-Israel views are more extreme than any other Democratic Party candidate and are rooted in historical distortions, sweeping generalizations, anti-Arab racism, lies about the Palestinians, in addition to conflation of Jews and the government of Israel. Such views expressed by Mr Kennedy are an indication that he will be a pro-war President if elected and will continue to unconditionally back Israel — even when it kills and injures Americans — with billions of US tax dollars.

https://twitter.com/TorahJudaism/status/1687354790479597568

 

Robert Inlakesh is a documentary filmmaker, journalist, writer, Middle-East analyst & news correspondent for The Last American Vagabond.

https://twitter.com/falasteen47

 

Connect with The Last American Vagabond

Cover image credit: DEZALB




Jon Rappoport: American Culture and TV Ads — The Missing Link

Jon Rappoport: American Culture and TV Ads — The Missing Link

 

“The common wisdom is people are sick of TV commercials. They mute them. They change the channel to avoid them.

“I don’t think that’s true.

“The basic missing link is: the ads aren’t just promoting products; the ads ARE products.”

 

American culture and TV ads; the missing link; I make another breakthrough

by Jon Rappoport
August 4, 2023

 

The common wisdom is people are sick of TV commercials. They mute them. They change the channel to avoid them.

I don’t think that’s true.

The basic missing link is: the ads aren’t just promoting products; the ads ARE products.

But viewers have no way of expressing their preferences. Hence we need this:

THE COMMERCIALS CHANNEL.

It could start out on cable. I think it’d soon make it to network television. Possibly it would wind up on YouTube, where it would garner far more viewers than NBC or CBS could attract.

The Commercials Channel (CC) has no shows. It plays commercials 24 hours a day. Back to back. In an unending stream.

AND VIEWERS VOTE FOR THEIR FAVORITE COMMERCIALS.

That’s the key.

That’s what the audience wants.

The ads are products. The viewers decide which ones are best.

The channel runs contests, all day and all night.

Here are 16 pharmaceutical commercials. Which one do you like best? Vote now.

Announce the winners.

Drug ads, fast food ads, insurance ads, bank ads, ads for movies, car ads, ads for lawyers, beer ads, soda ads…

All sorts of contests around the clock. VOTE FOR YOUR FAVORITE NOW.

And maybe you can bet.

Which of these 10 ads do you think will win? Lay your money down in the next 3 minutes.

You’d have 2 or 3 AI talking heads representing CC, on–air, hosting the contests.

CC runs 24/7. All ads all the time. That’s revenue for the channel.

Almost no overhead.

ADS ARE PRODUCTS.

LET THE PUBLIC DECIDE WHICH ONES THEY WANT TO “BUY.”

I mean, come on. Advertising is perhaps the most visible industry in America. Give it its due.

Instead of “Is the Chevy better than the Ford,” it’s “Is the Chevy ad better than the Ford ad.”

NOW you’re cooking.

Now you’ve got audience interest.

 

Connect with Jon Rappoport

Cover image credit: paulsteuber




Josh Mitteldorf: CO2 Is the Least of Our Worries | Yes, Ecosystems Are Collapsing. No, It Has Nothing to Do With CO2.

Josh Mitteldorf: CO2 Is the Least of Our Worries | Yes, Ecosystems Are Collapsing. No, It Has Nothing to Do With CO2.

 

“So, it’s true that we are at the warmest point in the last 100,000 years, but that has little to do with human activity. The 100,000 year cycle has a range of about 10o C, and human activity in the last 200 years is responsible for only about one 1o C. Compared to local effects in America and Europe during the Little Ice Age of the 18th century, the effect of all our burning of fossil fuels is lost in the noise. Global warming is a worldwide average, while the Little Ice Age was regional; but the point is that even in the last few hundred years, ecosystems have had to adapt to much larger changes than those that human activity has imposed.”

 

CO2 Is the Least of Our Worries
Yes, ecosystems are collapsing. No, it has nothing to do with CO2.

by Josh Mitteldorf, Unauthorized Science
August 4, 2023

 

Last week, Nobel physicist John Clauser came out of the Clausit to speak his own inconvenient truth about global warming and CONo good deed goes unpunished. Another physicist who was a personal hero of mine has expressed similar views. This is a big subject, and I don’t feel engaged enough with the issue to write a book, But I will say a few things about which I feel pretty certain, but to which Right Thinking People may take exception.

  1. Global ecosystems are indeed in crisis, and this is the result of human activity.
  2. But greenhouse gasses, CO2 and climate change are peripheral to this story. The net effect of CO2 emission is likely to be beneficial, if at all relevant.
  3. Environmental activism may be the most important movement on the planet today, and its diversion into a narrow focus on carbon is dangerous.
  4. Weather manipulation is a well-developed, sophisticated science being practiced on a global scale, without open scientific backing and without democratic consent. This, too, is a crime and a major danger.
1.  Ecosystem collapse

We know just enough to realize that ecosystems are complex and interdependent in more ways than we can understand. Ecosystems are robust, and the loss or replacement of a few species triggers adaptations so that the ecosystem continues in a new equilibrium. But ecosystems can also collapse if a keystone species is lost, or if it is sufficiently disrupted.

Some large fraction of the species on earth is either extinct or rapidly disappearing. It is impossible to offer a more quantitative estimate because most of the macroscopic species have not yet even been catalogued, and of the microscopic species, including bacteria and fungi, our understanding has barely scratched the surface.

At some point, ecosystems collapse and species disappear because other species on which they depend are disappearing. This is happening in large stretches of the world. Ocean life is seeking a new equilibrium after the pollution, overfishing, and the killing spree of the last 50 years in particular. Forests and wetlands the world over no longer support the diversity of life that they once harbored, and the collapse of biodiversity has a momentum that continues over decades.

Major reasons for this collapse include
  • habitat loss
  • deforestation
  • every war is an environmental disaster
  • widespread poisoning of insects, which are at the base of the animal food chain
  • insects are also pollinators, and plant life becomes fragile when insects disappear
  • draining of wetlands, mining of fossil water, and damming of rivers
  • deliberate targeting of apex predators, including lions, wolves, and whales
  • washing of topsoil into the rivers and oceans
  • wasteful practices in mining, agriculture, and industry
  • global travel, bringing invasive species that tend to homogenize ecosystems worldwide

Many people, consciously or otherwise, imagine a transhuman future in which the earth is paved over and food is grown hydroponically. We’ll eat lab-grown meat and live in a virtual paradise, even after we kill the ecosphere. This is a dangerous delusion! All life is interdependent. No species can survive outside an ecosystem. Bacteria manufacture chemicals crucial for life. Insects pollinate. Fungi recycle waste, make atmospheric nitrogen biologically useful, and connect trees underground. No species can exist without a rich ecosystem, and we don’t begin to understand all the connections that create a functional ecosystem. Mankind’s one attempt to create an artificial ecosystem, dubbed Biosphere 2, fell flat on its face within weeks.

In murdering nature, we are destroying the foundation for human life as well.

2.  Carbon dioxide has little to do with this
Anthropogenic global warming is a tiny fraction of the natural variations in earth’s temperature.

There are great natural cycles in the earth’s temperature. One of the best-documented is a cycle of about 100,000 years. The reasons are not well understood, but the present warm period in which human civilization has developed is not typical. Ice ages are typical. As recently as 12,000 years ago, the part of Pennsylvania where I live was under a glacier two miles thick. When these conditions inevitably return, it will create a far greater disruption to animal life and to human activity than anthropogenic warming. “We’re overdue for the next ice age,” and it may be that “global warming” is helping to stave off that destiny, at least temporarily.

So, it’s true that we are at the warmest point in the last 100,000 years, but that has little to do with human activity. The 100,000 year cycle has a range of about 10o C, and human activity in the last 200 years is responsible for only about one 1o C. Compared to local effects in America and Europe during the Little Ice Age of the 18th century, the effect of all our burning of fossil fuels is lost in the noise. Global warming is a worldwide average, while the Little Ice Age was regional; but the point is that even in the last few hundred years, ecosystems have had to adapt to much larger changes than those that human activity has imposed.

All the hype about a climate catastrophe based on carbon emissions is based on computer models that are woefully inadequate. These models have been wrong about the changes in the last 40 years since modeling began. They are no reliable guide to future climate response, though they are are continually being cited as authority. In the last 7 years in particular, CO2 emissions have continued and accelerated, atmospheric concentration has increased steadily, but temperatures have gone up and down.

Freeman Dyson makes the point that plants grow faster when there is more CO2 in the air, and when temperatures are warmer. Plants are the productive basis for all ecosystems, so ecosystems are enriched by higher CO2 levels. John Clauser makes the point that there is no evidence that a pattern of extreme weather events can be related to more CO2 in the air.

3.  The environmental movement has been derailed by the carbon narrative

Many people of good will are passionate about reducing their CO2 footprint. Many companies and organizations are profiting from scaring the public about climate change and selling solutions to enrich themselves such as carbon credits, or pushing nuclear power as a friendlier form of energy than burning wood, coal or petroleum products. (It is not.)

Government policies regarding energy could certainly be improved. The most effective thing we can do is to adopt technologies that use energy much more efficiently than we now do. Cars that get 200 miles per gallon of gasoline already exist, and public transit can be much more efficient.  Buildings can be designed so that they remain comfortable with much less energy input. Rocky Mountain Institute has been creatively documenting the necessarily policy changes for decades.

There is an urgent need for all of us to get back to advocating the diverse policy changes that are required to preserve and restore ecosystems, to slow and mitigate the Sixth Extinction. Reducing carbon emissions is dauntingly difficult, both technically and politically. Technically, because so much of what we do depends on fossil fuel energy, politically because the economic benefits of burning fossil fuels accrue locally, while the costs, if any, are spread across the globe.

Burning oil is associated with spills that devastate ocean life for decades; burning coal is associated with mountaintop removal; fracking causes earthquakes and pollutes groundwater. Cars cause smog and coal-burning power plants put mercury in the air. I’m not saying that fossil fuels are environmentally benign or that our dependence on carbon-based fuels is sustainable; only that atmospheric carbon dioxide is not the locus of the principal harms.

Focus on carbon emissions is the least effective kind of environmental advocacy, and it is probably counter-productive.

4.  Weather manipulation is everywhere, and it’s unacknowledged

Chemtrails are real, though the motivation for this vast, multi-billion dollar project is unclear. My best guess is that HAARP and similar large antennas are being used to push air masses around the globe with electrostatics and stratospheric heating, and that seeding the stratosphere with aluminum is part of a coordinated effort to send that radio energy to desired locations.

Dane Wigington has done more than anyone to document this. He has an encyclopedic knowledge of the phenomena, but I don’t believe he understands the motivation for weather manipulation. This is his introductory video.


Droughts and cold snaps are being weaponized to reduce agriculture output. Hurricanes are being steered toward inhabited areas. It may be that weather manipulation could be applied in a productive and broadly beneficial program, but evidence is that the opposite is being pursued.

I believe that the long drought in California, floods in Texas, and the recent transport of smoke from Quebec to blanket the densely populated Eastern US are all examples of weather manipulation. I believe that these engineered weather anomalies are being put forward as evidence that CO2 is deranging the weather. I realize that it is difficult to prove that any particular weather anomaly is engineered, but Wigington’s evidence convinces me.

But there is no doubt that the technology of weather manipulation has been under development for many decades, and present capabilities are unacknowledged. Who is manipulating the weather and what is motivating them? I think these are important, open questions.

The bottom line

Please redouble your advocacy for environmental protection in all its forms. Please educate yourself about chemtrails and geoengineering. And don’t worry about CO2.

 

Connect with Josh Mitteldorf

Cover image credit: Hans


See related:

Weather As A Force Multiplier:Owning The Weather In 2025 by USAF Air University, Air Command and Staff College 

Related articles found at Truth Comes to Light:

So-called ‘Climate Change’ as Seen by the Public Is Not the Problem; But Weather Geoengineering Is Destroying Everything on Earth?

Is The Sky Falling Or Is Just Weather Geoengineering “Killing Us Lightly”?

Magnetic Rain? [Short Video]: Documenting the Toxic Geoengineering of Our Skies

Geoengineering: Romanian General Emil Strainu on the Terrifying Possibilities of Geo-Warfare

Dane Wigington: Geoengineering Is Fueling Firestorm Catastrophes

Geoengineering, Toxic Skies & Plastic Rain in the US Rockies

Controlling Hurricane Ian? — The GeoEngineering Connection

Geoengineering: Fire And Ice

The Dimming, Full Length Climate Engineering Documentary




Vandana Shiva: Bill Gates and Silicon Valley Behind Push for ‘Farming Without Farmers, Food Without Farms’

Vandana Shiva: Bill Gates and Silicon Valley Behind Push for ‘Farming Without Farmers, Food Without Farms’
On the latest episode of Russell Brand’s “Stay Free,” scholar, environmental activist and food sovereignty advocate Vandana Shiva, Ph.D., discussed food fascism, the power of “philanthropy,” digital enslavement and how people can free themselves from this system.

by Brenda Baletti, Ph.D. , The Defender
August 2, 2023

 

“Human beings cannot have a relationship with nature, land and one another, it seems increasingly, without the intercedence of this corporate power,” comedian and political commentator Russell Brand told scholar and environmental activist Vandana Shiva, Ph.D., on the latest episode of his “Stay Free” podcast.

Brand asked Shiva, a food sovereignty and environmental activist, to explain how this corporate takeover of nature happened.

Shiva said the privatization of land and resources under colonialism was the first step in transforming nature into “either a mine or a dump.”

Today, she said, privatization has become so entrenched that mega-corporation Cargill can own every chicken, chicken production facility, and every input needed to raise chickens, and then dump all of its waste into public rivers.

The situation we face today could not have happened, she said, without the criminalization of farmers — for which she held media organizations like The Guardian responsible because they attack farmers instead of the corporations.

“If the drivers are the corporations,” she said, “you have to have the guts to bite the corporations. You don’t target the victims. The farmers are victims of this system.”

Who are the real ‘food fascists’?

Brand asked Shiva why the global uprising of farmers — from Sri Lanka and India to Germany, England and the Netherlands — against the globalization of agriculture had come to be cast as a right-wing idea by the press.

Shiva said Mussolini himself defined fascism as “the convergence of economic and political power.” “Food fascism,” she said, “is the recent control over our food systems by giant corporations and the billionaires.”

Under colonialism, the British controlled the land, she said, but they didn’t control the food. The advent of agricultural industrialization, the green revolution and globalization made it possible for corporations to take control of food.

The call for “food sovereignty,” she said, “came as the call as opposite to the food dictatorship and food fascism.”

Now, she said, those people want to complete the separation of people from the land that began with colonialism.

Today, they want “farming without farmers.”

Being able to plant a seed, input love, knowledge and sun and produce food, “is the only truly independent production system and it’s that freedom they want to attack,” Shiva said, because they are threatened by it.

So they discredit farmers by calling them “fascists” and “right wing.”

“And anybody who facilitates that is essentially doing the work of these globalists,” she said, “they’re the fascists.”

How ‘philanthropy’ buys control

Today, people who talk about the disproportionate power and influence that billionaires like Bill Gates have over global agriculture and health are regarded as “conspiracy theorists,” Brand said.

He asked Shiva to explain Gates’ rise to power in plain language and with facts.

Shiva said people like Gates became wealthy through neoliberal trade liberalization, where trade in information, in the software and other forms of data Gates produced, went completely untaxed.

Then, she said, they used that money “philanthropically” to gain control of other sectors.

By donating massive sums of money to the global seed bank, to the World Health Organization and to media organizations such as The Guardian and the BBC, Gates and other billionaires took control of those institutions.

It even gives them the power to control governments, she said, who have been made desperate for money through indebtedness.

Gates and Silicon Valley, she said, “are very big players in the fake food future of farming without farmers, food without farms.” And they get journalists such as The Guardian’s George Monbiot to promote it.

Chasing enslavement

Shiva said this vision is built on “an imagined promise of an imagined future that we are never gonna arrive at. Because when you get there, you’ll find it doesn’t belong to you. It belongs to them.”

The systems that support their vision of the future appear to offer us convenience, but in reality, she said, maintaining them takes all of our time.

Many indigenous people, she said, still have a lot of time to enjoy life “because they’re not chasing enslavement through consumption.”

Shiva wondered why people would want a “smart home,” where, for example, “the fridge will tell you your milk is getting old. How dumb are we getting that we can’t open the door of our fridge and know our milk is getting old?”

“All that is surveillance data,” she said.

And processing that data takes big servers. “The tiny bits of enslavement we are getting into is [producing] 4% of greenhouse gases, which is more than the aviation sector,” she said.

She added:

“So, not only is it a very foolish kind of slavery, it’s a huge ecological footprint on the planet. Yes. And we can’t afford it. So we have to learn to walk lightly.”

Data is the new oil

Brand said he was alarmed at the increasing pace of “desacralization” where people prioritize materialism over spirituality and lose control over their lives. He asked Shiva how she thought censorship, the inhibition of free speech and the ability of the media to shut down dialogue, fed into this process.

Shiva said it was part of “a system of total control,” that makes that control highly profitable.

What’s new in this system according to Shoshana Zuboff’s “The Age of Surveillance Capitalism” is that today, human beings themselves have been turned into raw material whose data can be extracted.

“That is the capital of today. Big data is the new oil, and then it’s used to manipulate us,” she said, adding “Any system that allows you the awareness of your real freedom must be censored.”

The strange thing, Brand said, is that this system of technological domination was sold to people as a way of empowering them and giving them their freedom.

Technology should be a tool, she said, but it “has been elevated to a god” and those opposed to that transformation are discounted, through Orwellian doublespeak, as “right wing.”

But, Shiva said, the last few years have shown there are three things people cannot give up:

“First, your ability to know and distinguish between truth and untruth. … And not allow post-truth to be projected as truth and the truth speakers to be projected as conspirators.

“The second is our ability to relate to each other without the intervention of a surveillance state and surveillance corporation.

“And third, because food is what makes us, it becomes our blood, ourselves, our brain.”

In other words, Brand said:

“Speak freely. Tell the truth. Communicate freely. Grow your own food. Don’t eat things grown in labs. Don’t eat bugs. And don’t listen to people who want to promote it.”

Watch here:



 

This article was originally published by The Defender — Children’s Health Defense’s News & Views Website under Creative Commons license CC BY-NC-ND 4.0. Please consider subscribing to The Defender or donating to Children’s Health Defense

Connect with The Defender




Technocensorship: The Government’s War on So-Called Dangerous Ideas

Technocensorship: The Government’s War on So-Called Dangerous Ideas

by John & Nisha Whitehead, The Rutherford Institute
August 1, 2023

 

“There is more than one way to burn a book. And the world is full of people running about with lit matches.”

—Ray Bradbury

What we are witnessing is the modern-day equivalent of book burning which involves doing away with dangerous ideas—legitimate or not—and the people who espouse them.Seventy years after Ray Bradbury’s novel Fahrenheit 451 depicted a fictional world in which books are burned in order to suppress dissenting ideas, while televised entertainment is used to anesthetize the populace and render them easily pacified, distracted and controlled, we find ourselves navigating an eerily similar reality.

Welcome to the age of technocensorship.

On paper—under the First Amendment, at least—we are technically free to speak.

In reality, however, we are now only as free to speak as a government official—or corporate entities such as Facebook, Google or YouTube—may allow.

Case in point: internal documents released by the House Judiciary Select Subcommittee on Weaponization of the Federal Government confirmed what we have long suspected: that the government has been working in tandem with social media companies to censor speech.

By “censor,” we’re referring to concerted efforts by the government to muzzle, silence and altogether eradicate any speech that runs afoul of the government’s own approved narrative.

This is political correctness taken to its most chilling and oppressive extreme.

The revelations that Facebook worked in concert with the Biden administration to censor content related to COVID-19, including humorous jokes, credible information and so-called disinformation, followed on the heels of a ruling by a federal court in Louisiana that prohibits executive branch officials from communicating with social media companies about controversial content in their online forums.

Likening the government’s heavy-handed attempts to pressure social media companies to suppress content critical of COVID vaccines or the election to “an almost dystopian scenario,” Judge Terry Doughty warned that “the United States Government seems to have assumed a role similar to an Orwellian ‘Ministry of Truth.’

This is the very definition of technofascism.

Clothed in tyrannical self-righteousness, technofascism is powered by technological behemoths (both corporate and governmental) working in tandem to achieve a common goal.

The government is not protecting us from “dangerous” disinformation campaigns. It is laying the groundwork to insulate us from “dangerous” ideas that might cause us to think for ourselves and, in so doing, challenge the power elite’s stranglehold over our lives.

Thus far, the tech giants have been able to sidestep the First Amendment by virtue of their non-governmental status, but it’s a dubious distinction at best when they are marching in lockstep with the government’s dictates.

As Philip Hamburger and Jenin Younes write for The Wall Street Journal: “The First Amendment prohibits the government from ‘abridging the freedom of speech.’ Supreme Court doctrine makes clear that government can’t constitutionally evade the amendment by working through private companies.”

Nothing good can come from allowing the government to sidestep the Constitution.

The steady, pervasive censorship creep that is being inflicted on us by corporate tech giants with the blessing of the powers-that-be threatens to bring about a restructuring of reality straight out of Orwell’s 1984, where the Ministry of Truth polices speech and ensures that facts conform to whatever version of reality the government propagandists embrace.

Orwell intended 1984 as a warning. Instead, it is being used as a dystopian instruction manual for socially engineering a populace that is compliant, conformist and obedient to Big Brother.

This is the slippery slope that leads to the end of free speech as we once knew it.

In a world increasingly automated and filtered through the lens of artificial intelligence, we are finding ourselves at the mercy of inflexible algorithms that dictate the boundaries of our liberties.

Once artificial intelligence becomes a fully integrated part of the government bureaucracy, there will be little recourse: we will all be subject to the intransigent judgments of techno-rulers.

This is how it starts.

First, the censors went after so-called extremists spouting so-called “hate speech.”

Then they went after so-called extremists spouting so-called “disinformation” about stolen elections, the Holocaust, and Hunter Biden.

By the time so-called extremists found themselves in the crosshairs for spouting so-called “misinformation” about the COVID-19 pandemic and vaccines, the censors had developed a system and strategy for silencing the nonconformists.

Eventually, depending on how the government and its corporate allies define what constitutes “extremism, “we the people” might all be considered guilty of some thought crime or other.

Whatever we tolerate now—whatever we turn a blind eye to—whatever we rationalize when it is inflicted on others, whether in the name of securing racial justice or defending democracy or combatting fascism, will eventually come back to imprison us, one and all.

Watch and learn.

We should all be alarmed when any individual or group—prominent or not—is censored, silenced and made to disappear from Facebook, Twitter, YouTube and Instagram for voicing ideas that are deemed politically incorrect, hateful, dangerous or conspiratorial.

Given what we know about the government’s tendency to define its own reality and attach its own labels to behavior and speech that challenges its authority, this should be cause for alarm across the entire political spectrum.

Here’s the point: you don’t have to like or agree with anyone who has been muzzled or made to disappear online because of their views, but to ignore the long-term ramifications of such censorship is dangerously naïve, because whatever powers you allow the government and its corporate operatives to claim now will eventually be used against you by tyrants of your own making.

As Glenn Greenwald writes for The Intercept:

The glaring fallacy that always lies at the heart of pro-censorship sentiments is the gullible, delusional belief that censorship powers will be deployed only to suppress views one dislikes, but never one’s own views… Facebook is not some benevolent, kind, compassionate parent or a subversive, radical actor who is going to police our discourse in order to protect the weak and marginalized or serve as a noble check on mischief by the powerful. They are almost always going to do exactly the opposite: protect the powerful from those who seek to undermine elite institutions and reject their orthodoxies. Tech giants, like all corporations, are required by law to have one overriding objective: maximizing shareholder value. They are always going to use their power to appease those they perceive wield the greatest political and economic power.

Be warned: it’s a slippery slope from censoring so-called illegitimate ideas to silencing truth.

Eventually, as George Orwell predicted, telling the truth will become a revolutionary act.

If the government can control speech, it can control thought and, in turn, it can control the minds of the citizenry.

It’s happening already.

With every passing day, we’re being moved further down the road towards a totalitarian society characterized by government censorship, violence, corruption, hypocrisy and intolerance, all packaged for our supposed benefit in the Orwellian doublespeak of national security, tolerance and so-called “government speech.”

Little by little, Americans are being conditioned to accept routine incursions on their freedoms.

This is how oppression becomes systemic, what is referred to as creeping normality, or a death by a thousand cuts.

It’s a concept invoked by Pulitzer Prize-winning scientist Jared Diamond to describe how major changes, if implemented slowly in small stages over time, can be accepted as normal without the shock and resistance that might greet a sudden upheaval.

Diamond’s concerns related to Easter Island’s now-vanished civilization and the societal decline and environmental degradation that contributed to it, but it’s a powerful analogy for the steady erosion of our freedoms and decline of our country right under our noses.

As Diamond explains, “In just a few centuries, the people of Easter Island wiped out their forest, drove their plants and animals to extinction, and saw their complex society spiral into chaos and cannibalism… Why didn’t they look around, realize what they were doing, and stop before it was too late? What were they thinking when they cut down the last palm tree?”

His answer: “I suspect that the disaster happened not with a bang but with a whimper.”

Much like America’s own colonists, Easter Island’s early colonists discovered a new world—“a pristine paradise”—teeming with life. Yet almost 2000 years after its first settlers arrived, Easter Island was reduced to a barren graveyard by a populace so focused on their immediate needs that they failed to preserve paradise for future generations.

The same could be said of the America today: it, too, is being reduced to a barren graveyard by a populace so focused on their immediate needs that they are failing to preserve freedom for future generations.

In Easter Island’s case, as Diamond speculates:

The forest…vanished slowly, over decades. Perhaps war interrupted the moving teams; perhaps by the time the carvers had finished their work, the last rope snapped. In the meantime, any islander who tried to warn about the dangers of progressive deforestation would have been overridden by vested interests of carvers, bureaucrats, and chiefs, whose jobs depended on continued deforestation… The changes in forest cover from year to year would have been hard to detect… Only older people, recollecting their childhoods decades earlier, could have recognized a difference. Gradually trees became fewer, smaller, and less important. By the time the last fruit-bearing adult palm tree was cut, palms had long since ceased to be of economic significance. That left only smaller and smaller palm saplings to clear each year, along with other bushes and treelets. No one would have noticed the felling of the last small palm.

Sound painfully familiar yet?

We’ve already torn down the rich forest of liberties established by our founders. It has vanished slowly, over the decades. The erosion of our freedoms has happened so incrementally, no one seems to have noticed. Only the older generations, remembering what true freedom was like, recognize the difference. Gradually, the freedoms enjoyed by the citizenry have become fewer, smaller and less important. By the time the last freedom falls, no one will know the difference.

This is how tyranny rises and freedom falls: with a thousand cuts, each one justified or ignored or shrugged over as inconsequential enough by itself to bother, but they add up.

Each cut, each attempt to undermine our freedoms, each loss of some critical right—to think freely, to assemble, to speak without fear of being shamed or censored, to raise our children as we see fit, to worship or not worship as our conscience dictates, to eat what we want and love who we want, to live as we want—they add up to an immeasurable failure on the part of each and every one of us to stop the descent down that slippery slope.

As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, we are on that downward slope now.

 

Connect with The Rutherford Institute

Cover image credit: CDD20




On the Elimination of Individual Thought and Dissent: Why Flatulent Cows Matter

On the Elimination of Individual Thought and Dissent: Why Flatulent Cows Matter

 

“The goal is not the elimination of cows; it’s the elimination of thinking and dissent. If we keep the above in mind as a process rather than an intended outcome, we have a greater ability to focus on the critical issue.

“To be sure, there are those entities that would like to eliminate red meat and feed people insects as a replacement. But that’s not the central issue here.

“The core objective is nothing less than the elimination of individual thought and dissent. It’s essential in the creation of a fully collectivist state, and it’s at the very heart of the overall globalist objective.”

 

Why Flatulent Cows Matter

by Jeff Thomas, International Man
July 31. 2023

 

We’ve all heard nonsense about cows presenting a danger to the continuance of life on earth – that methane gas from cow flatulence will bring on climate change faster than John Kerry’s jet.

Any thinking person (a sub-species of Homo sapiens that’s in decline but not yet endangered) would agree that the notion that an animal that’s existed in harmony with nature for over two million years could destroy the earth within fourteen years if they’re not exterminated is truly absurd.

And yet those whose ability to reason is on the decline are inclined to believe the claim. Presumably, these individuals are the same ones beginning to believe that men can have babies and that an individual can become something he or she is not simply by “identifying” as such.

But those of us who see the absurdity in such clearly nonsensical beliefs are disinclined to laugh as we observe that these concepts are being disseminated by globalist governments through a compliant media… and, worse, are being accepted by more than a few people.

As a case in point, recently, a publication – Natural News – did a piece entitled, “13 Nations agree to engineer global FAMINE by destroying agriculture, saying that producing food is BAD for the planet.”

In that article, they describe a conference led by US Climate Czar John Kerry, in which representatives from thirteen countries are stated to have committed to a diminished cow population worldwide to combat climate change.

Well, that conference did take place, and a topic of discussion was methane produced by cows, and thirteen attendees did agree that measures of some sort were needed.

But it is not the case that thirteen countries have enacted legislation to eliminate cows.

We might take a step back here and examine what actually occurred. In so doing, we may not only learn whether or not red meat will soon be eliminated globally; we might also gain some insight into how globalist governments seek to achieve their ends.

In most countries, the role of Minister for the Environment is a lowly ministerial position, given to a loyal party member as a token. Most Ministers of the Environment pontificate a fair bit but rarely implement significant change. So, let’s follow the thread of what has taken place.

  • John Kerry contacts the Environmental Ministers in a host of “lesser” countries around the world on the vague premise of “making a difference.” They’re pleased to take part, as Kerry gives them higher visibility and legitimizes their otherwise rather pointless jobs.
  • A conference is held at a four-star hotel somewhere for a few days. Everybody listens to the speakers wringing their hands over the dangers of climate change, and each minister tries to get their photos taken with John Kerry.
  • There’s very little in the text of the keynote presentation by Kerry – mostly vague comments about the dangers of methane and the need for each country to commit to making a difference.
  • At the end of the conference, the attendees are proud to sign a document that’s devoid of detail but says that they’re all in agreement in hoping to make a difference.
  • A press release is issued, showing all the ministers together, stating that methane is dangerous and that all the countries are in agreement regarding the concept of a worldwide methane control policy.
  • The message received by the public is that all the experts agree on whatever they’re saying, although what they’re saying is still quite unclear.
  • A publication such as Natural News publishes an article with a suitably alarming title.
  • The perceived overstatement by Natural News is regarded as a provocation by controlled information sources such as Wikipedia to alert the public. Interestingly, whenever a publication, group, or individual is discredited by Wikipedia, they always do so in the very first line of their description, i.e.,
  • “Natural News is a far-right, anti-vaccination conspiracy theory and fake news website known for promoting alternative medicine, pseudoscience, disinformation, and far-right extremism.”

That’s essentially the process that’s now consistently being utilized by globalists.

Wikipedia now divides all publications, pundits, and others as either truth tellers or far-right conspiracy advocates. The real issue here isn’t farting cows any more than it’s whether men can have babies. These are mere exercises.

So, if we take a step back and consider an overview of what this all means – why it’s so prevalent and why the process is being so consistently utilized – we might be conclude the following:

The issues are absurdly extreme for a reason. The objective is not the achievement of the issues themselves. It is the alteration of the psyche of the populace. 

Once the public has spent several years having their heads divided between “far-right extremism” and what’s approved by the Ministry of Truth, enough people will have been converted into non-thinking proles that a bill can be put forward with the broad and intentionally non-specific objective to outlaw far-right extremism in all its forms.

In order to assure the passage of the bill, a significant majority of people will have to have already reached the stage in their new thought process that they feel that the law is not only justified but essential. Those people who can still think will be expected to comply.

The goal is not the elimination of cows; it’s the elimination of thinking and dissent. If we keep the above in mind as a process rather than an intended outcome, we have a greater ability to focus on the critical issue.

To be sure, there are those entities that would like to eliminate red meat and feed people insects as a replacement. But that’s not the central issue here.

The core objective is nothing less than the elimination of individual thought and dissent. It’s essential in the creation of a fully collectivist state, and it’s at the very heart of the overall globalist objective.

 

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: Alexas_Fotos




Incandescent Light Bulb Ban Starts on August 1; Gas Stove Ban Coming Next

Incandescent Light Bulb Ban Starts on August 1; Gas Stove Ban Coming Next

by Chris Menahan, InformationLiberation
Jul. 30, 2023

 

Biden’s Department of Energy plans to mete out “the maximum civil penalty” against manufacturers that “knowingly distribute” illicit light bulbs which violate their new efficiency standards.

From Politico, “While everyone was yelling about gas stoves, the incandescent light bulb went away”:

It’s lights out for the incandescent bulbs that people have known, changed and singed their hands on for 140 years.

The modern descendant of Thomas Edison’s most famous legacy is set to formally meet its demise in the U.S. at the end of this month, despite years of efforts by Republicans to extend its lifespan. As of Aug. 1, the Energy Department will fully enforce new efficiency regulations that the old bulbs can’t meet, effectively prohibiting their retail sale.

[…] The endgame for old light bulbs came quietly — by early this year, lawmakers had mostly moved on to squabbling over gas stoves and other newer targets of the Energy Department’s efficiency efforts.

With the Biden regime jailing their opposition en masse, transifying kids, threatening to start WWIII and throwing open the borders, certain issues have to take a back seat.

Over a decade ago, though, the light bulb issue shone bright for tea party conservatives and GOP presidential hopefuls, who accused Democrats of trying to limit consumers’ choices.

CFL bulbs — the alternative at the time — literally induced migraine headaches in otherwise healthy people. When they broke, a hazmat team was needed to clean up the mercury they released.

Republican lawmakers even succeeded in passing legislation to block the Obama administration from carrying out the new efficiency standards — sometimes to the irritation of large light bulb manufacturers that had spent big bucks preparing for them.

[…] The fight zigged, then zagged: The Obama administration took action in its waning days to finalize the bulb efficiency requirements, only for former President Donald Trump — who once proclaimed energy-efficient bulbs made him “look orange” — to halt the move. But DOE pushed the rules to the finish line last year after President Joe Biden came into office with a climate agenda that includes a focus on energy efficiency measures.

Trump blocking the ban was one of the highlights of his presidency.

DOE completed the action last April, but full enforcement of the rule is set to begin Aug. 1. The transition away from the inefficient bulbs has been underway for more than a year, as the department provided flexibility for manufacturers and retailers to comply with the new standard.

That fight may be settled, but the larger fight over energy efficiency standards is still looming. Republican lawmakers in recent months have continually derided the Biden administration’s efficiency actions on everything from more efficient stoves to laundry machines and dishwashers.

For example, the Energy Department is proposing new efficiency standards covering gas stoves as well as electric stoves and ovens. Advocates say the rule would save consumers money on natural gas and lessen a source of greenhouse gas pollution, but critics point to DOE estimates that only about half of gas stoves now in the market could meet the proposed standards — something they contend amounts to a de-facto ban.

[…] DOE said it intends to seek the maximum civil penalty against [light bulb] manufacturers that knowingly distribute products that violate the standards. The department has previously issued civil penalties worth tens of thousands of dollars for companies violating its energy conservation standards.

Over half the country still appears to be using mostly incandescents.

Forty-seven percent of U.S. households reported using LED bulbs for most indoor lighting in 2020, according to the Energy Information Administration, up from only 4 percent in 2015.

It’s still not clear what incandescents will survive this ban. There’s some exemptions for certain specialty bulbs but I can’t find a definitive list anywhere.

Incandescents are still the best bulbs there are as the light they produce is 100 on the color rendering index — meaning it’s identical to sunlight — whereas the best LEDs are only around 90.

Nonetheless, as is now the norm, the plebs must be made to suffer to advance the “liberal world order.”

 

Connect with InformationLiberation

Cover image credit: josch13




How Green Is Lab-Meat?

How Green Is Lab-Meat?

by Navdanya International
July 28, 2023

 

Synthetic foods are the next generation of ultra-processed foods made through the hyper-processing of industrially produced crops, a combination of processed and artificial ingredients and completely new ingredients produced through synthetic biology, (or so called ‘precision fermentation’), and cell-culturing. These products use a combination of gene editing used for the precision fermentation, industrial ingredients, and traditional commodity supply chains to create a product that only further entrenches our already highly problematic and destructive globalized food system.

Why lab-made meat and dairy is not an option:

  • These false solutions will only reinforce and continue industrialization- which is the real culprit of the climate crisis. The issue of unsustainable food systems comes from the inherent unsustainability of the industrialization of all areas of food and agriculture. Whether that be through the industrial raising of animals through CAFOs (Concentrated Animal Farm Operations) where animals are force-fed industrially grown, pesticide-laced grains and soy, or the further industrialization of food now being made in a lab. These two things stem from the same corporations, the same mentality and the same denial of the industrial, globalized food systems devastation on the planet.
  • Lab-cultured food is a fake solution that aims to replace products without challenging the power structures that  underlie the corporate, industrialized agricultural model. It moves attention away from the real solutions offered by the growing regenerative agriculture movement and disregards the role of small producers and food communities in shaping our food systems. Regenerative, agroecological farming practices have the potential to sequester 52 gigatons of carbon dioxide, as they can harvest 733- 3000 kg or more of carbon dioxide per hectare, per year from the atmosphere, equivalent to the amount needed to stay below the 2 degree centigrade range. By increasing carbon absorption, organic farming has a lower climate impact than industrial agriculture.
  • The dichotomy does not stand as industrial CAFOs versus lab-meat. This false binary erases the role of agroecological small farmers, and pastoralists and treats them as if they were the same as industrial agriculture. Both CAFOs and lab-cultured meat concentrate power into the hands of a few. While agroecological systems are based on generations of ecological knowledge, local food culture and ecological resilience that support local food sovereignty.
  • The true solution is agroecological systems that work in harmony with nature, that regenerate ecosystems and ensure the health and well-being of plants, animals and humans. Ecological systems based on integration of agroecosystems promote food sovereignty, food democracy. The real solution does not lie in creating substitutes for food, it lies in understanding the needs of the ecosystems we are embedded in and healing our connection with nature.
  • The same circle of businessmen and corporations that pushed for the Green Revolution, and the industrialization of food systems, are the very actors behind these lab-made products. Actors such as Bill Gates, Jeff Bezos and meat industry giants like Tyson foods, JBS, Cargill, Nestlé, and Maple Leaf Foods are behind the push for this new market where investment has now reached $2.78 billion. synthetic and lab-cultured foods are quickly becoming a next means to consolidate even more power and profit into the hands of a few food giants without holding them accountable to the consequences of the system they perpetuate.
  • Handing over control of our food to a handful of multinational companies only makes us more dependent on them, creating a fully integrated food and agricultural system, controlled by profit. This erodes our food sovereignty, and food security, while having potentially detrimental consequences on local food systems, and ecological systems. What is at risk is the final elimination of small farmers, of traditional agroecological practices, and traditional diets.  To follow through with the massification of lab-grown meat would mean the final, complete separation of food from nature.
  • These products still rely on long-distance globalized supply chains, and derivatives of the industrial food system. For example, to run, these bioreactors require large amounts of nutrients for cells to grow and reproduce. Given the limited production of individual amino acid formulations suited for cell culture globally, one hope is to use industrially cultivated soy to derive the full amino acid profile necessary for cell growth. This would work to only further entrench the already destructive cultivation of soy. Therefore defining these products as environmentally friendly, and sustainable, is just a greenwashing ploy to profit off a new generation of environmentally conscious consumers who are growing critical of the grim realities of industrial food production.
  • It is unlikely these products will be any healthier or safer to eat. These ultraprocessed foods are made from refined ingredients which means that they lack many of the nutrients found in traditional foods. Nutrients and fortifiers will need to be added as separate ingredients and cannot be absorbed as effectively as they would from whole foods, and can cause harmful interference with other nutrients. As a result our bodies may derive less health benefits from them and therefore they should not be part of a nutritious and environmentally friendly diet and should be classified as Junk Food.
  • According to a report by the FAO, the complex process of cell-culturing also leaves many opportunities for contamination from toxic heavy metals, organic pollutants, cleaning products, toxic bacteria, additives and preservatives, left-over antibiotics, growth hormones or other chemical or material contaminates. The presence of any of these contaminants, whether individual or in combination, would pose serious food safety risks to consumers.

In the end, these “Frankenstein foods” dismantle our connection with nature and in doing so, they ignore the role of natural processes and the laws of ecology that are at the heart of real food production. By promoting the illusion that we live outside of nature’s ecological processes, this new technology will only serve to increase corporate control over food and health, accelerate the collapse of local food economies and further destroy food democracy. The real solution to the environmental, and health crises should be based on an active rejuvenation and regeneration of the planet by working with ecological processes through agroecological and regenerative farming practices.

Real food made through real farming is the direct result of a process of care for the land, animals, and fellow humans that celebrates the connection between food and life. It protects the life of all beings on Earth while also nourishing our health and wellbeing. Artificial food is a direct manifestation of years of food imperialism and colonization that has denied our diverse food knowledge, food cultures, and disregarded the biodiversity of the earth and its ecosystems.

 

Connect with Navdanya International

Cover image credit: kartynas




This Pro-Mask “Study” Is Why You Should NEVER “Trust the Science”

This Pro-Mask “Study” Is Why You Should NEVER “Trust the Science”

by Kit Knightly, OffGuardian
July 27, 2023

 

Last week it was reported that the Australian state of Victoria may be considering “permanent” facemask mandates to achieve “zero-Covid”.

Now, we don’t need to get into the personal liberty implications of such a law, or  the near-infinite supply of evidence that masks don’t work to prevent the transmission of respiratory disease.

They don’t work, they never worked. Mandating them was a political move designed to make the fake Covid “pandemic” appear real, and their continued use is a symptom of brainwashing or a by-product of chronic virtue signaling.

The mask debate, such as it was, is over.

No, the only aspect of this development worth talking about is the “evidence” used to support the position – and trust me, the quotes are entirely justified.

The “study” which claims to demonstrate the benefits of permanent masking was published in the Medical Journal of Australia last week and titled “Consistent mask use and SARS‐CoV‐2 epidemiology: a simulation modelling study”.

“Simulation modelling study” is very much the key phrase there. For those who don’t know,  “simulation modelling studies” involve feeding data into a computer programme, then asking it to form conclusions.

Clearly, they are only as reliable and useful as the data you use. In fact, you can very easily make them produce any result you want by feeding in  the “right” (bad) data.

In this particular modelling study they started out by telling the computer that cloth masks reduce transmission by 53% and respirators reduced it by 80%:

Odds ratios for the relative risk of infection for people exposed to an infected person (wearing a mask v not wearing a mask) were set at 0.47 for cloth and surgical masks and 0.20 for respirators

Essentially, they told their computer that masks prevent disease…and then said “ok, computer, since you now know masks prevent disease  – what would happen if everybody wore them all the time?”

The computer then told them – obviously  – that nobody would get sick.

Because they made it logically impossible for it to say anything else.

But there’s a bit more to it.

The next layer of interest is where they got their input data from.

After all there have been dozens of studies done on masks over the years, 98% of which say masks don’t work.

So, did our guys they choose a peer-reviewed real-time control trial relying on lab-tested double-blind results?

Perhaps one of the dozen or so such trials listed in our 40 facts article?

Did they maybe average the results of multiple studies?

No, they used a phone survey.

One phone survey.

This phone survey, published last year and conducted in late 2021.

In this *ahem* “scientific study”, they had people randomly call up those who had recently been tested for “Covid”, ask them “did you wear a mask?” and then published the conclusion – “masks reduce transmission by 53%” – as if they meant something.

Interestingly, if you scroll down to the “affiliations” section you can see that one of the authors is a Pfizer grant recipient.

Rather more troublingly – and for some reason not mentioned as a conflict of interest – is that the whole study was produced by the California Board of Public Health.

California had already had a mask mandate in place for almost a year before this “study” was even started.

What we have here is not “science” it’s a computer model based on the results of a subjective phone survey conducted by a government agency with a vested interest. It is entirely meaningless, and yet is published in journals and cited by “experts”, perhaps even used as the basis of introducing new laws.

This is how “The ScienceTM” works. And, although Covid has maybe opened many people’s eyes to this issue, it is far from unique to “Covid”. You are just as likely to find this kind of “research” published on any topic – especially those that serve a political purpose – and have been for years if not decades.

Stanford Professor of evidence-based medicine,  John Ioannidis wrote a paper called “Why Most Published Research Findings Are False”, and that was back in 2005.

This has nothing to do with the “pandemic”, and everything to do with the difference between science and “The Science”. So let’s examine that distinction.

“Science” is an approach to the world. A rational method for gathering information, testing new ideas and forming evidence-based conclusions.

“The Science” is a self-sustaining industry of academics who need jobs and owe favours.

An ongoing quid pro quo relationship between the researchers – who want honors and knighthoods and tenure and book deals and research grants and to be the popular talking head explaining complex ideas to the multitudes on television – and the corporationsgovernments and “charitable foundations” who have all of those things in their gift.

This system doesn’t produce research intended to be read, it creates headlines for celebrities to tweet, links for “journalists” to embed, sources for other researchers to cite.

An illusion of solid substantiation that comes apart the moment you actually read the words, examine the methodology or analyse the data.

Self-reporting surveys, manipulated data, “modelling studies” that spit-out pre-ordained results. Affiliated-authors paid by the state or corporate interests to provide “evidence” that supports highly profitable or politically convenient assumptions.

This mask study is the perfect example of that.

Interlacing layers of nothing designed to create the impression of something.

That’s why they want you to trust it, rather than read it.

 

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image credit: Engin_Akyurt




Dr. Reiner Fuellmich With Dr. Gerd Reuther: Medical History Shows Vaccines Never Did Anything but Harm

Dr. Reiner Fuellmich With Dr. Gerd Reuther: Medical History Shows Vaccines Never Did Anything but Harm

 

 [English translation is embedded in video.]

 

Medical History Shows, Vaccines Never Did Anything but Harm

by Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, International Crimes Investigative Committee (ICIC)
July 22, 2023

 

In this episode of ICIC, Dr Reiner Fuellmich talks to Dr Gerd Reuther, medical doctor and radiologist, about the historical background of medicine and the genesis of diseases and epidemics over the centuries, from the pre-Christian era to the present day.

He points out numerous connections and parallels to so-called pandemics of antiquity and current events, i.e. the “Corona pandemic”. The criers of these “pandemics” have always used the same methods earlier and to this day: the creation of fear and panic.

It sheds light on the role of the Church and its representatives and how far their powerful arm has reached in science, research as well as medicine at all times. These areas were entirely under the control of the Church, and even today these exercises of power continue.

One could call this behaviour opportunistic, since throughout history the Church has always turned to those who were in power. It is currently showing this pattern again, namely when it unhesitatingly fired up the Covid vaccination propaganda. Compared to then, not much has changed:

It was and is about trivial monetary claims to power and ownership, manipulating people for their own benefit, keeping them in dependencies, e.g. on the pharmaceutical industry, and exerting control over life itself.

Historical events such as outbreaks of plague and cholera are analysed and examined for their truthfulness. The history of the origin of “vaccination” and what the belief in its effectiveness is based on are also discussed in detail.

Since when have disease patterns and symptoms been defined and documented, and why were there no “civilisation diseases” in the past? How can it be that not all people fall ill with one and the same “pathogen” and what role do the improper handling of toxins and the natural immune system play?

Dr Gerd Reuther and his wife Dr phil. Renate Reuther, historian and English specialist, have summarised all these medical-historical findings and events compactly on 150 pages in a book entitled “Hauptsache Panik” (Panic is the main thing), which, despite its historical focus, is more up-to-date than ever. For only those who know the past can shape the present and change the future.

 

Connect with ICIC — telegram | odysee | rumble

Cover image credit: OpenClipart-Vectors & squarefrog




Funny How the UFO Narrative Coincides With the Race to Weaponize Space

Funny How the UFO Narrative Coincides With the Race to Weaponize Space

by Caitlin Johnstone, Caitlin’s Newsletter
July 27, 2023

 

If Wednesday’s House Oversight subcommittee hearing on UFOs had happened ten years ago instead of today, it would have shaken the world. Imagine someone from 2013 hearing congressional testimonies about “routine” military pilot encounters with giant flying tic tacs, floating orbs, 300-foot red squares, and cubes in clear spheres zipping around in ways that surpass all known earthly technology by leaps and bounds, or about secret government possession of otherworldly aircraft they’re trying to reverse engineer and the dead bodies of their non-human pilots, or about the possibility that these creatures are not merely extraterrestrial but extra-dimensional. Their jaws would have hit the floor.

Now in 2023 we’ve been getting incrementally drip-fed bits and pieces of these stories for six years, so the scene on Capitol Hill on Wednesday didn’t have the impact it would’ve had in 2013. It’s making headlines and getting attention, but not as much as Sinead O’Connor’s death or people’s thoughts on Barbie and Oppenheimer. The response from the general public could be described as a collective nervous laugh and a shrug.

People scroll past the footage from the hearing on social media, go “Whoa, that’s weird,” and move on with their lives. The information’s going in, but just kind of on the periphery of mainstream consciousness. Maybe next year they’ll show us something that would’ve been even more shocking to someone in 2013 than Wednesday’s hearing would’ve been, and it will be met with the same nervous laugh and shrug by the people of 2024.



Of course in the circles I tend to interact with, the response is a bit different. People who are highly skeptical of the US war machine tend to also be highly skeptical of this UFO narrative we’ve been seeing since 2017.

“Distraction” is a word you hear a lot. “It’s just a distraction from ______”, where “______” is whatever hot story they personally happen to be fascinated by at the moment. I personally don’t buy that explanation; the new UFO narrative wasn’t just cooked up at the last minute to distract from current headlines, it’s been unfolding for six years, and people aren’t even paying that much attention to it. The empire doesn’t tend to orchestrate spectacular events as a “distraction” anyway; the adjustment of public attention tends to take the much more mundane form of agenda setting in the media, where some stories receive more attention than others based on what’s convenient for the oligarchs who own the press.

I also see people theorizing that this is all a ploy to ramp up the US military budget. There could totally be something to that, but again this narrative has been unfolding for six years and so far the military budget has just been swelling in the usual yearly increments as always.

Don’t get me wrong, though — I’m as skeptical about this thing as anyone. For one thing the origins of the mainstream UFO narrative which began in 2017 were steeped in extensive distortion, dishonesty and journalistic malpractice, and were carried forward by shady intelligence operatives like Lue Elizondo. David Grusch, who made by far the most sensational claims at Wednesday’s congressional hearing with his tales of dead aliens and reverse-engineered UFOs, is himself an insider of the US intelligence cartel.

But for me what really stinks about all this UFO stuff is the timing. Here we are in the early stages of a new cold war which features a race to militarize space, and we’re hearing congressional testimony about mysterious vehicles posing a threat to US airspace which have the ability to go up and down between earth and space very quickly. That smells off.

I mean, does it really sound like a coincidence that we’re seeing all these news stories about UFOs and aliens at the same time we’re seeing news stories about a race between the US and China and Russia to dominate space militarily? A Foreign Policy article from last year blares the headline “China and Russia Are Catching Up to U.S. in Space Capabilities, Pentagon Warns” with the subheading “The militarization of space is picking up pace.” These warnings are echoed in articles by Defense One and Time. An article on the United Nations website from last year carries the title “‘We Have Not Passed the Point of No Return’, Disarmament Committee Told, Weighing Chance Outer Space Could Become Next Battlefield.” A 2021 report from the war machine-funded Center for Strategic and International Studies titled “Defense Against the Dark Arts in Space: Protecting Space Systems from Counterspace Weapons” warns of the urgent need to build more space weapons to counter US enemies. A Global Times article from last year carries the title “Chinese experts urge avoidance of space weaponization amid commercial space capability deployment in Ukraine.”

These stories about the space militarization race aren’t getting the attention the much more entertaining UFO stories are getting, but it seems likely that those who are responsible for moving the war machinery around are paying a lot more attention to the former than the latter. The US Space Force took its first steps toward becoming a reality in 2017, the same year these mainstream UFO stories started coming out, with the explicit purpose of countering Russia and China.

And it just seems mighty suspicious to me how we’re being slowly paced into this UFO narrative (or UAP narrative for those hip to the current jargon) right when there’s a mad rush to get weapons into space. I can’t actually think of any other point in history when the timing of something like this would have looked more suspicious.

So for me the most disturbing parts of the UFO hearing were the parts that could wind up facilitating the agenda to militarize space, like when this phenomenon was framed as a “national security” threat or when it was mentioned that they can transition from earth to space very rapidly.

When asked by congressman Glenn Grothman “do you believe UAPs pose a threat to our national security?”, former Navy commander David Fravor answered with an unequivocal yes. A few minutes later Fravor described these vehicles as being able to “come down from space, hang out for three hours and go back up.”

When asked by congressman Andy Ogles whether UFOs could be “collecting reconnaissance information” on the US military, all three witnesses — Grusch, Fravor, and former Navy pilot Ryan Graves — answered in the affirmative. Asked by Ogles if UFOs could be “probing our capabilities,” all three again said yes. Asked if UFOs could be “testing for vulnerabilities” in US military capabilities, all three again said yes. Asked if UFOs pose an existential threat to the national security of the United States, all three said they potentially do. Asked if there was any indication that UFOs are interested in US nuclear technology, all three said yes.

Ogles concluded his questioning by saying, “There clearly is a threat to the national security of the United States of America. As members of Congress, we have a responsibility to maintain oversight and be aware of these activities so that, if appropriate, we take action.”

When asked by congressman Eric Burlison if “there has been activity by alien or non-human technology, and/or beings, that has caused harm to humans,” Grusch said he couldn’t get into specifics in a public setting (a common theme throughout the hearing), but said that “what I personally witnessed, myself and my wife, was very disturbing.”

Grusch would complicate this cryptic statement a few minutes later by saying that he’s never seen a UFO. How this statement doesn’t contradict his previous statement about having witnessed harmful behavior from non-human technology and/or beings was not made clear.

So you’ve got US policymakers being told that there are vehicles using technology not of this world routinely violating US airspace and posing an existential threat to US national security, and that these craft can go from earth to space and back at will, and that they need to help make sure their nation can address this threat.

What conclusions do you come to when presented with that kind of information? If you’re a lawmaker in charge of facilitating the operation of a highly militaristic empire, you’re probably not going to conclude that it’s time to hold hands and sing Kumbaya. You’re probably eventually going to start thinking in terms of military technology.

One of the most important unanswered questions in all this UFO hullabaloo is, why now? Why are we seeing all this movement on “disclosure” after generations of zero movement? If these things are in fact real and the government has in fact been keeping them secret, why would the adamant policy of dismissal and locked doors suddenly be reversed, allowing “whistleblowers” to come forward and give testimony before congress? If they had motive to keep it a secret this entire time, why would that motive no longer be there?

If you ask the online UFO community, many will essentially take credit for the whole thing, saying the most powerful war machine ever assembled has reversed its policy of total opacity because of “pressure” applied by disclosure activists. This doesn’t pass the smell test; the most powerful empire in history isn’t reversing course on a longstanding policy of blanket secrecy because of internet forums and FOIA requests.

So why now? Why the drastic and sudden shift from UFOs and aliens being laughable tinfoil hat nonsense to the subject of serious congressional inquiries and widespread mainstream media coverage?

Well, the timing of the race to militarize space might provide an answer to the “why now?” question. Is it a coincidence that this new UFO narrative began its rollout in 2017, around the same time as the rollout of the Space Force? Are we being manipulated at mass scale about aliens and UFOs to help grease the wheels for the movement of war machinery into space? How likely is it that by pure coincidence this extraplanetary narrative timed out the way it did just as the US empire makes a last-ditch grab at unipolar planetary domination?

I don’t know. I do know that if I’m assigning degrees of probability, “Extraterrestrial or extradimensional beings are here and take a special interest in us and sometimes crash their vehicles and our government recovered them but kept them a secret but suddenly decided not to be so secretive about them anymore” ranks significantly lower than “Our rulers are lying and manipulating to advance their own interests again.”

I am 100 percent wide open to the possibility of extraterrestrials and otherworldly vehicles zipping around our atmosphere. What I am not open to is the claim that the most depraved institutions on earth have suddenly opened their mind to telling us the truth about these things, either out of the goodness of their hearts or because they were “pressured” by UFO disclosure activists.

I don’t know what the hell is going on with this UFO thing, but I do know the drivers of the US empire have an extensive history of manipulating and deceiving at mass scale to advance imperial agendas. And I do know that at this crucial juncture in history where the empire is clinging to planetary domination with the tips of its fingernails, there are a lot of imperial agendas afoot.

 

Connect with Caitlin Johnstone

Cover image credit: 0fjd125gk87




James Corbett on the Weaponization of Psychology

James Corbett on the Weaponization of Psychology

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
as interviewed by ANTIJANTEPODDEN
July 26, 2023 (interview July 23, 2023)

 



VIDEO COURTESY ANTIJANTEPODDEN: WEBSITE / ODYSEE

 

via ANTIJANTEPODDEN: Investigative journalist James Corbett has investigated how psychology is being weaponized to target dissidents.

In this episode he explains the absurdity of the old diagnoses of anarchia, which was too much love for freedom, and drapetomania, which was the mental illness of slaves running away from their masters.

Over the last three years, we have seen a medical doctor being diagnosed and force medicated for corona insanity. This was because of his resistance to the government narrative in Switzerland. We have also seen an increased willingness to pathologize conspiracy theorists, and to label people as domestic terrorists for using their right to share their opinions.

Even though the methods used against us are ugly, and the majority just go along uncritically, James Corbett shows examples of how modeling disobedience can dramatically turn the situation around.

Show Notes:

AntijantepoddenWebsite / Substack

Dissent Into Madness:
• 1. The Weaponization of Psychology
• 2. Crazy Conspiracy Theorists
• 3. Projections of the Psychopaths
• 4. Escaping the Madhouse

Bill Goats and the Forest:
• billgoats.com

Related AJP episode:
• AJP 47 | James Corbett – COVID-19 is a step towards a prison state

Other related sources:
› huffpost.com: My Gentle, Intelligent Brother Is Now A Conspiracy Theorist And His Beliefs Are Shocking
› nytimes.com: How to Talk to Friends and Family Who Share Conspiracy Theories
› thetimes.co.uk: Help! My mother is a conspiracy theorist
› vogue.com: I’m Worried About Losing Touch With My Conspiracy Theorist Parents
› apa.org: Speaking of Psychology: Why people believe in conspiracy theories, with Karen Douglas, PhD
› sciencefocus.com: A psychologist explains why people believe in conspiracy theories
› faculty.lsu.edu: Why We Fall for Conspiracies
› technologyreview.com: How to talk to conspiracy theorists—and still be kind
› psychcentral.com: Why Do Some People Believe in Conspiracy Theories?
› businessinsider.com: A psychologist reveals why people cling to conspiracy theories during uncertain times
› aftenposten.no: Når mamma blir konspirasjonsteoretiker
› vl.no: Ingen vaksine mot overtro
› forskning.no: Fire forsker-råd: Slik snakker du med en konspirasjons­teoretiker
› ndla.no: Hvorfor er konspirasjonsteorier farlige?

› Kakistocracy (search)
› George Brock Chisholm (search)
› World Federation For Mental Health (search)
› Psychiatry of Enduring Peace and Social Progress – Chisholm and Sullivan – 1946
› John Rawlings Rees (search)
› The Tavistock Institute (search)
› The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations
› Tavistock Institute: Social Engineering the Masses
› Strategic Planning for Mental Health – J R Rees

› March 1930 – Street Interviews on Women’s Fashion, NYC (real sound)
› 1929 Interviews With Elderly People Throughout The US
› 1966: Children imagine life in the year 2000
› Zombie Kid Likes Turtles
› Her danser Erna til «Rompa mi»
› Folk på gata i Kristiansand om munnbind – NRK
› Interviewed the Worst Street in Downtown LA

› The deliberate dumbing down of America : a chronological paper trail
› Dumbing us down – The hidden agenda of compulsory education
› Weapons of mass instruction
› H-1B Immigration: America’s Secret Weapon – Michio Kaku
› MASS PSYCHOSIS – How an Entire Population Becomes MENTALLY ILL

› Dr. Robert Hare – The Psychopathic Corporation
› Hare Psychopathy Checklist (Original) (PCL-22)
› The Sociopath Next Door – Martha Stout
› American Psycho – Axe scene
› The Corporation – Full Documentary – 2003
› The Corporation (trailer)

› Jonas Gahr Støre – Prime Minister of Norway lying on TV #flashback
› De gode bombene – NRK
› Royal Norwegian Air Force F-16 Fighter Jets
› NATO bombing mistake kills Libyan civilians
› NATO Secretary General with the Prime Minister of Norway Jonas Gahr Støre, 30 MAY 2023

› Dr. Benjamin Rush American Psychiatry (search)
› Anarchia excess of the passion for liberty (search)
› Samuel A Cartwright (search)
› Drapetomania (search)
› Oppsitional Defiance Disorder (search)
› DSM psychatry (search)
› It is no measure of health to be well adjusted to a profoundly sick society. (search)

› Dr. Thomas Binder Interview – How Psychology Was Weaponized To Suppress Truth In The Age Of COVID
› Dr. Thomas Binder FORCED Into Hospital After Speaking Against COVID Narrative – Ask Dr. Drew
› Dr. Thomas Binder, MD

› WTC7 Collapse (HD)
› Josie Harris Reads Letter from Guantanamo Bay
› Capitol Police OPEN GATE for Trump Protesters REVIEW
› c1939_deber1118 40
› c1939_de1024 1
› c1939_uknoconsent 1
› c1939_uklonspeakc 1
› c1939_eswostreet 1
› c1939_deber1118 27
› c1939_deber1118 25
› c1939_uklonoct 3
› c1939_frpametro 1

› Narita Airport leads the way in Japan with biometrics
› World Health Organization Flag Animation
› The World of Soviet Psychiatry
› Sluggish schizophrenia
› Medicine Standing on its Head”

› The Justin Trudeau effect: famous faces who’ve fallen for the Canadian PM’s charm
› head up your own ass (search)
› CIA Mind Control – CIA Secret Experiments
› MK-Ultra: The shocking Cold War experiments hidden by the CIA – BBC REEL

› corbettreport.com: Acceptance of and Commitment To Freedom – #SolutionsWatch
› Acceptance and commitment therapy (search)
› Steven C. Hayes, PhD
› corbettreport.com: Davi Barker on Authoritarian Sociopathy
› Authoritarian Sociopathy: Toward a Renegade Psychological Experiment

› Asch Conformity Experiment (search)
› Asch Conformity Experiment
› The Milgram Experiment (search)
› The Milgram Experiment (1962)
› Obedience Theory
› Last speech of Nicolae Ceaușescu, 21. December 1989
› National Opt-Out Day Called Against Invasive Body Scanners
› ‘National Opt-Out Day’: Will a protest against body scanners work?
› Leadership From A Dancing Guy

› LIVE: Press Conference on Surrender of US Sovereignty to the World Health Organization
› Making Medicare: The History of Health Care in Canada
› Freeland says some protesters’ bank accounts frozen

› c1939_itrebibbia 2
› c1939_ozfacepav 1
› c1939_rsbelgrade78 3
› c1939_rsmanstreet 1
› c1939_oznightout 1

 

Connect with James Corbett

Cover image credit: CDD20




Elon, X, and the Epitome of a Front Man

Elon, X, and the Epitome of a Front Man
The illusion of choice will make your financial enslavement less painful

 



by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
July 26, 2023

 

Elon Musk announced over a year ago that he planned to convert Twitter into an everything app like China’s WeChat. An app to do everything including online banking and finance.

Last April Musk announced that Twitter Inc. has been renamed to X Corp., he created a new Artificial Intelligence company known as X.AI and he partnered with eToro for stock and crypto exchange.

The media would have you believe that Elon Musk is an independent billionaire genius whose dream is to revolutionize banking. But this story is demonstrably false. The facts tell us that Elon Musk is a frontman for the same old same old. But because he says there are only two genders he has gained the trust of a radicalized people in a time of war, without ever having to explain his lies.

Musk says he grew up poor but his family was rich with emeralds and had a history of abuse and witchcraft. Telltale signs of multi-generational mind control.

Musk received tens of thousands of dollars from his parents to launch his first business venture. A digital phone book known as Zip2. Outside coders were hired to write the entire thing because Elon couldn’t code. Zip2 sold for millions and went nowhere. But Elon made 22 million dollars and with the help of the mainstream media, launched his new persona as a quirky pop-star genius. He then acquired x dot com and announced he would create an online bank known as X. He partnered with banking experts who all left the company after accusing Elon of lying to the media about the product. Which is all he did.

Elon Musk is believed to have co-founded PayPal. This is false. In 2000 Musk sold his failing x dot com business to Confinity, a company founded in 1998 by Peter Thiel and Max Levchin. All Musk reportedly did there was insist on changing the company’s name to X. He was forced out but somehow managed to get them to agree in writing to remove all references to ‘founders’ from the company website.

Musk made nearly two hundred million off the sale of PayPal, a company that he contributed nothing to, and then used that money along with the illusion of being a successful businessman co-founder to buy his way into Tesla.

Tesla Motors was founded in 2003 by Marc Tarpenning and Martin Eberhard, who developed the Tesla Roadster. When Tesla accepted millions from Elon, it came with the condition that he be named chairman of the company. Even though he only contributed money, Musk was unable to hide his anger that the media wasn’t giving him credit for Tesla Motors. And after forcing Eberhard out of the company he re-wrote their history to have himself listed as an original co-founder.

This obvious fake persona of a billionaire quirky genius has worked so well that few even question SpaceX. The official story is that Elon, who has absolutely no experience with rocket science, came up with the idea for SpaceX while traveling to Russia with the CIA’s Michael Griffin of In-Q-Tel. Shortly after this conversation, Griffin was made administrator of NASA where he launched the COTS program that privatized NASA’s rocket program. And awarded two-hundred and seventy-eight million dollars to SpaceX who had never made or flown any rockets. Musk then partnered with rocket engineer Tom Mueller, who went on to produce rocket technology that has clearly been developed for years in the private sectors of the military-industrial complex.

Elon’s companies have received billions in government subsidies over the last two decades. Money that was later spent on the purchase of Twitter. Where he immediately began the process of turning it into an everything app with its own banking system. Or rather, the ruling class cabal that pulls his strings is turning Twitter into an everything app with its own banking system. And that should be alarming. But he says there are only two genders, and families are good, and people love a hero.

They don’t need to chip you to control you. We already have iris scanners and palm scanners. A cashless society will do the job. And for many, Elon’s X will be preferable to Amazon’s palm scanners. The illusion of choice will make your financial enslavement less painful.

 

Connect with Greg Reese




Arthur Firstenberg on Electrosmog: “The Ability to Use a Mobile Device Everywhere on Earth Means That Every Square Meter of the Earth Must Be Irradiated at All Times.”

Arthur Firstenberg on Electrosmog: “The Ability to Use a Mobile Device Everywhere on Earth Means That Every Square Meter of the Earth Must Be Irradiated at All Times.”

 

Image credit Goumbik, pixabay

 

Electrosmog: A Policy Brief

Guidance to governments, legislators, environmental organizations, schools, and religious, political, and community leaders.

by Arthur Firstenberg, Cellular Phone Task Force
July 26, 2023

 

Guidance to governments, legislators, environmental organizations, schools, and religious, political and community leaders.  
If your organization wishes to join in supporting this brief, please email us.
Key Points
  1. The study of electricity should be restored to biology and medicine.
  2. Personal wireless communication must be phased out because the radiation that carries all the messages is destroying life on earth.
  3. Mobile phones must be replaced with landline phones, WiFi with ethernet cables, and other wireless consumer devices with devices connected by wires and cables.
  4. Mobile phone antennas and masts must be phased out and removed.
  5. Wireless technology must be removed from vehicles.
  6. Smart meters must be replaced with analog meters.
  7. Smart highways, smart cities, and the Internet of Things must cease being developed and deployed.
  8. Radar stations must be limited in number, location and power.
  9. Radar (microwave) ovens should not be used for heating food.
  10. An international treaty on electrosmog, addressing radiation on land, in the oceans, and in space, must be drafted.
Introduction

Electrosmog is the totality of the electric fields, magnetic fields, and electromagnetic radiation that bathes us 24/7 from all electrical and electronic devices, electric wires, power lines, and wireless devices and antennas. With wired communication, information is transmitted via the wires, and the electromagnetic fields (EMFs) and radiation are unintentional. Proper engineering can reduce these unwanted fields and radiation to a minimum.

By contrast, with wireless communication, the radiation is the product. Radiation substitutes for wires in transmitting information.

Wireless means radiation. The ability to use a mobile device everywhere on earth means that every square meter of the earth must be irradiated at all times. Mobile devices operate in the microwave spectrum, with the result that the entire planet is now swimming in a sea of microwave radiation that is millions to billions of times stronger than the radiation from the sun and stars with which life evolved (1).

Life is based not only on chemistry but more fundamentally on electricity (2, 3). The unimpeded flow of electrons is essential to the functioning of our nerves, heart, and metabolism (3). Interference with these electric currents causes neurological diseases, heart disease, metabolic diseases such as diabetes, and cancer (4).  Organisms that have a very high metabolism, such as bees and other insects, are being wiped out (5, 6). Thousands of studies document the devastating effects of wireless radiation on mammals, birds, insects, amphibians, and forests (7).

Because EMFs are not a foreign substance to living beings, a toxicology model does not apply and there is not a dose response: reducing the power does not reduce the effect. Even a signal that is almost immeasurably weak can interfere with normal biological functioning (8). “While the dose rate/SAR concept is adequate for description of acute thermal effects, it is not applicable for chronic exposures to N[on]T[hermal] M[icro]W[aves].” (9). Even at near-zero power levels, microwave radiation has been found to change the structure of DNA (10) and alter brains waves (11). Some studies have even found an inverse dose response. When the power of the radiation was reduced 1000-fold, damage to the blood-brain barrier increased (12). A review of 113 studies found that radiation with the lowest power tended to cause the greatest ecological damage (5). In another review of 108 experimental studies, a lower exposure level tended to have a greater biological effect, and the difference was highly significant (p < 0.001) (13).

The damage done to our health and our world by wireless devices and their infrastructure is caused not only by the microwave carrier frequencies, but also by the low-frequency modulation and pulsations that carry the transmitted information. “Thus modulation can be considered as information content embedded in the higher frequency carrier wave that may have health consequences beyond any effect from the carrier wave directly” (14). No matter what the carrier wave, the modulation is the same because it has to carry the same information. Therefore using light as the carrier wave, as is being done over short distances with LiFi, or using sound as the carrier wave, as is being done in the oceans, does not reduce the harm.

The finding that only a single two-hour exposure to a mobile phone during their lifetime, even when the power of the phone was reduced 100-fold, caused permanent brain damage in young rats (15) makes it likely that we are raising, and perhaps have already raised, a generation of children with brain damage. There is no question but that this must cease, and that cell phones are not safe at any power level, at any distance from the head, and for any duration.

Purpose of This Document

This policy brief provides an overview of an immediate threat to life on earth—even more immediate than climate change—that has been allowed to get completely out of control because it has been completely ignored. The source of the threat is a technology to which everyone has become addicted, and which, during the past two and a half decades, has become firmly entrenched in every aspect of life. Although more scientific studies have been published on the health and environmental effects of EMFs than on almost any other pollutant except for mercury and tobacco smoke, the impact of all this research upon public policy to date has been zero. Average citizens still do not even know that a mobile device emits radiation. Much less do they suspect that it is causing them brain damage or threatening their life and their future on this planet. The purpose of this brief is to outline actions that are required to be taken by political leaders, religious leaders, environmental organizations, public schools, medical schools and doctors to educate the public and to begin to dismantle this existential threat to the earth.

Essential Actions Required by National and International Leaders and Organizations

I.     An International Treaty or Convention on Electrosmog must be adopted by all nations

The number of antennas and their distance from people and wildlife must be strictly regulated. The elements of an international treaty should include the following:

A.   Phasing out and eventual prohibition of personal
wireless devices, including mobile devices and WiFi

At present there are about 15 billion mobile devices and 6 million mobile phone masts; the earth cannot survive this. Private individuals should not have the right to irradiate their neighbors. Businesses should not have the right to irradiate their patrons.

B.  Limiting antennas and devices that emit radiation to radio and television stations, emergency services such as police and fire departments, and radar for civil defense, aviation and shipping

C.  Limiting the location, number, and power of civil defense radars

The present situation of unlimited power has allowed 3-billion-watt radars such as PAVE PAWS, which has irradiated millions of people on both coasts of the United States for more than four decades (16).

A five-year investigation into the health and environmental effects of a civil defense radar in Latvia after the end of the Cold War resulted in the decommissioning and removal of that radar. School children in the area—even children who lived 20 kilometers away—had impaired motor function, memory and attention, reduced lung capacity, and elevated white blood cell counts. The entire local population suffered from headaches, sleep disturbances and elevated white blood cells. Human reproduction was affected: 25 percent fewer boys than girls were born during the years the radar operated. Chromosome damage was found in local cows. Nest-boxes near the radar were occupied by extremely low numbers of birds. The average growth rings of trees during the years of the radar’s operation were only half as wide as before the radars were constructed, and study of pine cones revealed the trees were aging prematurely. Seedlings in the area grew into deformed plants with reduced reproductive capacity (17, 18, 19, 20,21, 22, 23, 24).

D.  Phasing out weather radars, as they do more harm than good

There are an estimated 1,500 of these extremely powerful installations scattered throughout the world. Each of the 160 NEXRAD radars in the United States has an EIRP (Effective Isotropic Radiated Power) of 32 gigawatts (32 billion watts) (25). These radars are heavily irradiating people and wildlife, and are neither reliable nor essential to weather forecasting (26).

E.  Prohibition of antennas inside national parks, wildlife preserves and protected nature areas

A 2015 report to UNESCO detailed the devastating impact of communication antennas inside a World Heritage Site in Australia. When a telecommunication tower atop Mount Nardi began to convert its antennas from analog (2G) to digital (3G) in 2002, a steady increase in species diversity suddenly reversed and became a steady decrease in species diversity. In 2002 insect populations and diversity began to decline. In 2009, enhanced 3G was installed, along with an additional 150 pay television channels. 27 bird species promptly left the mountain, and insect volumes and species dropped dramatically. In late 2012 and early 2013 4G was installed, and 49 more bird species promptly left the mountain.

“From this time, all locally known bat species became scarce, 4 common species of cicada almost disappeared, as well as the once enormous, varied population of moths & butterfly species. Frogs and tadpole populations were drastically reduced; the massive volumes and diverse species of ant populations became uncommon to rare… [F]rom 70 to 90 % of the wildlife has become rare or has disappeared from the Nightcap National Park within a 2-3 km radius of the Mt. Nardi tower complex” (27).

F.  Prohibition of the manufacture of vehicles with wireless technology and radar

WiFi, Bluetooth, wireless ignitions, wireless CarPlay, wireless tire pressure monitors, and radar are just a few of the in-car systems that have turned the small, reflective metallic bodies of vehicles into intensely microwaved chambers. To these are being added in-car 5G hotspots that are turning many new vehicles into autonomous mobile devices, using vehicle-to-vehicle, vehicle-to-pedestrian, vehicle-to-network, and vehicle-to-highway communication.

G.  Prohibition of smart meters, smart highways, smart cities, and the Internet of Things

Smart meters are being placed on every home and business in the world, and are turning all the wiring inside the walls of every home and business into a radiating antenna.

Microchips and antennas are being placed in every machine, every appliance, and almost every consumer product in the world as part of the Internet of Things, and there are predictions of as many as one trillion antennas communicating wirelessly with one another in the near future. These all irradiate the entire population at close range, including inside their homes and businesses, without any choice and without possibility of escape.

H.  Halting the launch of satellites, and phasing out most private, public and military use of space

The functioning of all living organisms is regulated by their electromagnetic environment, including the magnetic field of the earth, the vertical electric field between earth and ionosphere, the global electric circuit, the Schumann resonances, etc. If the electromagnetic environment of the earth is altered, life on earth will not long survive.

Both the number of satellites in orbit and the radiation they emit are completely out of control. Some satellites already have an effective radiated power of 83 million watts. Some are capable of emitting 5,000 individual beams. More than 8,000 satellites are already in orbit, and thousands more are being sent into space by near-daily rocket launches. Not only are they exposing every square meter of land and oceans to their radiation, but they are polluting the global electric circuit, which includes our bodies, with all of their pulsations and modulation patterns.

This is degrading all of life and causing pandemics, extinctions, and forest die-off, which cannot be successfully addressed without halting the radiation in and from space (4).

I.  Prohibition of underwater wireless communication in the oceans 

Along with national parks and nature preserves, the oceans should be absolutely protected from radiation.

Governmental, commercial and military interests have been collaborating to create Smart Oceans and build the Internet of Underwater Things. To do this they are building cell towers on the ocean floor, putting relay antennas in the depths of the ocean, and deploying smart ships, smart submarines, and underwater robots. The goal is to enable broadband wireless communication from any point on or in the oceans to anywhere else on the planet, up to and including “real-time video streaming from underwater” everywhere in every ocean (28).

RF radiation is being used in the oceans for short- to medium-range communication, and is destroying ocean life the same way it is destroying land-based life. Acoustic waves are being used for long-range communication, and are deafening fish and ocean mammals with sound as loud as 202 decibels.

The fishing industry is also using underwater radar to locate and capture fish with a precision and on a scale that is devastating to ocean life (29).

All underwater wireless communication and radar must be halted.

II.     Churches and other religious buildings should remove antennas and WiFi networks from their premises

Churches have become a prime target by telecommunications companies for the installation of antennas, often hidden inside false chimneys or fake bell towers. These antennas earn a lot of money for churches but turn them into hazardous environments for their worshippers and visitors.

III.     Schools must remove mobile phone masts and WiFi routers and prohibit mobile phones

Schools are among the most intensely irradiated environments in society today, consequently the worst and unhealthiest places for our children to spend their growing years. Every classroom has one or more WiFi routers in it, together with dozens of children sitting in close proximity to one another every day all day, all of them with cell phones and wireless computers, irradiating one another at all times. Like churches, schools are earning money renting their properties to telecommunications companies for the installation of mobile phone masts.

All masts and all WiFi antennas must be removed from all school properties, and children must be prohibited from bringing cell phones to school.

IV.     Religious, political and community leaders should encourage congregations and constituencies to get rid of their cell phones and other wireless devices

Nothing is more important today in the stewardship of our planet.

V.     Medical schools should incorporate education on EMFs into curriculums, and classes in electromagnetic health should be required for continuing education

The books and studies are there by the tens of thousands. They sit on the shelves of medical school libraries gathering dust and being ignored. All that is required is to organize them into the curriculum and the base of knowledge required of every physician in order to earn a medical degree.

VI.     Environmental organizations must form chapters on electrosmog, and must cease using wireless technology as a tool for monitoring and research

The rapid declines in biodiversity and species populations cannot be successfully addressed without reducing electromagnetic pollution which is causing half or more of the observed declines. As long as electrosmog is not addressed head-on, all of these problems will continue to be blamed on other things: climate change, land use, deforestation, pesticides, etc. Some of the means now being used to combat climate change, for example solar and wind energy, are worsening electrosmog and further decimating species. Some of the means to study these problems, for example GPS and radio tracking of wildlife, are diminishing wildlife instead.

All antennas must be removed from protected nature areas, wildlife preserves, and oceans. Radio tracking devices are deadly (30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37). They must be removed from all wildlife and not put on any more animals, birds, insects, or fish.      

VII.      Non-ionising radiation must be regulated by national environmental agencies with no conflicts of interest

In many countries, radio frequency (RF) radiation from telecommunications facilities and devices is regulated by the same agency that is charged with promoting those facilities and devices. This is an obvious conflict of interest.

Most governments defer to guidance from the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) or the World Health Organization, which also defers to the ICNIRP. The ICNIRP is not an environmental agency. It is a self-appointed private organization with 14 members answerable to no one (38). Its exposure guidelines are based on heating only, as though there were no other effects. In the United States, the agency that both regulates and promotes the telecommunications industry is the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). Like the ICNIRP, the FCC bases its exposure guidelines for humans on heating effects only, and completely ignores the effects on the environment.

RF radiation should be regulated transparently within each nation by their own environmental agencies based on the totality of science. It should be addressed within the UN not by the World Health Organization, but by the United Nations Environment Programme, which presently does not address it at all. And it should be subject to an international treaty and a convention on Electrosmog, as per point 1.

Conclusions

The policy considerations presented in this brief have their basis in science, and in the protection of human rights, human health and the environment. They were developed in response to an emergency situation in which the irradiation of the earth is accelerating at such a rapid rate that it has become the single most urgent threat to life on earth today. The recommended actions by political leaders, religious leaders, organizations, schools, and government agencies provide a path to health and survival.

References
  1. Aleksandr S. Presman. Electromagnetic Fields and Life (NY: Plenum Press 1970), p. 31, Figure 11.
  2. Robert O. Becker. The Body Electric (NY: Morrow 1985).
  3. Sulman, Felix Gad. The effect of air ionization, electric fields, atmospherics and other electric phenomena on man and animal. American Lecture Series, Publ. no. 1029 (Charles C. Thomas Publisher, Springfield IL, 1980; 398 pp.).
  4. Arthur Firstenberg (2020). The Invisible Rainbow: A History of Electricity and Life (White River Junction, VT: Chelsea Green 2020, 560 pp.).
  5. Cucurachi et al. A review of the ecological effects of radiofrequency electromagnetic fields (RF-EMF). Environment International 51: 116-140 (2013). https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0160412012002334/pdfft?isDTMRedir=true&download=true”download=true
  6. Alain Thill. Biologische Wirkungen elektromagnetischer Felder auf Insekten. Umwelt Medizin Gesellschaft 33(3) Suppl: 1-27 (2020). https://kompetenzinitiative.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Thill_2020_Review_Insekten.pdf
  7. Blake Levitt, Henry C. Lai and Albert M. Manville II. Effects of non-ionizing electromagnetic fields on flora and fauna, Part 2 impacts: how species interact with natural and man-made EMF. Reviews on Environmental Health 37(3): 327-406 and Supplements 1-4 (2021). https://doi.org/10.1515/reveh-2021-0050
  8. Allan H. Frey. Is a toxicology model appropriate as a guide for biological research with electromagnetic fields? Journal of Bioelectricity 9(2): 233-234 (1990). https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/pdf/10.3109/15368379009119811
  9. Igor Belyaev. Duration of Exposure and Dose in Assessing Nonthermal Biological Effects of Microwaves. In Dosimetry in Bioelectromagnetics (CRC Press 2017), pp. 171-184.
  10. Y. Belyaev et al. Resonance effect of millimeter waves in the power range from 10–19 to 3 x 10–3 W/cm2 on Escherichia coli cells at different concentrations. Bioelectromagnetics 17: 312-321 (1996). https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1002/(SICI)1521-186X(1996)17:4%3C312::AID-BEM7%3E3.0.CO;2-6
  11. William Bise. Low power radio-frequency and microwave effects on human electroencephalogram and behavior. Physiological Chemistry and Physics 10(5): 387-398. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/751078/
  12. Bertil R. R. Persson et al. Blood-brain barrier permeability in rats exposed to electromagnetic fields used in wireless communication. Wireless Networks 3: 455-461 (1997). https://link.springer.com/content/pdf/10.1023/a:1019150510840.pdf
  13. Andrew Wood, Rohan Mate and Ken Karipidis. Meta-analysis of in vitro and in vivo studies of the biological effects of low-level millimetre waves. Journal of Exposure Science & Environmental Epidemiology 31: 606–613 (2021). https://www.nature.com/articles/s41370-021-00307-7.pdf
  14. Carl F. Blackman. Evidence for disruption by the modulating signal. BioInitiative Report, Section 15, July 2007. https://bioinitiative.org/wp-content/uploads/pdfs/sec15_2007_Modulation_Blackman.pdf
  15. Leif G. Salford et al. Nerve cell damage in mammalian brain after exposure to microwaves from GSM mobile phones. Environmental Health Perspectives 111(7): 881-83 (2003). https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC1241519/pdf/eh
  16. Paul Brodeur. The Zapping of America (NY: W.W. Norton 1977).
  17. Guntis Brūmelis, Valdis Balodis, and Zanda Balode. Radio-frequency electromagnetic fields: The Skrunda Radio Location Station case. Science of the Total Environment 180: 49-50 (1996). https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/0048969795049134
  18. Anton Kolodynski and Valda Kolodynska. Motor and psychological functions of school children living in the area of the Skrunda Radio Location Station in Latvia. Science of the Total Environment 180: 87-93 (1996). https://wifiinschools.com/uploads/3/0/4/2/3042232/kolodynski.pdf
  19. Zanda Balode. Assessment of radio-frequency radiation by the micronucleus test in bovine peripheral erythrocytes. Science of the Total Environment 180: 81-85 (1996). https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/0048969795049231
  20. Liepa and Valdis Balodis. Monitoring of bird breeding near a powerful radar station. The Ring 16(1-2): 100. Abstract (1994).
  21. Valdis Balodis et al. Does the Skrunda Radio Location Station diminish the radial growth of pine trees? Science of the Total Environment 180: 57-64 (1996). https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/0048969795049207
  22. Tūrs Selga and Maija Selga. Response of Pinus sylvestris L. needles to electromagnetic fields: cytological and ultrastructural aspects. Science of the Total Environment 180: 65-73 (1996). https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/0048969795049215
  23. Magone. The effect of electromagnetic radiation from the Skrunda Radio Location Station on Spirodela polyrhiza (L.) cultures. Science of the Total Environment 180: 75-80 (1996). https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/0048969795049223
  24. Microwave News. Latvia’s Russian radar may yield clues to RF health risks. September/October, pp. 12-13 (1994). https://www.microwavenews.com/sites/default/files/sites/default/files/backissues/s-o94issue.pdf
  25. National Telecommunications and Information Administration. NTIA Spectrum Compendium, 2700-2900 MHz, 1 September 2014. https://www.ntia.doc.gov/files/ntia/publications/compendium/2700.00-2900.00_01SEP14.pdf
  26. Advantages and disadvantages of weather radar. https://lidarradar.com/info/advantages-and-disadvantages-of-weather-radar
  27. Mark Broomhall. Report for the United Nations Educational Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) and International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) (2017). https://ehtrust.org/wp-content/uploads/Mt-Nardi-Wildlife-Report-to-UNESCO-FINAL.pdf
  28. Arthur Firstenberg. Cell towers on the ocean floor. 12 January 2022. https://cellphonetaskforce.org/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Cell-towers-on-the-ocean-floor.pdf
  29. Lindy Weilgart. The Impact of Ocean Noise Pollution on Fish and Invertebrates. OceanCare and Dalhousie University. 1 May 2018. https://thegreentimes.co.za/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/impact-of-ocean-noise-pollution-on-fish-and-invertebrates.pdf
  30. Jason D. Godfrey and David M. Bryant. Effects of radio transmitters: review of recent radio-tracking studies. In: M. Williams, ed., Conservation Applications of Measuring Energy Expenditure of New Zealand Birds: Assessing Habitat Quality and Costs of Carrying Radio Transmitters (Wellington, New Zealand: Dept. of Conservation), pp. 83-95 (2003).
  31. David Mech and Shannon M. Barber. A Critique of Wildlife Radio-Tracking and Its Use in National Parks. Jamestown, ND: U.S. Geological Survey, Northern Prairie Wildlife Research Center (2002). https://eplanning.blm.gov/public_projects/nepa/51689/167135/203600/E2._A_CRITIQUE_OF_WILDLIFE_RADIO-TRACKING.pdf
  32. John C. Withey et al. Effects of tagging and location error in wildlife radiotelemetry studies. In: Joshua J. Millspaugh and John M. Marzluff, eds., Radio Tracking and Animal Populations (San Diego: Academic), pp. 43-75 (2001).
  33. Roger Burrows, Heribert Hofer, and Marion L. East. Demography, extinction and intervention in a small population: the case of the Serengeti wild dogs. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London B 256: 281-92 (1994). https://royalsocietypublishing.org/doi/epdf/10.1098/rspb.1994.0082
  34. Roger Burrows. Population dynamics, intervention and survival in African wild dogs (Lycaon pictus)Proceedings of the Royal Society of London B 262: 235-45 (1995). https://royalsocietypublishing.org/doi/abs/10.1098/rspb.1995.0201
  35. Jon E. Swenson et al. Effects of ear-tagging with radiotransmitters on survival of moose calves. Journal of Wildlife Management 63(1): 354-58 (1999).
  36. Moorhouse, Tom P. and David W. Macdonald. Indirect negative impacts of radio-collaring: Sex ratio variation in water voles. Journal of Applied Ecology 42: 91-98 (2005). http://bearproject.info/old/uploads/publications/A20%201999%20Effects%20of%20ear%20tagging_moose%20.pdf
  37. Reader’s Digest. The Snow Tiger’s Last Stand. November 1998.
  38. Buchner K, Rivasi M. The International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection: Conflicts of interest, corporate capture and the push for 5G. European Parliament report. Brussels June 2020https://ehtrust.org/the-international-commission-on-non-ionizing-radiation-protection-conflicts-of-interest-corporate-capture-and-the-push-for-5g/
Acknowledgments

The following individuals contributed to the drafting of this Policy Brief:

Arthur Firstenberg
Kathleen Burke
Ian Jarvis
Christof Plothe
Tess Lawrie

 

Connect with Arthur Firstenberg — substack | website

Cover image credit: geralt




The Insidious Truth Behind Free School Meals

The Insidious Truth Behind Free School Meals
The UN is pushing for universal free school meals, but that level of control would be easily abused. 

by Kit Knightly, OffGuardian
July 25, 2023

 

There is a growing international campaign to institute free school meals all around the globe. On face of it this might seem like a great idea…

but in the New Normal age nothing is ever really free.

So, let’s unpack…

The campaign is being spear-headed by the UN-backed School Meals Coalition (SMC), whose self-proclaimed goal is “free school meals for every child by 2030” (for some reason they are obsessed with that date).

The SMC already has over 80 national governments signed up to its pledge,  with over 90 “partners” (including the Rockefeller Foundation), and these numbers are only likely to grow after their presentation at the UN’s World Food Summit earlier today.

At the same time, the Coalition is getting glowing press write-ups, like this one from The Guardian’s economics editor Larry Elliot:

For the scheme to work, rich countries would find around one-third of the $6bn annual cost, with the rest found by the governments of low-income countries through their budgets or though innovative financing ideas such as debt for school meals swaps, under which countries would channel the savings from debt relief into school meals programmes. At a time when aid budgets are being cut, $2bn a year is small change for donor governments and represents just one day’s worth of annual subsidies to food producers. It is a small price to pay for something that could do so much good.

This agenda has been lurking in the shadows of UK politics for a while now, with Labour Party MP Zarah Sultana first pushing FSM to all primary kids back in the winter of 2022.

It feels weird to write sceptically about this, because, as  a self-proclaimed leftist for most of my life, free school meals is exactly the kind of policy I likely would have supported without question just a few short years ago…

…but those few years were Covid years, and they’ve taught us all a lot.

Firstly, and most importantly, its become increasingly apparent that any policy is only as fair as the people implementing it, and only as decent as the intention behind it, and, however superficially humane  this plan might sound, the practical impact would be to hand yet more control over to the same murderous, eugenicist state that very recently killed thousands with a lie.

Secondly, a monopoly is a monopoly – whether private or state-backed – and the moment a monopoly exists the freedom to choose is dead. Freedom of choice is always the first liberty to go, but never the last.

Consider, for a moment, exactly what free school meals means in a post-covid world still reeling from a deliberately created financial crisis and in the midst of a “Great Reset” transformation.

1) The cost of living is soaring, and many parents – working parents as well as unemployed – are simply not able to afford to heat their homes or feed their children.

2) “Covid” caused a huge spike in homeschooling in countries all around the world.

3) there is an on-going campaign to “revolutionize global food systems” by promoting eating insects, GMOs and lab-grown “meat”.

Let’s trace the point where all these policies intersect.

What are we looking at?

Essentially, free school meals can be used to…

a) counter the rise in homeschooling by effectively bribing or coercing struggling parents to keep their kids in school so they can be fed

b) condition children (and their parents) into accepting eating whatever the state chooses to provide – be it ‘healthy’ GM veganism, bug-burgers or lab-grown food paste

c) this conditioning will help to normalise a more general acceptance of these “foods”

And that’s just the passive phase of control. We can assume it won’t stop there because it never does.

Maybe  free school meals will one day be tied to accepting universal basic income payments, or conditional on  your digital ID or your social credit score.

Maybe only vaccinated children will qualify for free school meals.

I’m sure you see my point.

The unfortunate truth is that we live in an era of ever-increasing  – and anti-human – corporate/state overreach.

The food might be free in the financial sense of the word,  but there will most definitely be a price to pay.

 

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image credit: primalfuture